OSN 3500 2500 1500 Hardware Description Manual

1 Equipment Architecture ...............................................................................

1-1

1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 ...................................................... 1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 ...................................................... 1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A .................................................... 1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B ....................................................

1-1 1-3 1-5 1-5

2 Cabinet ...........................................................................................................

2-1

2.1 Types...................................................................................................... 2.2 Cabinet Configuration ............................................................................. 2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators .......................................................................... 2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit .................................................................. 2.2.3 Other Configuration........................................................................ 2.3 Technical Parameters ............................................................................

2-1 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-5

3 Subrack ..........................................................................................................

3-1

3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500 ........................................................... 3.1.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3.1.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3.1.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 ........................................................... 3.2.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3.2.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3.2.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3.2.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG .................................................. 3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A ......................................................... 3.4.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3.4.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3.4.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3.4.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B ......................................................... 3.5.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3.5.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3.5.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3.5.4 Technical Parameters ....................................................................

3-1 3-1 3-3 3-4 3-9 3-9 3-9 3-11 3-13 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-23 3-24 3-24 3-25 3-27 3-31

4 Board Classification and List ......................................................................

4-1

4.1 Board Classification ................................................................................ 4.1.1 SDH Boards ................................................................................... 4.1.2 PDH Boards ...................................................................................

4-1 4-1 4-3

4.1.3 Data Processing Boards ................................................................ 4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards ................................................... 4.1.5 Other Boards .................................................................................. 4.2 Board Appearance .................................................................................

4-4 4-6 4-9 4-10

5 SDH Boards ...................................................................................................

5-1

5.1 SL64 ....................................................................................................... 5.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.1.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.1.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.1.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.2 SF16/SL16 ............................................................................................. 5.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.2.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.2.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.2.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 ..................................................................................... 5.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.3.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.3.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.3.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1 ..................................................................................... 5.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.4.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.4.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.4.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1 ........................................................... 5.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.5.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.5.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.5.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.5.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................

5-1 5-1 5-2 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-7 5-7 5-8 5-10 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-15 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-19 5-21 5-22 5-22 5-24 5-25 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-31

5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8 ........................................................................ 5.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.6.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.6.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 5.6.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.6.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.6.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................

5-32 5-33 5-34 5-35 5-36 5-40 5-40 5-40

6 PDH Boards ...................................................................................................

6-1

6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 ................................................................................. 6.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.1.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 6.1.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.1.5 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 6.1.6 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 6.1.7 Version Description ........................................................................ 6.1.8 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S ................................................................... 6.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.2.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 6.2.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 6.2.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 6.2.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B ................................................................. 6.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.3.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 6.3.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 6.3.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 6.3.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S .............................................................................. 6.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.4.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 6.4.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 6.4.6 Version Description ........................................................................

6-1 6-2 6-2 6-4 6-5 6-9 6-9 6-9 6-11 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-15 6-20 6-20 6-20 6-22 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-26 6-29 6-29 6-29 6-31 6-31 6-32 6-32 6-33 6-35 6-35

6.4.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................

6-35

7 Data Processing Boards ..............................................................................

7-1

7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 ............................................................... 7.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.1.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.1.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.1.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8 .................................................... 7.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.2.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 7.2.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.2.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.2.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7.3 EMR0/EGR2 ........................................................................................... 7.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.3.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.3.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.3.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7.4 ADL4/ADQ1 ............................................................................................ 7.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.4.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 7.4.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.4.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.4.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7.5 IDL4/IDQ1 .............................................................................................. 7.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.5.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.5.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 7.5.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.5.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.5.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................

7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-8 7-8 7-9 7-11 7-12 7-14 7-15 7-17 7-19 7-20 7-21 7-24 7-24 7-27 7-28 7-30 7-32 7-33 7-34 7-34 7-35 7-36 7-38 7-38 7-39 7-39 7-40 7-40 7-41 7-41 7-43 7-43 7-44 7-44

7.6 MST4 ...................................................................................................... 7.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.6.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.6.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.6.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.6.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................

7-45 7-45 7-46 7-48 7-49 7-49 7-49

8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards ..............................................

8-1

8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE ....................................................................... 8.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.1.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 8.1.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 8.1.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 ................................................................................ 8.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.2.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 8.2.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 8.2.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 8.2.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 8.3 SCC/GSCC ............................................................................................ 8.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.3.4 Version Description ........................................................................ 8.3.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 8.4 CRG ....................................................................................................... 8.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.4.4 Version Description........................................................................ 8.4.5 Technical Parameters ....................................................................

8-2 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-6 8-7 8-7 8-9 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-13 8-13 8-14 8-14 8-16 8-16 8-17 8-18 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-26 8-26

9 Other Boards .................................................................................................

9-1

9.1 LWX ........................................................................................................ 9.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.1.2 Principle .........................................................................................

9-1 9-1 9-2

9.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.1.4 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.1.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C ............................................................................... 9.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.2.4 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.2.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.3 BA2/BPA ................................................................................................ 9.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.3.2 Application ..................................................................................... 9.3.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.3.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.3.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.3.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.4 COA ........................................................................................................ 9.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.4.2 Application ..................................................................................... 9.4.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.4.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.4.5 Installation ...................................................................................... 9.4.6 Version Description. ....................................................................... 9.4.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.5 DCU ........................................................................................................ 9.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.5.2 Application ..................................................................................... 9.5.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.5.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.5.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.5.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI ............................................................................... 9.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.6.2 Principle Of AUX ............................................................................ 9.6.3 Principle of EOW ............................................................................ 9.6.4 Principle of SAP ............................................................................. 9.6.5 Principle of SEI .............................................................................. 9.6.6 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation ..................................................................... 9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper ................................................................. 9.6.9 Version Description ........................................................................

9-3 9-5 9-5 9-7 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-11 9-11 9-12 9-12 9-12 9-13 9-14 9-15 9-15 9-16 9-17 9-17 9-18 9-19 9-22 9-23 9-23 9-25 9-25 9-25 9-26 9-26 9-28 9-28 9-30 9-30 9-33 9-33 9-34 9-35 9-36 9-44 9-46 9-46

9.6.10 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 9.7 PIU ......................................................................................................... 9.7.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU ....................................................... 9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU .......................................................................... 9.7.4 Principle of R2PIU .......................................................................... 9.7.5 Front Pane ..................................................................................... 9.7.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.7.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.8 UPM ....................................................................................................... 9.8.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.8.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.8.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.8.4 Precautions .................................................................................... 9.8.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.9 FAN ........................................................................................................ 9.9.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN ........................................................................ 9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN ........................................................................ 9.9.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.9.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.9.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................

9-47 9-48 9-48 9-48 9-49 9-49 9-50 9-54 9-54 9-55 9-56 9-56 9-57 9-58 9-58 9-59 9-60 9-60 9-61 9-61 9-62 9-62

10 Cables ..........................................................................................................

10-1

10.1 Fiber Jumper ........................................................................................ 10.1.1 Classification ................................................................................ 10.1.2 Connector .................................................................................... 10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable...................................................... 10.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable ................................... 10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable .................................................... 10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable .................................................................. 10.2.4 Equipment -48 V/-60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable ... 10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable ............................................................... 10.2.6 UPM Power Cable ....................................................................... 10.3 Alarm Cable.......................................................................................... 10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable ............................................................... 10.3.2 Indicator/ Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks ................................................................................................. 10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack ......................................................................................... 10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/ Output Cable ................................... 10.4 Management Cable ..............................................................................

10-1 10-1 10-2 10-5 10-5 10-7 10-8 10-9 10-11 10-12 10-14 10-14 10-15 10-17 10-18 10-21

10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable ................................................................. 10.4.2 Serial 1-4/F&f Cable..................................................................... 10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable...................................................... 10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire ........................................................... 10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable ........................................................... 10.4.6 Straight Through Cable ................................................................ 10.4.7 Crossover Cable .......................................................................... 10.5 Signal Cable ......................................................................................... 10.5.1 75ohm 8xE1 Cable ...................................................................... 10.5.2 75ohm 16xE1 Cable .................................................................... 10.5.3 120ohm 8xE1 Cable .................................................................... 10.5.4 120ohm 16xE1 Cable .................................................................. 10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable .................................................................. 10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable ............................. 10.6 Clock Cable .......................................................................................... 10.6.1 Clock Cable .................................................................................. 10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable ...............................................

10-21 10-22 10-24 10-25 10-26 10-27 10-29 10-31 10-31 10-33 10-35 10-37 10-39 10-41 10-43 10-43 10-45

A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board .......................................

A-1

A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description ................................................................. A.2 Board Indicator Description ....................................................................

A-1 A-2

B Board Version Description ..........................................................................

B-1

B.1 Board Version List .................................................................................. B.2 Version Description ................................................................................ B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board .......................................................... B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board............................................................ B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards ................................................... B.2.4 Other Boards .................................................................................

B-1 B-4 B-4 B-5 B-7 B-8

C Power Consumption and Weight ................................................................

C-1

D Abbreviations and Acronyms .....................................................................

D-1

Index .................................................................................................................

HUAWEI

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual V100R003

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual Manual Version

T2-042590-20051020-C-1.31

Product Version

V100R003

BOM

31250390

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China Postal Code: 518129 Website: http://www.huawei.com Email: [email protected]


Copyright © 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks , HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC, TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEIOptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.


Summary of Updates This section provides the update history of this manual and introduces the updates of contents.

Update History Manual Version

Notes

T2-042587-20040215-C-1.10

Initial field trial release

T2-042586-20040501-C-1.11

The manual style is modified.

T2-042552-20041026-C-1.20

Descriptions of the EGT2, EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MST4, LMST4, UXCS, XCE, LWX, and MR2A are added.

T2-042552-20050228-C-1.21

Descriptions of the ETS8, SF64, and COA are added.

T2-042590-20050820-C-1.30

1. The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 are combined into one. 2. The descriptions of the CRG, PIU, PL3A, R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SL1, R1SLQ1and MST4 boards are added. 3. The manual is reorganized. The boards are described in several chapters.

T2-042590-20051020-C-1.31

Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete the description of the N1SL64 and N1SF64 board. Update the weight of the ETSI cabinet and the power consumption of the boards.

Updates of Contents Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Manual Version 1.31 Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete the description of the N1SL64 and N1SF64 board.

Updates in Manual Version 1.30 The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 1500 are combined into one. The manual is reorganized. Chapter 4 of the original manual is divided into 6 chapters (chapter 4 to chapter 9). Chapter 1 Equipment Architecture Introduces the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A and OptiX OSN 1500B respectively. Chapter 2 Cabinet Introduces the cabinet used by OptiX OSN series products. Chapter 3 Subrack Introduces the subrack structure and board configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500REG, OptiX OSN 1500A and OptiX OSN 1500B. Chapter 4 Board Classification and List This is a new chapter, which introduces board classification and gives a list of boards. The subsequent chapters (chapter 5–chapter 9) give detailed descriptions. Chapter 5 SDH Boards The descriptions of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SL1 and R1SLQ1 are added. Chapter 6 PDH Boards The descriptions of the PL3A is added. Chapter 7 Data Processing Boards The descriptions of the N3EFS0, N3EGS2 and N3EFS4 are added. Chapter 8 Cross-connect and SCC Boards The descriptions of the CRG is added. Chapter 9 Other Boards The descriptions of the PIU and FANA are added. Appendix B Board Version Description It is newly added, introducing version characteristics of all boards of the OptiX OSN series products and their differences.

Updates in Manual Version 1.21 Chapter 3 Subrack The boards ETS8, SF64 and COA are added in the table 3-2. Chapter 4 Boards The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: ETS8, SF64 and COA. The detailed descriptions of following boards are modified and improved: EGS2/EFS0/EFS4. Chapter 5 Cables Classification and descriptions of cables are improved.

Updates in Manual Version 1.20 Chapter 3 Subrack The boards EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS are added in the table 3-2.


Chapter 4 Boards The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS.


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

Contents

Contents 1 Equipment Architecture

1-1

1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500

1-1

1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500

1-3

1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A

1-5

1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B

1-5

2 Cabinet

2-1

2.1 Types

2-1

2.2 Cabinet Configuration

2-3

2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators

2-3

2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit

2-4

2.2.3 Other Configuration

2-4

2.3 Technical Parameters

2-5

3 Subrack

3-1

3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500

3-1

3.1.1 Structure

3-1

3.1.2 Slot Distribution

3-3

3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots

3-4

3.1.4 Technical Parameters

3-9

3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500

3-9

3.2.1 Structure

3-9


3-11


3-13


3-17

3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG

3-18


i


Contents

3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A

3-19

3.4.1 Structure

3-19


3-19


3-20


3-23

3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B

3-24

3.5.1 Structure

3-24


3-25


3-27


3-31

4 Board Classification and List

4-1

4.1 Board Classification

4-1

4.1.1 SDH Boards

4-1

4.1.2 PDH Boards

4-3

4.1.3 Data Processing Boards

4-4

4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards

4-6

4.1.5 Other Boards

4-9

4.2 Board Appearance

4-10

5 SDH Boards

5-1

5.1 SL64

5-1

5.1.1 Functionality

5-1

5.1.2 Principle

5-2

5.1.3 Front Panel

5-4

5.1.4 Parameter Configuration

5-5

5.1.5 Version Description

5-5


5-5

5.2 SF16/SL16

5-7

5.2.1 Functionality

5-7

5.2.2 Principle

5-8

5.2.3 Front Panel

5-10


5-11


5-11


5-12

5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4

5-15

5.3.1 Functionality

5-15

5.3.2 Principle

5-16


ii


Contents

5.3.3 Front Panel

5-17


5-18


5-19


5-19

5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1

5-21

5.4.1 Functionality

5-22

5.4.2 Principle

5-22

5.4.3 Front Panel

5-24


5-25


5-25


5-26

5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1

5-27

5.5.1 Functionality

5-28

5.5.2 Principle

5-29

5.5.3 Front Panel

5-29


5-30


5-31


5-31

5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8

5-32

5.6.1 Functionality

5-33

5.6.2 Principle

5-34

5.6.3 Front Panel

5-35

5.6.4 Protection Configuration

5-36


5-40


5-40


5-40

6 PDH Boards

6-1

6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8

6-1

6.1.2 Functionality

6-2

6.1.3 Principle

6-2

6.1.4 Front Panel

6-4


6-5


6-9


6-9


6-9

6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S

6-11


iii


Contents

6.2.1 Functionality

6-11

6.2.2 Principle

6-12

6.2.3 Front Panel

6-13


6-15


6-20


6-20


6-20

6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B

6-22

6.3.1 Functionality

6-22

6.3.2 Principle

6-23

6.3.3 Front Panel

6-24


6-26


6-29


6-29


6-29

6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S

6-31

6.4.1 Functionality

6-31

6.4.2 Principle

6-32

6.4.3 Front Panel

6-32


6-33


6-35


6-35


6-35

7 Data Processing Boards

7-1

7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

7-2

7.1.1 Functionality

7-3

7.1.2 Principle

7-4

7.1.3 Front Panel

7-5


7-8


7-8


7-9

7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8

7-11

7.2.1 Functionality

7-12

7.2.2 Principle

7-14

7.2.3 Front Panel

7-15


7-17


iv


Contents


7-19


7-20


7-21

7.3 EMR0/EGR2

7-24

7.3.1 Functionality

7-24

7.3.2 Principle

7-27

7.3.3 Front Panel

7-28


7-30


7-32


7-33

7.4 ADL4/ADQ1

7-34

7.4.1 Functionality

7-34

7.4.2 Principle

7-35

7.4.3 Front Panel

7-36


7-38


7-38


7-39


7-39

7.5 IDL4/IDQ1

7-40

7.5.1 Functionality

7-40

7.5.2 Principle

7-41

7.5.3 Front Panel

7-41


7-43


7-43


7-44


7-44

7.6 MST4

7-45

7.6.1 Functionality

7-45

7.6.2 Principle

7-46

7.6.3 Front Panel

7-48


7-49


7-49


7-49

8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards 8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE

8-1 8-2

8.1.1 Functionality

8-2


v


Contents

8.1.2 Principle

8-3

8.1.3 Front Panel

8-4


8-6


8-7


8-7

8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16

8-9

8.2.1 Functionality

8-9

8.2.2 Principle

8-10

8.2.3 Front Panel

8-11


8-13


8-13


8-14


8-14

8.3 SCC/GSCC

8-16

8.3.1 Functionality

8-16

8.3.2 Principle

8-17

8.3.3 Front Panel

8-18


8-21


8-21

8.4 CRG

8-22

8.4.1 Functionality

8-22

8.4.2 Principle

8-23

8.4.3 Front Panel

8-24


8-26


8-26

9 Other Boards

9-1

9.1 LWX

9-1

9.1.1 Functionality

9-1

9.1.2 Principle

9-2

9.1.3 Front Panel

9-3


9-5


9-5

9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

9-7

9.2.1 Functionality

9-7

9.2.2 Principle

9-8

9.2.3 Front Panel

9-9


vi


Contents


9-11


9-11

9.3 BA2/BPA

9-12

9.3.1 Functionality

9-12

9.3.2 Application

9-12

9.3.3 Principle

9-13

9.3.4 Front Panel

9-14


9-15


9-15

9.4 COA

9-16

9.4.1 Functionality

9-17

9.4.2 Application

9-17

9.4.3 Principle

9-18

9.4.4 Front Panel

9-19

9.4.5 Installation

9-22

9.4.6 Version Description.

9-23


9-23

9.5 DCU

9-25

9.5.1 Functionality

9-25

9.5.2 Application

9-25

9.5.3 Principle

9-26

9.5.4 Front Panel

9-26


9-28


9-28

9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI

9-30

9.6.1 Functionality

9-30

9.6.2 Principle Of AUX

9-33

9.6.3 Principle of EOW

9-33

9.6.4 Principle of SAP

9-34

9.6.5 Principle of SEI

9-35

9.6.6 Front Panel

9-36

9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation

9-44

9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper

9-46


9-46


9-47

9.7 PIU

9-48

9.7.1 Functionality

9-48


vii


Contents

9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU

9-48

9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU

9-49

9.7.4 Principle of R2PIU

9-49

9.7.5 Front Pane

9-50


9-54


9-54

9.8 UPM

9-55

9.8.1 Functionality

9-56

9.8.2 Principle

9-56

9.8.3 Front Panel

9-57

9.8.4 Precautions

9-58


9-58

9.9 FAN

9-59

9.9.1 Functionality

9-60

9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN

9-60

9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN

9-61

9.9.4 Front Panel

9-61


9-62


9-62

10 Cables

10-1

10.1 Fiber Jumper

10-1

10.1.1 Classification

10-1

10.1.2 Connector

10-2

10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable

10-5

10.2.1 Cabinet –48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable

10-5

10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable

10-7

10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable

10-8

10.2.4 Equipment –48 V/–60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable

10-9

10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable

10-11

10.2.6 UPM Power Cable

10-12

10.3 Alarm Cable

10-14

10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable

10-14

10.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks

10-15

10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack

10-17

10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Cable

10-18

10.4 Management Cable

10-21


viii


Contents

10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable

10-21

10.4.2 Serial 1–4/F&f Cable

10-22

10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable

10-24

10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire

10-25

10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable

10-26

10.4.6 Straight Through Cable

10-27

10.4.7 Crossover Cable

10-29

10.5 Signal Cable

10-31

10.5.1 75 Ω 8xE1 Cable

10-31

10.5.2 75 Ω 16xE1 Cable

10-33

10.5.3 120 Ω 8xE1 Cable

10-35

10.5.4 120 Ω 16xE1 Cable

10-37

10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable

10-39

10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable

10-41

10.6 Clock Cable

10-43

10.6.1 Clock Cable

10-43

10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable

10-45

A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board

A-1

A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description

A-1

A.2 Board Indicator Description

A-2

B Board Version Description

B-1

B.1 Board Version List

B-1

B.2 Version Description

B-4

B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board

B-4

B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board

B-5

B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards

B-7

B.2.4 Other Boards

B-8

C Power Consumption and Weight

C-1

D Abbreviations and Acronyms

D-1


ix


Figures

Figures Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500

1-1

Figure 1-2 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500

1-2

Figure 1-3 The OptiX OSN 2500

1-3


1-4

Figure 1-5 The OptiX OSN 1500A

1-5

Figure 1-6 The OptiX OSN 1500B

1-5

Figure 2-1 The 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet

2-2

Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet configuration

2-3

Figure 2-3 The power distribution unit

2-4

Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

3-2

Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 3500

3-3


3-10

Figure 3-4 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)

3-11

Figure 3-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)

3-11

Figure 3-6 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)

3-12

Figure 3-7 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)

3-12

Figure 3-8 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A

3-19

Figure 3-9 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (before slot segmentation)

3-19

Figure 3-10 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (after slot segmentation)

3-20

Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A

3-20

Figure 3-12 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B

3-24

Figure 3-13 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)

3-25

Figure 3-14 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)

3-25

Figure 3-15 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)

3-26

Figure 3-16 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)

3-26


x


Figures

Figure 4-1 Board appearance

4-11

Figure 5-1 The principle block diagram of the SL64

5-3

Figure 5-2 The front panel of the SL64

5-4

Figure 5-3 The principle block diagram of the SF16

5-9

Figure 5-4 The front panel of the SL16 and the SF16

5-10

Figure 5-5 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4

5-16

Figure 5-6 The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4

5-18

Figure 5-7 The principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1

5-23

Figure 5-8 The front panel of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1

5-24

Figure 5-9 The front panel of the R1SL4 and R1SLD4

5-29

Figure 5-10 The front panel of the R1SL1 and R1SLQ1

5-29

Figure 5-11 The principle block diagram of the SEP1

5-34

Figure 5-12 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8

5-35

Figure 5-13 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500

5-37

Figure 5-14 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500

5-38


5-39

Figure 5-16 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

5-39

Figure 6-1 The functional block diagram of the SPQ4

6-3

Figure 6-2 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04

6-4

Figure 6-3 The 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500

6-6

Figure 6-4 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500

6-7


6-8

Figure 6-6 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

6-8

Figure 6-7 The functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A

6-12

Figure 6-8 The mapping and multiplexing process of E3/DS3 signals

6-13

Figure 6-9 The front panel of the PD3, PL3, PL3A, C34S and D34S

6-14

Figure 6-10 The 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500

6-16

Figure 6-11 Board layout upon 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500

6-18

Figure 6-12 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 n the OptiX OSN 2500

6-19

Figure 6-13 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

6-20

Figure 6-14 The functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM

6-23

Figure 6-15 The mapping and multiplexing process of E1/T1 signals

6-24

Figure 6-16 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B

6-25

Figure 6-17 The 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500

6-27

Figure 6-18 Slot assignment upon 1:8 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 3500

6-28


6-29


xi


Figures

Figure 6-20 The front panel of the PD1, PL1, L12S and L75S

6-32

Figure 6-21 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500

6-34

Figure 6-22 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1

6-35

Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2

7-5

Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

7-6

Figure 7-3 Functional block diagram of the EGS2

7-14

Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8

7-15

Figure 7-5 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 3500

7-18

Figure 7-6 Board configuration upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 2500

7-19

Figure 7-7 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OSN 1500

7-19

Figure 7-8 Functional block diagram of the EMR0

7-27

Figure 7-9 Front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2

7-29

Figure 7-10 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1

7-35

Figure 7-11 Front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1

7-37

Figure 7-12 Front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1

7-42

Figure 7-13 The functional block diagram of the MST4

7-47

Figure 7-14 The front panel of the MST4

7-48

Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS

8-3

Figure 8-2 Front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE

8-4

Figure 8-3 Configuration of extended subracks

8-6

Figure 8-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL16

8-11

Figure 8-5 Front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16

8-11

Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the SCC

8-17

Figure 8-7 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame

8-18

Figure 8-8 The front panel of the SCC and the GSCC

8-19

Figure 8-9 Functional block diagram of the CRG

8-23

Figure 8-10 Front panel of the CRG

8-24

Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the LWX

9-2

Figure 9-2 Front panel of the LWX

9-4

Figure 9-3 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C serves as OTM station

9-8

Figure 9-4 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals

9-8

Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

9-9

Figure 9-6 Front panel of the MR2A

9-10

Figure 9-7 Position of BA and PA in the network

9-13

Figure 9-8 Functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA

9-13

Figure 9-9 Front panel of the BA2 and BPA

9-14


xii


Figures

Figure 9-10 Appearance of the 61COA (PA)

9-16

Figure 9-11 Appearance of the 62COA

9-17

Figure 9-12 Application of Raman amplifier (62COA)

9-18

Figure 9-13 Functional block diagram of 61COA

9-18

Figure 9-14 Front panel of the COA

9-19

Figure 9-15 Front panel of the 62COA

9-19

Figure 9-16 E2000 flange and fiber connector

9-20

Figure 9-17 Serial communication between the COA and the SCC

9-21

Figure 9-18 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet

9-23

Figure 9-19 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system

9-25

Figure 9-20 Functional block diagram of the DCU

9-26

Figure 9-21 Front panel of the DCU

9-27

Figure 9-22 Functional block diagram of the AUX

9-33

Figure 9-23 Functional block diagram of the EOW

9-34

Figure 9-24 Position of orderwire bytes in the SDH frame

9-34

Figure 9-25 Functional block diagram of the SAP

9-35

Figure 9-26 Functional block diagram of the SEI

9-36

Figure 9-27 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 3500)

9-45


9-45

Figure 9-29 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 3500)

9-46


9-46

Figure 9-31 The principle block diagram of the PIU

9-48

Figure 9-32 Functional block diagram of the R1PIU

9-49


9-50

Figure 9-34 Front panel of the N1PIU

9-51

Figure 9-35 Front panel of the Q1PIU

9-51

Figure 9-36 Front panel of the R1PIU

9-52


9-53

Figure 9-38 Appearance of the power box

9-55

Figure 9-39 Rear view of the power box

9-57

Figure 9-40 Appearance of the FAN (OptiX OSN 3500)

9-59

Figure 9-41 Functional block diagram of the N1FAN

9-60

Figure 9-42 Functional block diagram of the R1FAN

9-61

Figure 9-43 Front panel of the R1FAN

9-62

Figure 10-1 LC/PC optical interface

10-3

Figure 10-2 SC/PC Optical interface

10-4


xiii


Figures

Figure 10-3 FC/PC optical interface

10-4

Figure 10-4 E2000/APC optical interface

10-5

Figure 10-5 –48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable

10-6

Figure 10-6 Cabinet PGND power cable

10-6

Figure 10-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable

10-7

Figure 10-8 Structure of the subrack power cable

10-8

Figure 10-9 Structure of the –48 V/–60 V power cable

10-9

Figure 10-10 Structure of the PGND power cable

10-10

Figure 10-11 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable

10-11


10-12

Figure 10-13 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable

10-14

Figure 10-14 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks

10-16

Figure 10-15 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack

10-17

Figure 10-16 Structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable

10-19

Figure 10-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable

10-21

Figure 10-18 Structure of the serial 1–4/F&f cable

10-23

Figure 10-19 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable

10-24

Figure 10-20 Structure of ordinary telephone wire

10-25

Figure 10-21 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable

10-27

Figure 10-22 Structure of straight through cable

10-28

Figure 10-23 Structure of the crossover cable

10-29

Figure 10-24 Structure of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable

10-31


10-33

Figure 10-26 Structure of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable

10-36


10-37

Figure 10-28 Structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable

10-40

Figure 10-29 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable

10-41

Figure 10-30 Structure of the 75 Ω clock cable

10-44


10-44

Figure 10-32 Structure of the 1-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable

10-45


10-46


xiv


Tables

Tables Table 2-1 Types of the cabinets for OptiX OSN products

2-1

Table 2-2 Description of ETSI cabinet indicators

2-3

Table 2-3 Mapping relation between terminals and PIU boards

2-4

Table 2-4 Technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet

2-5

Table 3-1 Slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500

3-3

Table 3-2 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity) 3-4 Table 3-3 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity) 3-6 Table 3-4 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500

3-7

Table 3-5 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500

3-8

Table 3-6 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

3-9

Table 3-7 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 2500

3-13

Table 3-8 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500

3-13

Table 3-9 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500

3-16


3-16

Table 3-11 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack

3-17

Table 3-12 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG

3-18

Table 3-13 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A

3-21

Table 3-14 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A

3-22

Table 3-15 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A

3-23

Table 3-16 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 1500B

3-27

Table 3-17 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B

3-27

Table 3-18 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B

3-29

Table 3-19 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B

3-30

Table 3-20 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B

3-31


xv


Tables

Table 4-1 SDH boards

4-2

Table 4-2 PDH boards

4-3

Table 4-3 Data processing boards

4-5

Table 4-4 Cross-Connect and SCC boards

4-7

Table 4-5 Other boards

4-9

Table 5-1 Slots for the SL64

5-1

Table 5-2 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL64

5-5

Table 5-3 Technical parameters of the SL64

5-5

Table 5-4 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with ITU-T G.692

5-6

Table 5-5 Slots for the SL16 and SF16

5-7

Table 5-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SF16/SL16

5-11

Table 5-7 Technical parameters of the SL16

5-12

Table 5-8 Technical parameters of the SF16

5-13

Table 5-9 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with G.692

5-14

Table 5-10 Slots for the SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4

5-15

Table 5-11 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4

5-19

Table 5-12 Technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4

5-19

Table 5-13 Slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1

5-21

Table 5-14 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1

5-25

Table 5-15 Technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1

5-26

Table 5-16 Slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1

5-27

Table 5-17 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for half-slot optical processing boards

5-30

Table 5-18 Technical parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1

5-31

Table 5-19 Slot for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8

5-32

Table 5-20 Different access abilities of the SEP1

5-32

Table 5-21 Interfaces of the EU08 and OU08

5-36

Table 5-22 TPS protection of the SEP1

5-36

Table 5-23 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500

5-38

Table 5-24 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500

5-39

Table 5-25 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

5-40

Table 5-26 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SEP1

5-40

Table 5-27 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8

5-41

Table 6-1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8

6-1

Table 6-2 Interfaces on the MU04

6-5

Table 6-3 The TPS protection of the SPQ4

6-5

Table 6-4 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500

6-7


xvi


Tables

Table 6-5 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500

6-8

Table 6-6 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

6-9

Table 6-7 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SPQ4

6-9

Table 6-8 Technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04

6-10

Table 6-9 Slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8

6-11

Table 6-10 Interfaces on the D34S

6-15

Table 6-11 The TPS protection of the PL3/PD3

6-15

Table 6-12 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:3 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500

6-17

Table 6-13 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500

6-18


6-18

Table 6-15 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500

6-19

Table 6-16 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 1500B

6-19

Table 6-17 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-20 Table 6-18 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S

6-21

Table 6-19 Slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B

6-22

Table 6-20 Comparison between the PQ1 and PQM

6-22

Table 6-21 Comparison between the D75S, D12S, and D12B

6-25

Table 6-22 The TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM

6-26


6-27


6-28

Table 6-25 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B

6-29

Table 6-26 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B

6-29

Table 6-27 Slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S

6-31

Table 6-28 Comparison between the PL1, L75S, and L12S

6-33

Table 6-29 The TPS protection of the PD1

6-33

Table 6-30 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:2 TPS of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-34 Table 6-31 Slot assignment upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

6-35

Table 6-32 Technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S

6-36

Table 7-1 Slots for the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

7-2

Table 7-2 Indicators of the EGT2

7-7

Table 7-3 Indicators of the EFF8

7-7

Table 7-4 Interfaces of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

7-7

Table 7-5 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2/EFT8/EFT4

7-8

Table 7-6 Technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

7-9


xvii


Tables

Table 7-7 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8

7-11

Table 7-8 Indicators of the EGS2

7-16

Table 7-9 Interfaces of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8

7-16

Table 7-10 TPS protection of the EFS0

7-17

Table 7-11 Slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500

7-18

Table 7-12 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0

7-20

Table 7-13 N1 and N2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 boards

7-21

Table 7-14 Technical parameters of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8

7-22

Table 7-15 Slots for the EMR0 and EGR2

7-24

Table 7-16 Indicators of the EGR2

7-30

Table 7-17 Interfaces of EMR0 and EGR2

7-30

Table 7-18 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2

7-31

Table 7-19 Version description of the EMR0 and the EGR2

7-32

Table 7-20 Technical Parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2

7-33

Table 7-21 Slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1

7-34

Table 7-22 Parameters for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1

7-38

Table 7-23 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1

7-39

Table 7-24 Slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1

7-40

Table 7-25 Paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1

7-43

Table 7-26 Parameters for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1

7-43

Table 7-27 Technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1

7-44

Table 7-28 Slots for the MST4

7-45

Table 7-29 The service types and rates provided by the MST4

7-46

Table 7-30 Technical parameters of the MST4

7-49

Table 8-1 Comparison among GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE.

8-2

Table 8-2 Indicators of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE

8-5

Table 8-3 External clock interface of the GXCS, EXCS and UXCS

8-6

Table 8-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards

8-7

Table 8-5 Technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE

8-7

Table 8-6 Comparison among CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16

8-9

Table 8-7 Indicators of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16

8-12

Table 8-8 Interfaces of CXL

8-13

Table 8-9 Correspondence between C2 byte setting and service type

8-14

Table 8-10 Technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16

8-14

Table 8-11 Switch description of the SCC

8-19

Table 8-12 Indicator description of the SCC

8-20


xviii


Tables

Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the SCC

8-21

Table 8-14 Switch description of the CRG

8-24

Table 8-15 Indicator description of the CRG

8-25

Table 8-16 Technical parameters of the CRG

8-26

Table 9-1 Slots for the LWX

9-1

Table 9-2 Interfaces of the LWX

9-4

Table 9-3 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX

9-5

Table 9-4 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX

9-6

Table 9-5 Technical parameters of the LWX

9-6

Table 9-6 Slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C

9-7

Table 9-7 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

9-10

Table 9-8 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

9-11

Table 9-9 Slots for the BA2 and BPA

9-12

Table 9-10 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA

9-15

Table 9-11 Indicators of the 61COA/62COA

9-20

Table 9-12 Relation between output alarm and interface pin

9-21

Table 9-13 Technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA

9-23

Table 9-14 Technical parameters of the DCU

9-28

Table 9-15 Slots for the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI

9-30

Table 9-16 Indicator of the AUX

9-36

Table 9-17 Interfaces of the N1AUX

9-37

Table 9-18 Pin assignment of CLK1 and CLK2 interface

9-38

Table 9-19 Pin assignment of ETH, COM, EXT and F1 interface

9-38

Table 9-20 Pin assignment of F&f interface

9-38

Table 9-21 Pin assignment of PHONE, V1 and V2 interface

9-39

Table 9-22 Pin assignment of LAMP1 and LAMP2 interface

9-39

Table 9-23 Pin assignment of ALMO1 and ALMO2 interface

9-39

Table 9-24 Pin assignment of OAM interface

9-40

Table 9-25 Pin assignment of S1, S2, S3 and S4 interface

9-40

Table 9-26 Pin assignment of ALMI1 interface

9-40


9-41


9-41


9-41

Table 9-30 Interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel

9-42

Table 9-31 Indicators of the EOW

9-42

Table 9-32 Interfaces of the EOW

9-43


xix


Tables

Table 9-33 Interfaces of the SAP

9-43

Table 9-34 Interfaces of the SEI

9-43

Table 9-35 Jumper J9 setting

9-46

Table 9-36 Technical parameters of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI

9-47

Table 9-37 Interfaces on the N1PIU front panel

9-51

Table 9-38 Interfaces of the Q1PIU

9-52

Table 9-39 Indicator of the R1PIU

9-52

Table 9-40 Interfaces of the Q1PIU

9-52

Table 9-41 Indicators and the switch on the R2PIU front panel

9-53

Table 9-42 Technical parameters of the PIU

9-54

Table 9-43 Indicators of the power box

9-57

Table 9-44 Interfaces on the power box front panel

9-57

Table 9-45 Technical parameters of the UPM

9-58

Table 9-46 Indicator of the N1FAN

9-61

Table 9-47 Indicators of the R1FAN

9-62

Table 9-48 Technical parameters of the FAN

9-62

Table 10-1 Classification of fiber jumper

10-2

Table 10-2 Classification of fiber connector

10-3

Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables

10-5

Table 10-4 Pin assignment of subrack power cable

10-8

Table 10-5 Pin assignment of the –48 V/–60 V power cable

10-10

Table 10-6 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable

10-12

Table 10-7 Pin assignment of the UPM power cable

10-13

Table 10-8 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cable

10-14

Table 10-9 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable

10-15

Table 10-10 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks

10-16

Table 10-11 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack

10-18

Table 10-12 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500

10-19

Table 10-13 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 1500

10-20

Table 10-14 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables

10-21

Table 10-15 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable

10-22

Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the serial 1–4/F&f cable

10-23

Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable

10-25

Table 10-18 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire

10-26

Table 10-19 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable

10-27

Table 10-20 Pin assignment of the straight through cable

10-28


xx


Tables

Table 10-21 Pin assignment of crossover cable

10-29

Table 10-22 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables

10-31

Table 10-23 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable

10-32


10-33

Table 10-25 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable

10-36


10-38

Table 10-27 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable

10-42

Table 10-28 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables

10-43

Table 10-29 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable

10-44

Table 10-30 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cable

10-46

Table B-1 N1 and N2 optical line interface boards

B-5

Table B-2 Ethernet processing board version

B-5

Table B-3 N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards

B-6

Table B-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards

B-7

Table B-5 N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC

B-7

Table B-6 Q1 and Q2 CXL1/4/16 boards

B-8

Table B-7 Version description of PIU, AUX and FAN

B-8


xxi


About This Manual

About This Manual Release Notes This manual covers:

The OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003



Related Manuals The following table shows the manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OSN 2500, and OSN 1500. OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 1500

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Documentation Guide OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual System Description

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual System Description

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual System Description

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual



OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Electronic Documentation



OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual Networking and Application



OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Routine Maintenance

Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxii

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual OptiX OSN 3500

About This Manual OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 1500

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Alarm and Performance Event OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Commissioning Guide OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Configuration Guide Note: The manual name with OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 indicates that the manual is shared by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.

Main points of the manuals for the OptiX OSN series products are as follows.

Documentation Guide Introduces the contents and usage of the manuals.

Technical Manual System Description Introduces the functionality, structure, performance, specifications, and theory of the product.

Technical Manual Networking and Application Introduces the networking, protection, and application of the product.

Hardware Description Manual Introduces the hardware of the product, including the cabinet, subrack, power, fan, board, and a variety of interfaces.

Maintenance Manual Routine Maintenance Introduces the main items and precautions involved in routing maintenance.

Maintenance Troubleshooting Guides the analysis and troubleshooting of common faults.

Maintenance Alarm and Performance Event Guides the way of processing alarms and performance events.

Installation Manual Guides the on-site installation of the product, covering the installation of cabinet, subrack and components, and grounding specifications.

Commissioning Guide Introduces the equipment commissioning process, including indices of hardware, software, and service operation.

Configuration Guide Introduces the way and procedures of configuring SDH services, Ethernet private line services, Ethernet LAN services, RPR services, and ATM services on the T2000.

Electronic Documentation (CD-ROM) Covers all the preceding manuals. Acrobat Reader is attached.

Organization The manual is organized as follows.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxiii


About This Manual

Chapter

Description

Chapter 1 Equipment Architecture

Introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500.

Chapter 2 Cabinet

Describes the dimensions, appearance, and technical specifications of the cabinets used by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500, and the configuration in the cabinets.

Chapter 3 Subrack

Introduces the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 subracks. Lists the board types that can seat in the slots of the subracks.

Chapter 4 Board Classification and List

Classifies the boards into SDH boards, PDH boards, data processing boards, cross-connect and SCC boards, and other boards, and gives a detailed list of all available boards.

Chapter 5 SDH Boards

Introduces SDH boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.

Chapter 6 PDH Boards

Introduces PDH boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.

Chapter 7 Data Processing Boards

Introduces data processing boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.

Chapter 8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards

Introduces cross-connect and SCC boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.

Chapter 9 Other Boards

Introduces other boards (for example, the system auxiliary interface board) in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.

Chapter 10 Cables

Introduces the external and the internal cables of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, and gives detailed description in terms of the structure, appearance, pin assignment, and technical parameters.

Appendix A–Appendix D

Includes four appendices: Appendix A Quick Reference for Indicators Appendix B Power Consumption and Weight of Boards Appendix C Board Version Configuration Appendix D Abbreviations and Acronyms The appendices give a quick searching to equipment-related information during routine maintenance. Readers can locate the chapter where required information is covered through appendices quickly.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxiv


About This Manual

Intended Audience This manual is intended for:

Network administrator

Maintenance engineer

Provisioning engineer

Conventions The manual uses the following conventions.

Symbol Conventions Symbol

Description

Warning

A warning notice with this symbol indicates high voltage could result in harm to person.

Warning

A warning notice with this symbol indicates strong laser beam could result in personal injury. A warning notice with this symbol indicates a risk of personal injury.

Warning Caution

A caution notice with this symbol indicates a risk to equipment damage or loss of data.

Caution

A caution notice with this symbol indicates the equipment is static-sensitive.

Important Note

An important note notice with this symbol helps you avoid an undesirable situation or indicates important supplementary information.

Note

A note notice with this symbol indicates additional, helpful, non-critical information.

GUI Conventions Convention

Description

<>

Button name are inside angle brackets. For example, click the button

[]

Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window.

/

Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example, [File/Create/Folder].

Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxv


1 Equipment Architecture

1

Equipment Architecture

This chapter introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.

1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500.


The OptiX OSN 3500 can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1



Figure 1-2 shows the components when the equipment seating in a 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet. The OptiX OSN 3500 is composed of cabinet, side panel, power distribution unit, subrack, fixing frame for order wire, boards, and cables. 1

2

6

3

4

5

1. Cabinet 4. Fixing frame for order wire

2. Power distribution unit 5. Lower subrack


Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-2

3. Upper subrack 6. Side panel



1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 Figure 1-3 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 2500.


The OptiX OSN 2500 can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, or in a standard 19-inch cabinet. Figure 1-4 shows the components when the equipment seating in a 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet. The OptiX OSN 2500 is composed of cabinet, side panel, power distribution unit, subrack, fixing frame for order wire, boards, and cables.




1

2

7 3

4

5

6

1. Cabinet 5. Middle subrack

2. Power distribution unit 6. Lower subrack

3. Upper subrack 7. Side panel



4. Fixing frame for order wire



1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A The OptiX OSN 1500A is a case-shape equipment. It can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, a standard 19-inch cabinet, or be hanged on the wall. Figure 1-5 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Figure 1-5 The OptiX OSN 1500A

1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B The OptiX OSN 1500B is a case-shape equipment. It can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, a standard 19-inch cabinet, or be hanged on the wall. Figure 1-6 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Figure 1-6 The OptiX OSN 1500B



2 Cabinet

2

Cabinet

This chapter introduces the dimensions, technical specifications, and the configuration of the cabinet equipped by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, or OptiX OSN 1500B.

2.1 Types Table 2-1 shows the cabinets that can house the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B. Table 2-1 Types of the cabinets for OptiX OSN products

Cabinet

ETSI 300-mm deep

ETSI 600-mm deep

OptiX OSN 3500

9

9

OptiX OSN 2500

9

9

9

OptiX OSN 1500A

9

9

9

OptiX OSN 1500B

9

9

9

Product

19-inch cabinet

Notes: These cabinets should be provided by Huawei. Figure 2-1 shows the appearance of the ETSI cabinet.


Access network cabinet

Hanging

9

9 9


2 Cabinet

Figure 2-1 The 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet



2 Cabinet

2.2 Cabinet Configuration There are indicators and a power distribution unit on the top of ETSI cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-2. 1 2 Power Critical MajorMinor

Power distribution unit

1. Cabinet indicators

2. Power distribution unit

Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet configuration

2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators Table 2-2 shows the description of cabinet indicators. Table 2-2 Description of ETSI cabinet indicators

Indicator

Status

Description

Power indicator - Power (green)

On

The equipment is powered on.

Off

The equipment is not powered on.

On

There are critical alarms.

Off

There are no critical alarms.

On

There are major alarms.

Off

There are no major alarms.

On

There are minor alarms.

Off

There are no minor alarms.

Critical alarm indicator - Critical (red) Major alarm indicator - Major (orange) Minor alarm indicator - Minor (yellow)

Note: The cabinet indicators are driven by subrack, so you should connect the cable properly and power on the subrack first.



2 Cabinet

2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit Figure 2-3 shows the power distribution unit.

RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)

INPUT

SW1/20A SW2/20A SW3/20A SW4/20A

1. Grounding stud 3. RTN1(+) 5. NEG1(–) 7. Left output cable terminal

SW1/20A SW2/20A SW3/20A SW4/20A

2. PGND 4. RTN2(+) 6. NEG2(–) 8. Right output cable terminal

Figure 2-3 The power distribution unit

To the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500A, the left output cable terminal feeds power to the PIU board on the left side of the subrack, and the right output cable terminal to that on the right side of the subrack. Table 2-3 reflects the mapping relation between the terminals and PIU boards. Table 2-3 Mapping relation between terminals and PIU boards

Left terminal

Connected to

Right terminal

Connected to

1

The PIU board on the left of the first subrack

1

The PIU board on the right of the first subrack

2

The PIU board on the left of the second subrack

2

The PIU board on the right of the second subrack

3

The PIU board on the left of the third subrack

3

The PIU board on the right of the third subrack

4

The PIU board on the left of the fourth subrack

4

The PIU board on the right of the fourth subrack

Note: To the OptiX OSN 3500, only terminal 1 and terminal 2 are in use normally. Terminals 3 and 4 can feed power to other equipment, such as COA.

To the OptiX OSN 1500B, the left output cable terminal feeds power to the upper PIU board of the subrack, and the right output cable terminal to the lower PIU board of the subrack.

2.2.3 Other Configuration The cabinet can also house other external case-shape devices.

Uninterruptible power modules (UPM)

The UPM numbered GIE4805S can feed power to the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500 directly. The UPM converts the 220 V AC into –48 V DC, thus providing Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-4


2 Cabinet

power for equipment without –48 V DC feeding and for storage battery when required.

Case-shape optical amplifier (COA)

The OptiX OSN 3500 and the OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured with two COA at most. The OptiX OSN 1500 can be configured with one COA.

Tone & Data access unit (TDA)

Fiber spooling frame: spooling redundancy fibers inside the cabinet

HUB

2.3 Technical Parameters Table 2-4 shows the technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet. Table 2-4 Technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet

Dimensions (mm)

Weight (kg)

OSN 3500 subracks housed



600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H)

55

1

2

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H)

79

1

2

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H)

60

2

3

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H)

84

2

3

Up to the cabinet capacity and the number of available power supplies

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H)

70

2

4

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H)

94

2

4



3 Subrack

3

Subrack

This chapter introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the subrack of:

The OptiX OSN 3500

The OptiX OSN 2500

The OptiX OSN 2500 REG

The OptiX OSN 1500A

The OptiX OSN 1500B

3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500 This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

3.1.1 Structure The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into board area, fan area, and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-1.



3 Subrack

1

2

1

3

1. Board area

2. Fan area

3. Fiber routing area


Board area: housing all boards of the OptiX OSN 3500

Fan area: housing three fan modules, enabling heat dissipation function

Fiber routing area: for fiber routing



3 Subrack

3.1.2 Slot Distribution The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 has two layers. The upper layer gives 19 slots for interface boards. The lower layer gives 18 slots for processing boards. Figure 3-2 shows the slot distribution. S L O T 1 9

S L O T 2 0

S L O T 2 2

S L O T 2 1

S L O T 2 3

S L O T 2 4

S L O T 2 5

S L O T 2 6

S L O T 2 7

S L O T 2 8

P I U

P I U

FAN S L O T 1

S L O T 2

S L O T 3

S L O T 4

S L O T 2 9

S L O T 3 0

S L O T 3 1

S L O T 3 2

S L O T 3 3

S L O T 3 4

S L O T 6

S L O T 7

S L O T 8

S L O T 3 6

S L O T 3 7 A U X

FAN S L O T 5

S L O T 3 5

S L O T 9

S L O T 1 0

X C S

X C S

FAN S L O T 1 1

S L O T 1 2

S L O T 1 3

S L O T 1 4

S L O T 1 5

S L O T 1 6

S L O T 1 7

S L O T 1 8

S S C C C C

Fiber Routing

Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 3500

1. Slots for Interface Boards

Service interface boards: slots 19–26, slots 29–36

2. Slots for Processing Boards

Service processing boards: slots 1–8 and slots 11–17

3. Slots for Other Boards

XCS boards: slots 9–10

SCC boards: slots 17–18 (Slot 17 can also hold a service processing board)

Power interface boards: slot 27 and slot 28

Auxiliary interface boards: slot 37

4. Slot Mapping Table

Table 3-1 shows the slot mapping table which associates slots for processing boards to the slots for its corresponding interface boards. Table 3-1 Slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500

Slot for processing boards

Slots for corresponding interface boards



Slot 2

Slots 19, 20

Slot 3

Slots 21, 22



3 Subrack

Slot 4

Slots 23, 24

Slot 5

Slots 25, 26

Slot 13

Slots 29, 30

Slot 14

Slots 31, 32

Slot 15

Slots 33, 34

Slot 16

Slots 35, 36

3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots 1. Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 offers an 80 Gbit/s or 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity depending on the type of cross-connect boards. Table 3-2 and Table 3-3 associate processing boards to the corresponding slots under the two cross-connect configurations.

N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A)

9

9

9

9

N1/N2SLQ4

9

9

9

9

N1/N2SLD4, N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1SLT1 (Note 1)

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1SEP (Note 2) N1SEP1 (Note 2)

Slot 2–slot 5, slot 13–slot 16

9

Slot 17 (1.25 Gbit/s )

9

Slot 13–slot 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slot 15–slot 16 (1.25 Gbit/s )

Slot 11–slot 12 (10 Gbit/s)

N2SL64


Slot 5–slot 6 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Boards

Slot 2–slot 4 (1.25 Gbit/s )

Slots and capacity


Table 3-2 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity)

9

9

9

9

9 9

N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3 N1PL3A

9

N1PQ1, N1PQM

9

N1EFS4

9

9

9

9

9

9

9 9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9 9

N1/N2EFS0



9

9

9

9

9

9

N1EFT8（work with interface boards） N1EFT8 (led out from front panel)

Slot 2–slot 5, slot 13–slot 16


9



9

Slot 13–slot 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slot 15–slot 16 (1.25 Gbit/s )


N1/N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1/N2EGR2


Boards


Slots and capacity

3 Subrack

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1/N2EMR0 (work with interface boards) N1/N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)

9

9

9

9

9

N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDQ1, N1IDL4 (Note 3)

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1MR2A

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1LWX

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1MR2C (Note 4)

Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1–12 optical interfaces. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 19–26 or slots 29–36.



3 Subrack

N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A)

9

9

9

9

N1/N2SLQ4, N1/N2SLD4

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1)

9

9

9 9

9

only in slot 6

only in slot 13

9

9

N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3 N1PL3A

9

N1PQ1, N1PQM

9

N1EFS4

9

9

9

9

9

9

9 9

9

9

9

9

9

9 9

N1/N2EFS0 N1/N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1/N2EGR2

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1EFT8 (work with interface boards) N1EFT8 (led out from front panel)

Slot 2–slot 5, slot 13–slot6

9

N1SEP (Note 2) N1SEP1 (Note 2)

Slot 17 (622 Mbit/s )

9

Slot 14–slot 16 (622 Mbit/s )

9


Slot 11 (10 Gbit/s)

N2SL64

Slot 8 (10 Gbit/s)


Boards


Slots and capacity


Table 3-3 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity)

only in slot 13 9

9

only in slot 6

only in slot 13

9

9

N1/N2EMR0 (work with interface boards)



N1ADL4, N1ADQ1 (Note 3)

9

9

9

9

9

N1IDQ1, N1IDL4 (Note 3)

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1MR2A

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1LWX

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

Slot 2–slot 5, slot 13–slot6

only in slot 13



only in slot 6


9

Slot 11 (10 Gbit/s)

9

Slot 8 (10 Gbit/s)


N1/N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)


Boards


Slots and capacity

3 Subrack

N1MR2C (Note 4)

Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1–12 optical interfaces. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 19–26 or slots 29–36.

2. Interface Boards

Table 3-4 associates interface boards to the corresponding slots.

N1EU08 (Note)

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1OU08

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

(LC interface) (Note) N2OU08 (SC interface) (Note) N1EU04


Slot 36

Slot 35

Slot 34

Slot 33

Slot 32

Slot 31

Slot 30

Slot 29

Slot 26

Slot 25

Slot 24

Slot 23

Slot 22

Slot 21

Boards

Slot 20

Slots

Slot 19



Slot 36

Slot 35

Slot 34

Slot 33

Slot 32

Slot 31

Slot 30

Slot 29

Slot 26

Slot 25

Slot 24

Slot 23

Slot 22

Slot 21

Slot 20

Boards

Slot 19

Slots

3 Subrack

N1MU04

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1D34S

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1D75S

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1D12S

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1D12B

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1ETF8

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1EFF8

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1ETS8

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1TSB8

9

9

Note 1: The OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the N1EU08, N1OU08, and N2OU08 board when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s.

3. Other Boards

Table 3-5 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface boards to the corresponding slots.

N1GXCS, N2GXCS

9

N1EXCS (Note 1)

9

N1UXCSA( Note 1)

9

N1UXCSB( Note 1)

9 9

N1XCE (Note 2) N1SCC

9

N1GSCC, N2GSCC

9


Slot 101–slot 102

Slot 59–slot 60

Slot 38–slot 40

Slot 37

Slot 27–slot 28

Boards

Slot 17–slot 18

Slots

Slot 9–slot 10



Slot 101–slot 102

Slot 59–slot 60

Slot 38–slot 40

Slot 37

Slot 27–slot 28

Slot 17–slot 18

Boards

Slot 9–slot 10

Slots

3 Subrack

9

N1PIU

9

N1AUX

9

N1FAN (Note 3)

9

61COA, 62COA (Note 3)

Note 1: The OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the N1EXCS, N1UXCSA, N1UXCSB, and N1XCE board when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s. Note 2: The N1XCE can only seat in the extended subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500. Logical slots for the N1XCE are slot 59 and slot 60. Note 3: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical slots.

3.1.4 Technical Parameters Table 3-6 lists the technical parameters of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-6 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

Dimensions

722 mm (H) x 497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D)

Weight

23 kg (net weight of the subrack, not including spare boards and fans)

3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack.

3.2.1 Structure The subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500 adopts one-layer structure. It is divided into processing board area, interface board area, auxiliary interface area, fan area, and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-1.



3 Subrack 1

2 3

4 5

1. Auxiliary interface area 4. Fan area

2. Interface board area 5. PIU area

3. Processing board area


Auxiliary interface area: including alarm interfaces, orderwire interface, clock interfaces, operation and maintenance interfaces, F1 port, serial ports and so on

Processing board area: housing the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500

Interface board area: housing the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 2500

Fan area: housing two fan modules, enabling heat dissipation function

PIU area: housing PIU modules, providing power for the OptiX OSN 2500



3 Subrack


S L O T 15

S L O T 16

S L O T 17

S L O T 18

Interface board

Interface board

Interface board

S L O T 14

Interface board

S L O T 13

SAP

S L O T 12

Processing board

S L O T 11 Processing board

CXL16/4/1

CXL16/4/1

Processing board

Processing board

Processing board

Processing board

Interface board

Interface board

Interface board

Interface board

S S S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Processing board

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500 has eight slots for interface boards and ten slots for processing boards. Figure 3-4 shows the slot distribution. Figure 3-5 shows the access capacity for the subrack.

Fiber routing PIU (Slot 22)

FAN (Slot 24)

FAN (Slot 25)

PIU (Slot 23)

C X L 16

S L O T 12

S L O T 13 1.25 Gbit/s

C X L 16

2.5 Gbit/s

2.5 Gbit/s

2.5 Gbit/s

S S S S S S L L L L L L O O O O O O T T T T T T 9 10 6 7 8 11 622 Mbit/s

622 Mbit/s

S L O T 1

S L S S S O L L L T O O O 5 T T T 2 3 4

2.5 Gbit/s

Figure 3-4 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)

S L S S S O L L L T O O O 14 T T T 1 1 1 S 5 6 7 A P

S L O T 1 8


FAN (Slot 24)

FAN (Slot 25)

PIU (Slot 23)

Figure 3-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)

The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack supports slot segmentation. Slots 5, 6, and 7 can be segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot distribution is shown in Figure 3-6, and the access capacity is shown in Figure 3-7.



6

S L O T 13

S L O T 14

S L O T 15

S L O T 16

S L O T 17

S L O T 18 Interface board

5

S L O T 12

Interface board

S S S L L L O O O T T T

S L O T 11

Interface board

S S S L L L O O O T T T 8 9 10

Interface board

S L O T 21

CXL16/4/1

S L O T 20

CXL16/4/1

Interface board

Interface board

Interface board

Interface board

S S S S S L L L L L O O O O O T T T T T 1 2 3 4 19

SAP

3 Subrack

7 Fiber routing

PIU (Slot 22)

FAN (Slot 24)

FAN (Slot 25)

PIU (Slot 23)

C X L 16

S L O T 13 1.25 Gbit/s

C X L 16

S L O T 12

2.5 Gbit/s

S S S S L L L L O O O O T T T T 9 10 8 11

2.5 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

S L O T 7

1.25 Gbit/s

622 Mbit/s

S L O T S S 4 L L O O T T 5 6

622 Mbit/s

S L O T 3

S S L L O O T T 20 21

622 Mbit/s

S L O T 2

622 Mbit/s

S L O T 1

S L O T 19

2.5 Gbit/s

Figure 3-6 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)

S L S S S O L L L T O O O 14 T T T 1 1 1 S 5 6 7 A P

S L O T 1 8


FAN (Slot 24)

FAN (Slot 25)

Figure 3-7 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)


Service interface boards: slots 1–4, slots 15–18


PIU (Slot 23)


3 Subrack


Service processing boards: slots 5–8 and slots 11–13 (before slot segmentation)

Service processing boards: slots 5–8, slots 11–13, and slots 19–21 (after slot segmentation)

CXL boards: slots 9–10

SAP boards: slot 14


SEI auxiliary interface boards: auxiliary interface area


Fan units: slot 24 and slot 25


Table 3-7 shows the slot mapping table which associates slots for processing boards to the slots for its corresponding interface boards. Table 3-7 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 2500





Slot 6

Slots 1, 2

Slot 7

Slots 3, 4

Slot 12

Slots 15, 16

Slot 13

Slots 17, 18

Slot 6 (Note)

Slots 2

Slot 20 (Note)

Slots 1

Slot 7 (Note)

Slots 4

Slot 21 (Note)

Slots 3

Note: The slot is half-height slot after slot segmentation.


Table 3-8 associates processing boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-8 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500

Slots and capacity

After slot segmentation

Slot 8 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Slot 11 (2.5 Gbit/s)


N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A), N1/N2SLQ4

9

9

9

9

N1/N2SLD4

9

9

9

9

Boards


Slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 5–Slot 6 , Slot 19–Slot 20 (622 Mbit/s ) Slot 7, Slot 21 (1.25 Gbit/s )

Slot 7 (2.5 Gbit/s)



Before slot segmentation

9


3 Subrack

Slots and capacity Slot 6 (622 Mbit/s )

Slot 7 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Slot 8 (2.5 Gbit/s)




N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1)


Boards



9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

R1SLD4 9

9

R1PD1

9

9

R1EFT4

9

9

R1SL4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1 N1SEP (work with interface boards) (Note 2) N1SEP1 (led out from front panel) (Note 2)

9

N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1PL3A

9

9

9

N1PQ1, N1PQM

9

9

9

N1EFS4

9

N1/N2EFS0 N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N2EMR0 (work with interface boards)

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1EFT8 (work with interface boards) N1EFT8 (led out from front panel)

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9



3 Subrack

Slots and capacity


Slot 7 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Slot 8 (2.5 Gbit/s)




N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)


Boards



9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1ADL4, N1ADQ1

9

9

9

9

9


9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1MR2A

9

9

9

9

9

9

9 9

N1MR2B

9

N1MR2C (Note 4) N1LWX

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

Note 1: The SLT1 provides 1–4 optical interfaces when in slots 1–4. The SLT1 provides 1–12 optical interfaces when in slots 7–slot 8 or slot 11–slot 12. The SLT1 provides 1–8 optical interfaces when in slot 13. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 1–4 or slots 15–18.

2. Interface Boards




3 Subrack

9

N1EU08

9

N1EU08A

9

N1OU08 (LC type)

9

9

9

N2OU08 (SC type)

9

9

9

9

9

Slot 18

Slot 17

Slot 16

Slot 15

Slot 4

Boards

Slot 3

Slot 1

Slots

Slot 2


9 9

9

9

N1EU04

9

9

9

9

N1MU04

9

9

9

9

N1C34S

9

9

9

9

N1D34S

9

9

9

9

N1D75S

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1D12S

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1D12B

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1ETF8

9

9

9

9

N1EFF8

9

9

9

9

N1ETS8

9

9

9

9

N1TSB8

9

9

3. Other Boards


Q1CXL1/4/16, Q2CXL1/4/16/1 6A (physical board) (Note 1)

9


Slot 101–slot 102

SEI area

Slot 50

Slot 24–slot 25

Boards

Slot 14

Slot 9–slot 10

Slots

Slot 22–slot 23



SCC,GSCC (logical board)

slot 82–slot 83

CXL, ECXL (logical board)

slot 80–slot 81

Q1SL1/4/16/16 A (logical board)

9

Q1SAP

Slot 101–slot 102

SEI area

Slot 50

Slot 24–slot 25

Boards

Slot 14

Slot 9–slot 10

Slots

Slot 22–slot 23

3 Subrack

9 9

Q1PIU

9

Q1SEI 9

N1FAN (Note 2)

9

61COA, 62COA (Note 2) 9

CAU (Note 2)

Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 2500. It seats in slot 9 and slot 10. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 80–81, 82–83 and 9–10. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical slots.

3.2.4 Technical Parameters Table 3-11 lists the technical parameters of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500. Table 3-11 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack

Dimensions

472 mm (H) x 447 mm (W) x 295 mm (D)

Weight

17 kg (net weight of the subrack, not including spare boards and fans)



3 Subrack

3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG The OptiX OSN 2500 REG is used to regenerate STM-16 and STM-64 signals. The OptiX OSN 2500 REG uses the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. The subrack structure and slot assignment are the same as those of the OptiX OSN 2500. This section mainly describes the basic configuration of the REG. Table 3-12 associates OptiX OSN 2500 REG boards to the corresponding slots.

N1SL16

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1SL16A

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1SF16

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

Q1CRG

SEI area

Slot 24–slot 25

Boards

Slot 22 –slot 23

Slot 14




Slot 10

Slot 9

Slot 8 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Slot 7 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Slot 6 622 Mbit/s )

Slots and capacity


Table 3-12 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG

9 9

Q1SAP

9

Q1PIU

9

N1FAN

9

Q1SEI N1BA2

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1BPA

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N1DCU

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

The OptiX OSN 2500 REG can also be configured with N1BPA, N1BA2, N1DCU and external equipment like UPM and COA as required. For their specific slots, see Table 3-10.



3 Subrack

3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.

3.4.1 Structure The OptiX OSN 1500A adopts one-layer structure. It is divided into board area, fan area, PIU area and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-8.

1

2 3 4

6 5

1. Fan area 4. Board area

2. Board area 5. Fiber routing area

3. PIU area 6. Mounting ear

Figure 3-8 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A

Board area: for holding the boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A

Fan area: housing one fan box, enabling heat dissipation function

PIU area: housing two PIU boards, providing power for the OptiX OSN 1500A


3.4.2 Slot Distribution The OptiX OSN 1500A has 11 slots before slot segmentation. Figure 3-9 shows the slot distribution. Slot 1 Slot 20 FAN

Slot 6

Slot 11

Slot 12

Slot 7

Slot 13

Slot 8

Slot 4

CXL16/4/1

Slot 9

EOW

Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

Slot 10

AUX

Figure 3-9 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (before slot segmentation)



3 Subrack

The OptiX OSN 1500A supports slot segmentation. Slots 12 and 13 can be segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot distribution is shown in Figure 3-10. Slot 20 FAN

Slot 1

Slot 11

Slot 6

Slot 2

Slot 12

Slot 7

Slot 3

Slot 13

Slot 8

Slot 4

CXL16/4/1

Slot 9

EOW

Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

Slot 10

AUX

Figure 3-10 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (after slot segmentation)

Figure 3-11 shows the access capacity for the OptiX OSN 1500A. Slot XCS A 1

Slot20

Slot 11

XCS B 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 6

Slot 2/12

2.5 Gbit/s

Slot 7 1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 3/13

2.5 Gbit/s

Slot 8 1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 4

2.5 Gbit/s

Slot 9 1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 5

2.5 Gbit/s

Slot 10

Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A

The access capacity for slot 12 or slot 13 is 2.5 Gbit/s before slot segmentation. After slot segmentation, the access capacity for half-height slot 2, slot 3, slot 12 or slot 13 is 1.25 Gbit/s. 1. Slots for Processing Boards

Service processing boards: slots 6–9 and slots 12–13 (before slot segmentation)

Service processing boards: slot 6–9, slot 12–13, slot 2–3 (after slot segmentation)

CXL boards: slots 4–5

EOW boards: slot 9




Fan units: slot 20


Table 3-13 associates processing boards to the corresponding slots.



3 Subrack

Table 3-13 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A

N1SEP1 (led out from front panel)

9

R1SLD4, R1SL4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9 9

9 9

N1EFS4 R1EFT4

9

9

N1PL3A R1L75S, R1L12S

9

9

R1PD1A, R1PD1B R1PL1A, R1PL1B


9


N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A), N1/N2SLQ4, N1/N2SLD4, N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1)


After slot segmentation Slot 12–slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)





Boards



Slots and capacity

9

9

9

9

9

N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2

9

N1EFT8 (led out from front panel)

9

N1/N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)

9

N1ADL4, N1ADQ1

9

N1IDQ1, N1IDL4

9

N1MR2A

9


9

9

9


3 Subrack

9

N1LWX

9

N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA

9


9


9



9

After slot segmentation Slot 12–slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)


N1MR2B


Boards



9

9

9


Slots and capacity

9

Note: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 1500A provides 1–12 optical interfaces.

2. Other Boards

Table 3-14 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-14 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A

Q1CXL1/4/16, Q2CXL1/4/16/16 A (physical board) (Note 1)

9

SCC, GSCC (logical board)

Slots 82, 83

CXL, ECXL (logical board)

Slots 80, 81

Q1SL1/4/16/16A L (logical board)

9

R1EOW

Slot 101–slot 102

Slot 50

Slot 20

Slot 10

Slot 1, slot 11

Slots

Slot 9

Slot 4–slot 5

Boards

9 9

R1AUX, R2AUX

9

R1PIUA

9

R1FAN (Note 1)

9




Slot 50

Slot 20

Slot 10

Slot 9

Slot 1, slot 11

Slots

Slot 4–slot 5

Boards

Slot 101–slot 102

3 Subrack

9

CAU (Note 1)

Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 1500. It seats in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 80–81, 82–83 and 4–5. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, 62COA , and CAU are logical slots, not physical slots.

3.4.4 Technical Parameters Table 3-15 lists the technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A equipment. Table 3-15 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A

Dimensions

131mm mm (H) x 444 mm (W) x 262 mm (D)

Weight

8 kg (including backboard, 2 pieces PIU and fan)



3 Subrack

3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

3.5.1 Structure The OptiX OSN 1500B adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into processing board area, interface board area, auxiliary interface area, fan area, and PIU area, as shown in Figure 3-12.

1

2

3

4

5

7 6

1. Interface board area 4. Processing board area 7. Mounting ear

2. PIU area 5. Auxiliary interface area

3. Fan area 6. Fiber routing area

Figure 3-12 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B

Processing board area: for holding the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B

Interface board area: for holding the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B

Auxiliary interface area: including alarm interfaces, orderwire interface, clock interfaces, operation and maintenance interfaces, F1 port, serial ports and so on

Fan area: housing one fan module, enabling heat dissipation function

PIU area: housing PIU modules, providing power for equipment


ESD area: located above the fan box.



3 Subrack

3.5.2 Slot Distribution The OptiX OSN 1500B has four slots for interface boards on upper layer and ten slots (including slot 4 and slot 5) for processing boards before slot segmentation. Figure 3-13 shows the slot distribution. Figure 3-14 shows the access capacity for the OptiX OSN 1500B. Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 18

PIU

Slot 19

PIU

Slot 11

Slot 6

Slot 12

Slot 7

Slot 13

Slot 8

Slot 4

CXL16/4/1

Slot 9

EOW

Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

Slot 10

AUX

Figure 3-13 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)

Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 20 FAN

Slot 18

PIU

Slot 19

PIU

Slot 11

2.5 Gbit/s

Slot 6

622 Mbit/s

Slot 12

2.5 Gbit/s

Slot 7

622 Mbit/s

Slot 13

2.5 Gbit/s

Slot 8

622 Mbit/s

Slot 4

2.5 Gbit/s

Slot 9

622 Mbit/s

Slot 5

2.5 Gbit/s

Slot 10

AUX

Figure 3-14 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)

The OptiX OSN 1500B supports slot segmentation. Slots 11, 12, and13 can be segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot distribution is shown in Figure 3-15, and the access capacity is shown in Figure 3-16.



3 Subrack Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 18

PIU

Slot 19

PIU

Slot 1

Slot 11

Slot 6

Slot 2

Slot 12

Slot 7

Slot 3

Slot 13

Slot 8

Slot 4

CXL16/4/1

Slot 9

EOW

Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

Slot 10

AUX

Figure 3-15 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)

Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 18

PIU

Slot 19

PIU

Slot 1

1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 11 1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 6

622 Mbit/s

Slot 20 Slot 2

1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 12 1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 7

622 Mbit/s

Slot 3

1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 13 1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 8

622 Mbit/s

FAN

Slot 4

2.5 Gbit/s

Slot 9

622 Mbit/s

Slot 5

2.5 Gbit/s

Slot 10

AUX

Figure 3-16 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)


Service interface boards: slots 14–17


Service processing board: slots 4–9 and slots 11–13 (before slot segmentation)

Service processing board: slots 1–9 and slots 11–13 (after slot segmentation)

CXL board: slots 4–5



Orderwire boards: slot 9 (also for the processing boards)

Fan units: slot 20

Power interface boards: slots 18 and 19


Table 3-16 shows the slot mapping table which associates slots for processing boards to the slots for its corresponding interface boards.



3 Subrack

Table 3-16 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 1500B


Slot for corresponding interface boards

Slot 2

Slot 14

Slot 3

Slot 16

Slot 7

Slot 15

Slot 8

Slot 17

Slot 12

Slots 14, 15

Slot 13

Slots 16, 17

Note: The interface boards of the PD3, PL3, SEP, and SPQ4 boards can only be inserted in corresponding slots in even number. Slot 12 and slot 7 share slot 15 for interface boards. Slot 13 and slot 8 share slot 17 for interface boards.


Table 3-17 associates processing boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-17 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B


9

9

9

R1SLD4 R1SL4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1

9

9

9

9

N1SEP (work with interface boards) (Note 2) 9

N1SEP1 (led out from front panel) (Note 2)

9

9

9

9


Slot 11,slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s )


N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A), N1/N2SLQ4, N1/N2SLD4, N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1)


Slot 9 (622 Mbit/s)

Slot 8 (622 Mbit/s)



Boards




Slots and capacity

9

9

9

9


3 Subrack

9

9

N1PL3A

9

9

9

N1PQ1, N1PQM

9

9

9

R1PD1

9

9

9

R1PL1A, R1PL1B

9

9

9

9

R1EFT4

9

9

9

9 9

N1EFS4 N1/N2EFS0

9

N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2 N1EFT8 (work with interface boards)

9

N1EFT8 (led out from front panel) N2EMR0 (work with interface boards)

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)

9

9

9

N1ADL4, N1ADQ1

9

9

9


9

9

9

N1MR2A

9

9

9

N1MR2B

9

9

9

9

N1MR2C (Note 4)




N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3



Slot 9 (622 Mbit/s)

Slot 8 (622 Mbit/s)



Boards




Slots and capacity

9

9

9

9

9

9


3 Subrack




Slot 9 (622 Mbit/s)

Slot 8 (622 Mbit/s)



N1LWX

9

9

9

N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA

9

9

9

Boards





Slots and capacity

Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B provides 1–12 optical interfaces. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 14–17.

2. Interface Boards


Slot 17

Boards

Slot 16

Slot 14

Slots

Slot 15

Table 3-18 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B

N1EU08

9

9

N1OU08 (LC type)

9

9

N2OU08 (SC type)

9

9

N1EU04

9

9

N1MU04

9

9

N1D34S

9

9

N1D75S

9

9

9

9

N1D12S

9

9

9

9

N1D12B

9

9

9

9

N1ETF8

9

9

N1EFF8

9

9

N1ETS8

9

N1TSB8

9



3 Subrack

3. Other Boards


Q1CXL1/4/16, Q2CXL1/4/16/1 6A (physical board) (Note 1)

9

SCC, GSCC (logical board)

Slot 82, 83

CXL, ECXL (Logical board)

Slot 80, 81

Q1SL1/4/16/16 AL (logical board)

9

R1EOW

Slot 101–slot 102

Slot 20

Slot 10

Slot 18, slot 19

Boards

Slot 9

Slot 4–slot 5

Slots

Slot 50

Table 3-19 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B

9 9

R1AUX, R2AUX

9

R1PIU

9

R1FAN (Note 2)

9




Slot 50

Slot 20

Slot 10

Slot 9

Slot 101–slot 102

Boards

Slot 4–slot 5

Slots

Slot 18, slot 19

3 Subrack

9

CAU (Note 2)

Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 1500B. It seats in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 80–81, 82–83 and 4–5. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical slots.

3.5.4 Technical Parameters Table 3-20 lists the technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B. Table 3-20 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B

Dimensions

221 mm (H) x 444 mm (W) x 263 mm (D)

Weight

9 kg (including backboard, 2 pieces PIU and fan)




4

Board Classification and List

This chapter introduces the classification and appearance of the boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.

4.1 Board Classification Most boards of the OptiX OSN products are interchangeable. The same boards can be used either in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 or in the OptiX OSN 1500 equipment. This section classifies the boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 by function. Boards are classified into the following types.

SDH boards

PDH boards

Data processing boards

Cross-Connect and SCC boards

Other boards

4.1.1 SDH Boards Table 4-1 lists the SDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.




Table 4-1 SDH boards

Product

Description

3500 (40 Gbit/s)

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

2500REG

2500

1500A

1500B

N2SL64

STM-64 processing board

√

√

N1SL16(A)


√

√

√

√

√

√

N2SL16(A)


√

√

√

√

√

√

N1SF16

STM-16 processing board with FEC

√

√

√

√

√

√

N1SLQ4

4 x STM-4 processing board

√

√

√

√

√

N2SLQ4


√

√

√

√

√

N1SLD4


√

√

√

√

√

N2SLD4


√

√

√

√

√

N1SL4


√

√

√

√

√

N2SL4


√

√

√

√

√

N1SLT1


√

√

√

√

√

N1SLQ1


√

√

√

√

√

N2SLQ1


√

√

√

√

√

N1SL1


√

√

√

√

√

N2SL1


√

√

√

√

√

R1SLD4

2 x STM-4 processing board (half-height slot)

√

√

√

R1SL4

1 x STM-4 processing board (half-height slot)

√

√

√

Board


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Product


Description

3500 (40 Gbit/s)

Board

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

2500REG

2500

1500A

1500B

R1SLQ1

4x STM-1 processing board (half-height slot)

√

√

√

R1SL1

1x STM-1 processing board (half-height slot)

√

√

√

N1SEP1

STM-1 processing board(led out from front panel)

√

√

√

√

√

N1SEP

STM-1 processing board(work with interface boards)

√

√

√

√

√

N1EU08

8 x STM-1 interface board (e)

√

√

√

N1EU08A


√

√

√

N1EU04


N1OU08

8 x STM-1 interface board (o)

√

√

√

N2OU08

8 x STM-1 interface board (o)

√

√

√

N1TSB8

8-channel switching & bridging board

√

√

√

√

√

√

4.1.2 PDH Boards Table 4-2 lists the PDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN products. Table 4-2 PDH boards

Board

Product

3500 (40 Gbit/s)

Description

N1PQ1

63 x E1 processing board

R1PD1 A/B

32 x E1 processing board(75 Ω/120 Ω)

R1PL1 A/B

16 x E1 processing board (75 Ω/120 Ω)

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

√

2500REG

√

2500 √ √


1500A

1500B √

√

√

√

√


Board

Product

4 Board Classification and List 3500 (40 Gbit/s)

Description

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

2500REG

2500

1500A

1500B

R1L75S

16 x 75Ω E1/T1 switching interface board

√

R1L12S


√

N1PQM

63 x T1/E1 processing board

√

√

√

√

N1PD3

6 x E3/DS3 processing board

√

√

√

√

N1PL3


√

√

√

√

N1PL3A


√

√

√

N1SPQ4

4 x E4/STM-1 processing board

√

√

√

√

N2SPQ4

4 x E4/STM-1 processing board

√

√

√

√

N1D75S


√

√

√

√

N1D12S


√

√

√

√

N1D12B

32 x 120Ω E1/T1 interface board

√

√

√

√

N1D34S

6 x E3/DS3 PDH interface board

√

√

√

√

N1C34S

3 x E3/DS3 PDH interface board

√

√

√

√

N1MU04

4 x E4/STM-1 interface board

√

√

√

√

N1TSB8

8-channel switching & bridging board

√

√

√

√

√

√

4.1.3 Data Processing Boards Table 4-3 lists the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN products, including ATM boards and Ethernet boards. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-4



Table 4-3 Data processing boards

Board

Product

Description

3500 (40 Gbit/s)

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

2500REG

2500

1500A

1500B

√

√

N1EFS4

4-port FE processing board with L2 switching

√

√

√

N1EFS0

FE processing board with L2 switching

√

√

√

√

N2EFS0

FE processing board with L2 switching

√

√

√

√

N1EGS2

2-port Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board

√

√

√

√

√

N2EGS2

2-port Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board

√

√

√

√

√

N1EGT2

2-port Gigabit Ethernet transparent transmission board

√

√

√

√

√

N1EFT8

16-port Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board

√

√

√

√

√

R1EFT4

4-port Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board

√

√

√

N1EGS4

4 GE Ethernet transparent transmission and convergence board

√

√

√

√

√

N1EMR0

12 FE ＋ 1 GE Ethernet processing board with RPR function

√

√

√

√

√

N2EMR0

12 FE ＋ 1 GE Ethernet

√

√

√

√

√



Board

Product


Description

3500 (40 Gbit/s)

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

2500REG

2500

1500A

1500B

processing board with RPR function

N1EGR2

2-port GE processing board with RPR function

√

√

√

√

√

N2EGR2

2-port GE processing board with RPR function

√

√

√

√

√

N1EFF8

8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board

√

√

√

√

N1ETF8

8-port 10/100M BaseT fast Ethernet interface board

√

√

√

√

N1ETS8

8-port 10/100M BaseT Ethernet interface switching board

√

√

√

√

N1ADL4

1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board

√

√

√

√

√

N1ADQ1

4 x STM-1ATM service processing board

√

√

√

√

√

N1IDL4

1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board with IMA (Note 1)

√

√

√

√

√

N1IDQ1

4 x STM-1 ATM service processing board with IMA (Note 1)

√

√

√

√

√

N1MST4

4 x multi-service transparent transmission processing board

√

√

√

√

√

Note 1: IMA is a kind of function named inverse multiplexing ATM.

4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards




Table 4-4 lists the cross-connect and SCC boards supported by the OptiX OSN products. Table 4-4 Cross-Connect and SCC boards

Board

Product

Description

3500 (40 Gbit/s)

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

N1GXCSA

Cross-connect and timing board (40 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)

√

N2GXCSA

Cross-connect and timing board (40 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)

√

N1EXCSA

Enhanced cross-connect and timing board (80Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)

√

N1UXCSA

Super cross-connect and timing board (80 Gbit/s higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order)

√

N1UXCSB

Super cross-connect and timing board (80 higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order, supporting extended subrack)

√

N1XCE

Lower order cross-connect and timing board for extended subrack (1.25 Gbit/s)

√

Q1CXL1

STM-1 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)

2500REG

2500

√


1500A

√

1500B

√


Board

Product


Description

3500 (40 Gbit/s)

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

2500REG

2500

1500A

1500B

Q1CXL4


√

√

√

Q1CXL16


√

√

√

Q2CXL1


√

√

√

Q2CXL4


√

√

√

Q2CXL16


√

√

√

N1SCC

System control and communication board

√

√

N1GSCC

System control and communication board (supporting intelligent features)

√

√



Board

Product


Description

3500 (40 Gbit/s)

N2GSCC

System control and communication board (supporting intelligent features)

Q1CRG

System control, communication and timing board for OptiX OSN 2500 REG

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

√

2500REG

2500

1500A

1500B

√

√

4.1.5 Other Boards Table 4-5 lists the other boards supported by the OptiX OSN products. Table 4-5 Other boards

Product Board

3500 (40 Gbit/s)

Description

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

√

2500REG

√

2500

1500A

1500B

N1MR2A

2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board

N1MR2B

2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (half-height slot)

N1MR2C

2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (interface area)

√

√

√

N1LWX

Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board

√

√

√

√

√

N1BPA

Booster amplifier and pre-amplifier board

√

√

√

√

√

√

N1BA2

Booster amplifier board

√

√

√

√

√

√

N1DCU

Dispersion compensate board

√

√

√

N1PIU

Power interface board

√

√


√

√

√

√

√

√

√

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Product Board

4 Board Classification and List 3500 (40 Gbit/s)

Description

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

2500REG

√

2500

Q1PIU


R1PIU


R2PIU


N1FAN

Fan board

R1FAN

Fan board

N1FANA

Fan board (large power)

R1EOW

Orderwire board

Q1SEI

Extended signal interface board

√

√

Q1SAP

System auxiliary processing board

√

√

N1AUX

System auxiliary interface board

R1AUX

1500A

1500B

√ √ √

√

√

√

√ √

√

√

√


√

√

R2AUX


√

√

61COA/62CO A

External case-shape optical amplifier

√

√

√

√

√

√

TDA

External tone & data access board

√

√

√

√

√

√

UPM

External uninterruptible power modules

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

4.2 Board Appearance Figure 4-1 shows the board appearance of the OptiX OSN products.




3

1

2

1. Optical interface

2. Ejector lever

3. Printed circuit board

Figure 4-1 Board appearance

Caution: Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap is well grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board.

Warning: It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface board and the optical interface, lest the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.



5 SDH Boards

5

SDH Boards

This chapter introduces the SDH boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of:

Functionality

Principle

Front panel

Parameter configuration

Protection configuration

Version description

Technical parameters

The SDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are listed in Table 4-1.

5.1 SL64 The SL64 is the 1 x STM-64 processing board. Table 5-1 lists the slots for the SL64 board. Table 5-1 Slots for the SL64

Product

SL64

OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)

Slots 7–8, 11–12


Slots 8, 11

OptiX OSN 2500

Not available

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Slots 5–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 1500A

Not available

OptiX OSN 1500B

Not available

5.1.1 Functionality Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-1


5 SDH Boards

Functionality

SL64

Basic function

Receive/Transmit one STM-64 optical signal.

Optical interface specifications

Support the I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2 and V-64.2b (used with BA, PA, and DCU) optical module, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.691.

Optical module specifications

Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules.

Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.

Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.

Service processing

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4c to STM-64-4c.

Overhead processing

Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-64 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte. Support tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function.

Alarms and performance events

Provide abundant alarms and performance events.

K byte processing

Be able to process multiple sets of K bytes. One SL64 board can support up to four multiplex section protection (MSP) rings.

REG specifications

Support setting and querying REG working mode.

Protection schemes

Support two-fiber and four-fiber MSP, linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two MSP rings.

Maintenance

Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth upgrade of board software.

5.1.2 Principle Figure 5-1 shows the principle block diagram of the SL64.



5 SDH Boards O/E conversion module O/E conversion

STM-64

E/O conversion

STM-64

Backplane

SDH overhead processing module

MUX/ DEMUX

Logic control module

+5 V +3.3 V

Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit

SCC unit

Power module

+3.3 V (standby)

+3.3 V

Figure 5-1 The principle block diagram of the SL64

1. In Receive Direction

The O/E conversion module includes E/O (O/E) conversion and MUX/DEMUX part. The O/E conversion converts the received 10.71 Gbit/s optical signals into electrical signals. The DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into multiple parallel low rate electrical signals, and clock signal is recovered at the same time. This module also responsible for detecting R_LOS alarms. The multiple low rate electrical signals demultiplexed are transferred to the SDH overhead processing module. The SDH overhead processing module extracts or inserts overhead byte from/to the received multiple low rate electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus. R_LOF and R_OOF alarms are detected in this module. 2. In Transmit Direction

After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the parallel low rate electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the O/E conversion module. The O/E conversion module multiplexes the received parallel low rate electrical signals into high rate electrical signals through the MUX part, converts the signals into OTN optical signals at 10.71 Gbit/s. Signals are then sent to fibers for transmission. 3. Auxiliary Units


This unit: −

Generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SL64.

−

implements ALS function.

realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical processing boards constituting the ADM when the SCC is not online.

−

−

control the switching from active cross-connect board to standby one when the Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-3


5 SDH Boards

active one is faulty.

Power module

Provide the board with required DC voltages.

5.1.3 Front Panel Figure 5-2 shows the front panels of the SL64. SL64 STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

OUT

IN

SL64

Figure 5-2 The front panel of the SL64

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the SL64 board.

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)

Service active status indicator (ACT) – green

Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)

Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)

For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. 2. Interfaces

Quantity: single optical interface (one pair) Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces incline down. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-4


5 SDH Boards

5.1.4 Parameter Configuration The major parameters required by the SL64 are as follows.

J1

J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.

C2

C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations. Table 5-2 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-2 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL64

Service type

Parameter setting of C2

E1 or T1

TUG structure

E3 or DS3

34/45 Mbit/s into C-3

E4

140 Mbit/s into C-4

No service

Unequipped

5.1.5 Version Description The versions of the SL64 is N2. The SL64 N2 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function.

5.1.6 Technical Parameters Table 5-3 list the technical parameters of the SL64. Table 5-4 lists the supported optical interface parameters with fixed wavelength output, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.692. Table 5-3 Technical parameters of the SL64

Parameter

Description

Bit rate

9.95 Gbit/s

Processing capability

1 x STM-64 standard service or concatenated service

Line code pattern

Non return to zero (NRZ)

Dimensions (mm)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) Weight (kg)

1.12


W


5 SDH Boards

Parameter

Description

Power consumption (W)

30

Type of optical interfaces

I-64.2

S-64.2 b

L-64.2 b

Le-64. 2

Ls-64. 2

V-64.2b (BA+PA+ DCU) (Note)

Wavelength (nm)

1550

1550

1550

1550

1550

1550.12

Transmission distance (km)

0 to 20

2 to 40

30 to 70

30 to 70

80

70 to 120

Launched power (dBm)

–5 to –1

–1 to 2

10 to 14

1 to 4

3 to 5

12 to 15

Receiver sensitivity (dBm)

–14

–14

–14

–19.5

–21

–23

Receiver overload (dBm)

–1

–1

–3

–9

–9

–7

Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

Maximum dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)

500

800

1600

1200

1600

800

Long-term operating condition

Temperature: 0°C to 45°C

Short-term operating condition

Temperature: –5°C to 50°C

Environment for storage


Humidity: 10% to 90%

Humidity: 5% to 95%

Humidity: 10% to 100% Environment for transportation

Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10% to 100%

Note: The bracketed part indicates that V-64.2b optical interface specification consists of booster amplifier (BA), preamplifier (PA) , and the dispersion compensation unit (DCU).

Table 5-4 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with ITU-T G.692

Bit rate

9.95 Gbit/s

Classification code

1 x 29 dB

Dispersion limit (km)

40

Mean launched power (dBm)

–4 to –1

Minimum sensitivity (dBm)

–17

Min. overload point (dBm)

–1

Maximum path allowable dispersion (ps/nm)

800


8.2



5 SDH Boards

5.2 SF16/SL16 The SL16 is an STM-16 processing board. The SF16 is an STM-16 processing board with FEC function. The two boards are responsible for STM-16 optical signal processing. Table 5-5 lists the slots for the SL16 andSF16. Table 5-5 Slots for the SL16 and SF16

Product

SL16

SF16


Slots 5–8, 11–14

Slots 5–8, 11–14


Slots 6–8, 11–13

Slots 6–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 7–8, 11–12

Slots 7–8, 11–12

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 5–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

Slots 11–13

5.2.1 Functionality Functionality

SL16

SF16

Basic function

Receive/Transmit one STM-16 optical signal

Receive/Transmit one OTU1 (2.66 Gbit/s, FEC) optical signal. Support enabling or disabling FEC function.


Support the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je (used with BA), and U-16.2Je (used with BA and PA) optical interface, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.691. Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.


Service processing

Support the Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, and Ue-16.2e optical interface. Support long distance transmission, up to 200 km. Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.

Support detecting and query of the information on optical modules.

Support detecting and query of the information on optical modules.

Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces.

Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces.

Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.

Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4C to STM-16-4C.

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4C to STM-16-4C. The SF16 process overheads and the encapsulation code of FEC in a way complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.709.



5 SDH Boards

Functionality

SL16

SF16

Overhead processing

Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-16 signals.

Support the overhead processing, performance monitoring, and alarm detecting of the OTU, ODU, and OPU, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.709.

Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.

Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-16 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.


Provide abundant alarms and performance events. The SF16 provides the alarms and performance events related to OUT, ODU, OPU, and FEC.

K byte processing

Be able to process multiple sets of K byte. One SL16/SF16 board can support up to two MSP rings.

REG specifications

Support setting and querying REG working mode.

Protection schemes

Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two MSP rings.

Maintenance

Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth upgrade of board software.

5.2.2 Principle Figure 5-3 shows the principle block diagram of the SF16. The block diagram of the SL16 is the same as that of the SF16 after removing the part surrounded by broken line.



5 SDH Boards O/E conv ersion module

STM-16

STM-16

Backplane

O/E conv ersion E/O conv ersion

Digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module

MUX/ DEMUX

SDH ov erhead processing module

Logic control module +5 V +3.3 V


SCC unit

Power module

+3.3 V (standby )

+3.3 V

Figure 5-3 The principle block diagram of the SF16


The O/E conversion module includes E/O (O/E) conversion and MUX/DEMUX part. The O/E conversion converts the received 2.66 Gbit/s FEC optical signals into electrical signals. The DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into multiple parallel low rate electrical signals, and clock signal is recovered at the same time. This module also responsible for detecting R_LOS alarms. The multiple low rate electrical signals demultiplexed are transferred to the digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module to have FEC packets encapsulated/decapsulated and OTN overheads processed. There are connections with clock and data signals between the digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module, the O/E conversion module, and the SDH overhead processing module. Alarms related to FEC overhead processing are detected in this module. The SDH overhead processing module extracts or inserts overhead byte from/to the received multiple low rate electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus. R_LOF and R_OOF alarms are detected in this module. 2. In Transmit Direction

After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the parallel low rate electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module. The digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module performs FEC coding and OTN overhead inserting to the multiple low rate signals, and then sends it to the O/E conversion module. The O/E conversion module multiplexes the received parallel low rate electrical signals into high rate electrical signals through the MUX part, converts the signals into OTN optical signals with FEC at 2.66 Gbit/s. Signals are then sent to fibers for transmission.



5 SDH Boards

3. Auxiliary Units


This unit: generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SF16/SL16.

−

−


realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical processing boards constituting the ADM.

−

control the switching from active cross-connect board to standby one when the active one is faulty.

−

Power module


5.2.3 Front Panel Figure 5-4 shows the front panels of the SL16 and the SF16. SL16 STAT ACT PROG SRV

SF16 STAT ACT PROG SRV



OUT

OUT

IN

IN

SL16

SF16

Figure 5-4 The front panel of the SL16 and the SF16

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the SL16/SF16.



5 SDH Boards






Quantity: single optical interface (one pair) Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The optical interfaces of the SF16 are not swappable. The SL16 can use swappable optical modules for easy maintenance.

5.2.4 Parameter Configuration The major parameters required by the SL16/SF16 are as follows.

J1


C2

C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 5-6 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SF16/SL16

Service type


E1 or T1

TUG structure

E3 or DS3


E4

140 Mbit/s into C-4

No service

Unequipped

5.2.5 Version Description The version of the SF16 is N1, which is the only version existed. The board can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500 REG, and OptiX OSN 1500. The board can be set to be under ADM mode or REG mode. The versions of the SL16 are N1 and N2. The two versions realize board functions in the same way. The N2SL16 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-11


5 SDH Boards

replacing is fulfilled.

Note: If the TCM function is enabled on version N2, the command of replacing the version N2 with version N1 will fail.

The board named SL16A is not hot swappable for optical module, because the optical interfaces are equipped with fixed optical modules.

5.2.6 Technical Parameters Table 5-7 and Table 5-8 list the technical parameters of the SL16 and the SF16 respectively. Table 5-9 lists the supported optical interface parameters with fixed wavelength output, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.692. Table 5-7 Technical parameters of the SL16

Parameter

Description

Bit rate

2.488 Gbit/s



Line code pattern


Dimensions (mm)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

W

Weight (kg)

1.10


20

Type of optical modules

I-16

S-16.1

L-16.1

L-16.2

L-16.2 Je

V-16.2 Je (BA)

U-16.2Je (BA+PA)

Wavelength (nm)

1310

1310

1310

1550

1550

1550

1550.12


0–2

2–15

15–40

40–80

80–1 00

80–14 0

140–17 0


–10 to –3

–5 to 0

–2 to 3

–2 to 3

5 to 7

14

14


–18

–18

–27

–28

–28

–28

–33


–3

0

–9

–9

–9

–9

–10


8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2

8.2



5 SDH Boards

Parameter

Description







Environment for transportation



Humidity: 5% to 95%



Table 5-8 Technical parameters of the SF16

Parameter

Description

Bit rate

2.66 Gbit/s



Line code pattern


Dimensions (mm)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

W

Weight (kg)

1.09


26

Specification of optical interfaces (Note 1)

Ue-16.2c

Ue-16.2d

Ue-16.2e

FEC+BA(14)+P A

FEC+BA(17)+PA

FEC+BA(17)+R A+PA

Wavelength (nm)

G.692-compliant wavelength with 100 GHz interval




178

189

200

Launched power (dBm) (Note 2)

–2 to +3

–2 to +3

–2 to +3

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) (Note 2)

–31 (APD)

–31 (APD)

–31 (APD)

Receiver overload (dBm) (Note 2)

–9 (APD)

–9 (APD)

–9 (APD)

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) (Note 2)

10

10

10


Temperature: 0°C to 45°C Humidity: 10% to 90%



5 SDH Boards

Parameter

Description





Humidity: 5% to 95%

Humidity: 10% to 100% Environment for transportation

Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10% to 100%

Note 1: The bracketed numbers indicate corresponding parameters. For example, “BA(14)” indicates the optical power is 14 dBm after signals are amplified by BA. “FEC+BA+PA” indicates that the specifications of optical interfaces consist of FEC, BA, and PA. Note 2: Parameters listed in the above table are of the optical module only, but not of amplifiers. Table 5-9 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with G.692

Bit rate

2488320 kbit/s

Classification code

8 x 22 dB

5 x 30 dB

3 x 33 dB

Dispersion limit (km)

170

170

640


–2 to 3

5 to 7

–5 to –1

Minimum sensitivity (dBm)

–28

–28

–28

Min. overload point (dBm)

–9

–9

–9

Maximum path allowable dispersion (ps/nm)

3500

3500

12800


8.2

8.2

8.2



5 SDH Boards

5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 The SL4 is the 1 x STM-4 processing board. The SLD4 is the 2 x STM-4 processing board. The SLQ4 is the 4 x STM-4 processing board. The three boards are responsible for:

the receiving/transmitting of STM-4 optical signals

the O/E conversion of STM-4 optical signals

the extracting/inserting of overhead byte

the detecting of alarms in the line

Table 5-10 lists the slots for the SL4, SLD4, and SLQ4. Table 5-10 Slots for the SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4

Product

SL4

SLD4

SLQ4


Slots 1–8, 11–17

Slots 1–8, 11–17

Slots 5–8, 11–14


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 6–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 7–8, 11–13

Slots 7–8, 11–12

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not available

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

Slots 12–13

Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

Slots 11–13

Slots 11–13


SL4

SLD4

SLQ4

Basic function


Receive/Transmit two STM-4 optical signals.

Receive/Transmit four STM-4 optical signals.


Support the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 optical interface, which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.


Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.

Service processing

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the VC-4-4C concatenated services.



5 SDH Boards

Functionality

SL4

SLD4

SLQ4

Overhead processing

Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-4 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.


Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration.

Protection schemes

Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support MSP or SNCP shared optical path protection.

Maintenance

Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.

5.3.2 Principle Figure 5-5 shows the principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 (1 x STM-4 optical signal is processed). Backplane

STM-4

STM-4

O/E conversion module E/O conversion module

Cross-connect unit

Frame synchronous and scrambler module

Overhead processing module Cross-connect unit


Power module

SCC

-48 V

+3.3 V +3.3 V ( Standby )

Figure 5-5 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4


+3.3 V


5 SDH Boards


The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-4 optical signal into STM-4 electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock signal and STM-4 electrical signal to the frame synchronous and scrambler module, where the R_LOS alarm is checked. The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received STM-4 electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead processing module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarm signals are checked. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received STM-4 signal, and then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane bus. 2. In Transmit Direction

Signals from the cross-connect unit are inserted with overhead bytes in the overhead processing unit, and then sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received STM-4 electrical signal, and then sends it to the E/O conversion module after descrambling. The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-4 electrical signal into STM-4 optical signal, and then sends it to the fiber for transmission. 3. Auxiliary Units


This unit: generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4.

−

−



−


−

Power module


5.3.3 Front Panel Figure 5-6 shows the front panels of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4.



5 SDH Boards

SLD4

SL4

SLQ4

STAT ACT PROG SRV

STAT ACT PROG SRV

STAT ACT PROG SRV

CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT



OUT OUT1

OUT1

IN1

IN1

IN

OUT2

OUT2

IN2

IN2

OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4

SLD4

SL4

SL4

SLD4

SLQ4

SLQ4

Figure 5-6 The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4.






Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the SL4, two pairs for the SLD4, and four pairs for the SLQ4 Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies maintenance.

5.3.4 Parameter Configuration The major parameters required by the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 are as follows.

J1 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-18


5 SDH Boards


C2

C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Set C2 according to the actual service type. Table 5-11 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-11 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4

Service type


E1 or T1

TUG structure

E3 or DS3


E4

140 Mbit/s into C-4

No service

Unequipped

5.3.5 Version Description The versions of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 are N1 and N2. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B). The two versions realize board functions in the same way. N2SLQ4 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled.


5.3.6 Technical Parameters Table 5-12 lists the technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4. Table 5-12 Technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4

Parameter Bit rate

Description SL4

SLD4

622080 kbit/s


SLQ4


5 SDH Boards

Parameter

Description SL4

SLD4

SLQ4


1 x STM-4 standard or concatenated service



Line code pattern


Connector

LC

Dimensions (mm)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

W

Weight (kg)

1.00

1.01

1.04


15

15

16

Optical module type

I-4

S-4.1

L-4.1

L-4.2

Ve-4.2

Wavelength (nm)

1310

1310

1310

1550

1550


0–2

2–15

15–40

40–80

80–100


–15 to –8

–15 to –8

–3 to 2

–3 to 2

–3 to 2


–23

–28

–28

–28

–33


–8

–8

–8

–8

–8

8.2

8.2

10

10

10

Minimum extinction ration (dB) Long-term operating condition









Humidity: 5% to 95%





5 SDH Boards

5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1 The SLT1 is a 12 x STM-1 optical processing board. The SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 optical processing board. The SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 optical processing board. The three boards are responsible for:

the receiving/transmitting of STM-1 optical signals

the O/E conversion of STM-1 optical signals

the extracting/inserting of overhead byte

the detecting of alarms in the line

Table 5-13 shows the slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1. Table 5-13 Slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1

Product

SLT1

SLQ1

SL1


Slots 1–8, 11–17

Slots 1–8, 11–17

Slots 1–8, 11–17


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 5–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not available

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

Slots 12–13

Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

Slots 11–13

Slots 11–13

Note: To the OptiX OSN 3500 with 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity, the first to fourth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 1–5 or 14–16, and the first to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 6–8 or 11–13. To the OptiX OSN 3500 with 80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity, the first to eighth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 1–5 or 14–16, and the first to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 6–8 or 11–13. To the OptiX OSN 2500, the first to fourth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in slot 5 or 6, the first to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 7–8 or 11–12, and the first to eight optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in 13th slot.



5 SDH Boards


SLT1

SLQ1

SL1

Basic function

Receive/Transmit twelve STM-1 optical signals.

Receive/Transmit four STM-1 optical signals.



Support the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2 optical interface, which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957. Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules.


Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.

Service processing

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services. Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals.

Overhead processing




Protection schemes

Support two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast.

Maintenance

Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.

5.4.2 Principle Figure 5-7 shows the principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 (1 x STM-1 signal is processed).



5 SDH Boards Backplane

STM-1

STM-1

O/E conversion module E/O conversion module

Cross-connect unit




Power module

SCC

-48 V

+3.3 V +3.3 V ( Standby )

+3.3 V

Figure 5-7 The principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1


The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-1 optical signal into STM-1 electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock signal and STM-1 electrical signal to the frame synchronous and scrambler module, where the R_LOS alarm is checked. The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received STM-1 electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead processing module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarm signals are checked. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received STM-1 signal, and demultiplexes it into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane. 2. In Transmit Direction

The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into an STM-1 signal and inserted with overhead bytes in the overhead processing unit, and then are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received STM-1 electrical signal, and then sends it to the E/O conversion module after descrambling. The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-1 electrical signal into STM-1 optical signal, and then sends it to the fiber for transmission. 3. Auxiliary Units


This unit: Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-23


5 SDH Boards

generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1.

−

−



−


−

Power module


5.4.3 Front Panel Figure 5-8 shows the front panels of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1. SL1

SLQ1

SLT1

STAT AC T PROG SRV

STAT ACT PROG SRV

STAT ACT PROG SRV CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT



OUT1 IN1

OUT

OUT1

OUT2 IN2

IN

IN1

OUT3 IN3 OUT4

OUT2

IN4 OUT5

IN2

IN5 OUT6 IN6

OUT3

OUT7 IN7

IN3

OUT8 IN8 OUT9

OUT4

IN9 OUT10

IN4

IN10 OUT11 IN11 OUT12 IN12

SLT1

SLT1

SL1

SLQ1

SLQ1

SL1

Figure 5-8 The front panel of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.







5 SDH Boards


Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the SL1, four pairs for the SLQ1, and twelve pairs for the SLT1 Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces of the SLQ1 and the SL1 incline down. The optical interfaces of the SLT1 are vertical to the front panel, indenting by 20 mm. The SL1, SLQ1, and SLT1 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies maintenance.

5.4.4 Parameter Configuration The major parameters required by the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1 are as follows.

J1


C2

C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 5-14 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-14 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1

Service type


E1 or T1

TUG structure

E3 or DS3


E4

140 Mbit/s into C-4

No service

Unequipped

5.4.5 Version Description The versions of the SLQ1 and SL1 are N1 and N2, which can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B). The two versions realize board functions in the same way. N2SLQ1 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled. The version of the SLT1 is N1, which is the only version existed. The board can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B).



5 SDH Boards


5.4.6 Technical Parameters Table 5-15 lists the technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1. Table 5-15 Technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1

Parameter

Description SLT1

SLQ1

SL1

4 x STM-1

1 x STM-1

Bit rate

155.52 Mbit/s


12 x STM-1

Line code pattern


Dimensions (mm)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

W

Weight (kg)

1.22

1.04

1.00


15

15

14

Optical interface type

I-1

S-1.1

L-1.1

L-1.2

Ve-1.2

Wavelength (nm)

1310

1310

1310

1550

1550


0 to 2

2 to 15

15 to 40

40 to 80

80 to 100


–15 to –8

–15 to –8

–5 to 0

–5 to 0

–3 to 2


–23

–28

–34

–34

–34


–8

–8

–10

–10

–10

Minimum extinction ration (dB)

8.2

8.2

10

10

10






Humidity: 5% to 95%



5 SDH Boards

Parameter

Description SLT1

SLQ1





SL1



5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1 The R1SLD4 is a 2 x STM-4 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SL4 is a 1 x STM-4 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SLD4 and the R1SL4 are responsible for:

The receiving or transmitting of STM-4 optical signals

The O/E conversion of STM-4 optical signals

The extracting or inserting of overhead byte

The detecting of alarms in the line

The R1SLQ1 and the R1SL1 are responsible for:

The receiving or transmitting of STM-1 optical signals

The O/E conversion of STM-1 optical signals

The extracting/inserting of overhead byte

The detecting of alarms in the line

Table 5-16 lists the slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1 in OSN products. Table 5-16 Slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1

Product

R1SLQ1

R1SL1

R1SLD4

R1SL4


Not available

Not available

Not available

Not available


Not available

Not available

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–7, 19–21

Slots 5–7, 19–21

Slots 7, 21

Slots 5–7, 19–21

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not available

Not available

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 6–9, 12–13

Slots 6–9, 12–13

Slots 6–9, 12–13

Slots 6–9, 12–13



5 SDH Boards

Product

R1SLQ1

R1SL1

R1SLD4

R1SL4

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 1–3, 6–9, 11–13

Slots 1–3, 6–9, 11–13

Slots 1–3, 11–13

Slots 1–3, 6–9, 11–13


R1SL4

R1SLD4

R1SLQ1

R1SL1

Basic function

Receive/Transmit 1 x STM-4 optical signal.

Receive/Transmit 2 x STM-4 optical signals.

Receive/Transmit 4 x STM-1 optical signals.

Receive/Transmit 1 x STM-1 optical signal.




Service processing

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and VC-4-4C concatenated services.

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services.

Overhead processing



Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination).

Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination).

Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.

Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.

Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and SNCP.

Support linear MSP and SNCP.

Protection schemes

Support MSP or SNCP shared optical path protection. Optical module specifications

Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.



Maintenance




5 SDH Boards

5.5.2 Principle The principle of the R1SLD4/R1SL4 is the same as that of the SL4. Refer to Figure 5-5 for details. The principle of the R1SLQ1/R1SL1 is the same as that of the SL1. Refer to Figure 5-7 for details.

5.5.3 Front Panel Figure 5-9 shows the front panels of the R1SLD4 and R1SL4. Figure 5-10 shows the front panels of the R1SLQ1 and R1SL1.

R1SL4

R1SLD4

Figure 5-9 The front panel of the R1SL4 and R1SLD4

R1SLQ1

R1SL1

Figure 5-10 The front panel of the R1SL1 and R1SLQ1



5 SDH Boards

The R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 are half-slot optical processing boards whose height is half of the SL4’s. They are used when the slots of the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 are segmented. 1. Indicators There are four indicators on the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1.






Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the R1SL4, two pairs for the R1SLD4, four pairs for the R1SLQ1, and one pair for the R1SL1 Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces are vertical to the front panel, indenting by 20 mm. The R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies maintenance.

5.5.4 Parameter Configuration The major parameters required by the half-slot optical processing boards are as follows.

J1


C2

C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Set C2 according to the actual service type. Table 5-17 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-17 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for half-slot optical processing boards

Service type


E1 or T1

TUG structure

E3 or DS3


E4

140 Mbit/s into C-4

No service

Unequipped



5 SDH Boards

5.5.5 Version Description The version of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 is N1, which is the only version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B after slot segmentation.

5.5.6 Technical Parameters The optical interface parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL are the same as that of the SL4 and SL1. Refer to Table 5-12 and Table 5-15 for details. Table 5-18 lists other technical parameters. Table 5-18 Technical parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1

Parameter

Description R1SL4

R1SLD4

Bit rate

622.080 Mbit/s


1 x STM-4 standard or concatenated services

Line code pattern


R1SLQ1

R1SL1

155.520 Mbit/s 2 x STM-4 standard or concatenated services

Dimensions (mm)

4 x STM-1 standard services

1 x STM-1 standard services

H D

111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

W

Weight (kg)

0.34

0.36

0.4

0.34


10

11

12

10










Humidity: 5% to 95%





5 SDH Boards

5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8 The SEP1 is an 8 x STM-1 electrical signal processing board, with two STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel. The EU08 and OU08are interface boards of the SEP1. The TSB8 is an electrical interface switching & bridging board. Table 5-19 lists the slots for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8 in OSN products. Table 5-19 Slot for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8

Product

SEP1 (Led out from front panel)

SEP (Work with interface boards)

EU08/OU08

TSB8


Slots 1–6, 13–16

Slots 2–5, 13–16

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 35


Slots 1–6, 13–16

Slots 2–5, 13–16

Not available

Slots 19, 35

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 6–7, 12–13

Slots 3, 15, 17

Slots 1, 17

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not available

Not available

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

Not available

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

Slots 12–13

Slots 14, 16

Slots 14

When used with different interface boards and electrical interface switching & bridging boards, the SEP1 has different access ability, as listed in Table 5-20. Table 5-20 Different access abilities of the SEP1

When worked with

Access ability

None

Access and process 2 x STM-1 electrical signals.

EU08

Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals.

OU08

Access and process 8 x STM-1 optical signals.

EU08 and TSB8

Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals, and achieve 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection.

Caution: The two interfaces on the front panel of the SEP1 are unavailable when used with interface boards.



5 SDH Boards

Caution: The EU08 and OU08 can only be used when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s in OptiX OSN 3500. When the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the EU04 can be used to work with the SEP1.

5.6.1 Functionality Functionality Basic function


SEP1

EU08/OU08


_

EU08: 8 x STM-1 electrical interface board OU08: 8 x STM-1 optical interface board The OU08 supports the I-1 and S-1.1 optical interface, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.

TSB8 8-channel electrical interface switching & bridging board

_

Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Optical module specifications

Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.

Service processing

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services. Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals.

Overhead processing


Alarms and performance events Protection scheme

Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration. Realize TPS protection when the SEP1 works with interface boards and switching & bridging boards. Support two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and SNCP. Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast.

Maintenance

Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.



5 SDH Boards

5.6.2 Principle Figure 5-11 shows the principle block diagram of the SEP1 (1 x STM-1 signal is processed). Backplane

STM-1 O/E signal Interface module

Data recovery module

STM-1 O/E signal

Cross-connect unit



Logic control module +3.3 V （Standby） +5 V +2.7 V

Power module

SCC

+3.3 V（Standby）

-48 V

+3.3 V

Figure 5-11 The principle block diagram of the SEP1


The interface module accesses STM-1 electrical signals (for optical signals, O/E conversion is needed), and the data recovery module recovers clock signals. Then, the cock signal and E4/STM-1 electrical signals are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received STM-1 electrical signals, converts it into parallel signals, and then sends them to the overhead processing module. The overhead processing module extracts the overhead bytes from the STM-1 signals, and demultiplexes the signals into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane. 2. In Transmit Direction

The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into STM-1 signals in the overhead processing unit, and sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module after being inserted with overhead bytes. The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received STM-1 electrical signals, and then sends them to the interface module after scrambling. The interface module sends the STM-1 electrical signals to the cable for transmission. When optical signals are required, the interface module adopts the OU08, where the signals are sent to fiber after E/O conversion.



5 SDH Boards

3. Auxiliary Units


This unit:

−

communicates with the SCC and other boards through Ethernet ports.

−

collects and reports alarms and performance events.

−

process the configuration command from NM.

Power module


5.6.3 Front Panel Figure 5-12 shows the front panels of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8. SEP1

EU08

OU08

TSB8

STAT ACT PROG SRV

EU08

EU08

OUT1IN1OUT2IN2OUT3IN3OUT4IN4OUT5IN5OUT6IN6OUT7IN7OUT8IN8

SEP1

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

SEP1

OU08

OU08 (LC)

TSB8

TSB8

Figure 5-12 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the SEP1.


Service active status indicator (ACT) – green Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-35


5 SDH Boards



For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the EU08, OU08, or TSB8. 2. Interfaces

Quantity: The SEP1 has two pair of 75-ohm SMB interface, with which the SEP1 can access two channels of STM-1 electrical signal by itself. Type: SMB connector Table 5-21 lists the quantity and type of the interfaces of the EU08 and OU08. Table 5-21 Interfaces of the EU08 and OU08

Interface

EU08

N1OU08

N2OU08

Quantity

8

8

8

Access ability

8 x STM-1(e)

8 x STM-1(o)

8 x STM-1(o)

Type

8-pair SMB electrical interface

8-pair LC optical interface

8-pair SC optical interface

Swappable optical module

—

Supported

Not supported

The N1OU08 supports swappable optical modules, which simplifies the maintenance to optical modules. There is no service interfaces on the TSB8.

5.6.4 Protection Configuration When used with the EU08 and TSB8, the SEP1 can achieve 1:N TPS protection for 8 x STM-1 electrical signals. Table 5-22 lists the TPS protection of the SEP1 in OSN products. Table 5-22 TPS protection of the SEP1

Product

TPS protection

TPS configuration


Support two groups of 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection

The board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5. The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13, 14, and 15.

OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500

Support two groups of 1:1 TPS protection

The board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7. The board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12.

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

—

OptiX OSN 1500A

Not supported

—



5 SDH Boards

Product

TPS protection

TPS configuration

OptiX OSN 1500B

Support one group of 1:1 TPS protection

The board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.

As an equipment level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment. 1. Protection Principle

Figure 5-13 shows the 1:3 TPS protection when the SEP1 is used with the EU08 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500. 8 x STM-1(e)

TSB8

1

2

3

8 x STM-1(e)

EU08

1

2

8 x STM-1(e) Switch control signal

EU08

1

2

EU08

1

2

Cross connect board

SLOT 9/10 Protection SEP1

Working SEP1

Working

Working

SEP1

SEP1

Fail SLOT 2

SLOT 3

SLOT 4

SLOT 5

Figure 5-13 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500

Normal status When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the SEP1 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the EU08. Switching status When a working SEP1 fails, the working board in each slot is protected in the following manners.

When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.

When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4.

When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.



5 SDH Boards

2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500

When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:3 TPS protection for the SEP1, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-14.

AUX

S L O T 5

S L O T 6

S L O T 7

S L O T 8

S L O T 10

FAN S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 SCC Protection 2 Working 2 Working 2 Working 2

Working 1 Working 1 Working 1 Protection 1

S L O T 9

XCS

S L O T 4

TSB8

EU08

S L O T 3

XCS

S L O T 2

FAN

EU08

PIU

S L O T 1

EU08

TSB8

FAN

PIU

S L O T 37

EU08

S S S SS SS S L L L LL LL L O O O OO OO O T T T TT TT T 2930313233343536

EU08

S S L L O O T T 27 28

EU08

S S S S SS S S L L L L LL L L O O O O OO O O T T T T TT T T 1920212223242526

Fiber routing


In the Figure 5-14, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5, and the board in slot 16 protects the ones in slots 13, 14, and 15. The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-23. Table 5-23 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500

Board

Protection group 1

Protection group 2

Protection SEP1

Slot 2

Slot 16

TSB8

Slot 19

Slot 35

Working SEP1

Slots 3, 4, 5

Slots 13, 14, 15

EU08

Slots 21, 23, 25

Slots 29, 31, 33


When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-15.



S L O T 12

S L O T 13

S L O T 14

Protection 2

SAP

S L O T 11

CXL16

CXL16

Working 1

Protection 1


Working 2

5 SDH Boards

S L O T 15

S L O T 16

S L O T 17

S L O T 18

Fiber Routing PIU (SLOT22)

FAN (SLOT24)

FAN (SLOT25)

PIU (SLOT23)


In the above figure, the board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7, and the board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12. The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-24. Table 5-24 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500

Board

Protection group 1

Protection group 2

Protection SEP1

Slot 6

Slot 13

TSB8

Slot 1

Slot 17

Working SEP1

Slot 7

Slot 12

EU08

Slot 3

Slot 15

4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B

When the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-16. Slot 14

TSB8

Slot 15 Slot 16

EU08

Slot 17

Slot 20 FAN

Slot 18

PIU

Slot 19

PIU

Slot 1

Slot 11

Slot 2

Slot 12 Protection Slot 7

Slot 6

Slot 3

Slot 13 Working

Slot 8

Slot 4

CXL16/4/1

Slot 9

EOW

Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

Slot 10

AUX

Figure 5-16 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

In the above figure, the board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.



5 SDH Boards

The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-25. Table 5-25 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

Board

Protection group

Protection SEP1

Slot 12

TSB8

Slot 14

Working SEP1

Slot 13

EU08

Slot 16

5.6.5 Parameter Configuration The following parameters should be set through the NM for the SEP1.

J1


C2

C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 5-26 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-26 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SEP1

Service type

C2 setting

E1 or T1

TUG structure

E3 or DS3

34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3

E4

140 Mbit/s into C-4

No service

Unequipped

5.6.6 Version Description The version of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is N1, which is the only version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B. The OU08 has version N1 and version N2. The optical interface of version N1 is of LC connector, and that of version N2 is of SC connector. The two versions provide the same functions.

5.6.7 Technical Parameters Table 5-27 lists the technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8.



5 SDH Boards

Table 5-27 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8

Parameter

Description SEP1

EU08

OU08

TSB8

Bit rate

155520 kbit/s

Access capability

2 channels of electrical signals

8 channels of electrical signals

8 channels of optical signals

-


8 x STM-1

-

-

-

Line code pattern

CMI

Connector

SMB

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

NRZ SMB

LC or SC

H D

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

W

Weight (kg)

0.95

0.41

0.41

0.28


17

11

6

5

Optical module type

-

I-1,

Wavelength (nm)

-

1310

-


-

0–15

-


-

–15 to –8

-


-

–38

-









Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%

Humidity: 10%–100%



S-1.1

-


6 PDH Boards

6

PDH Boards

This chapter introduces the PDH boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of:

Functionality

Principle

Front panel



Version description


The PDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are listed in Table 4-2.

6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 The SPQ4 is a 4 x E4/STM-1(e) processing board. The MU04 is a 4 x E4/STM-1 interface board. The SPQ4 works with the MU04 to access and process 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical signals. The SPQ4 and MU04 work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N TPS protection. Table 6-1 lists the slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8. Table 6-1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8

Product

SPQ4

MU04

TSB8


Slots 2–5, 13–16

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 35


Slots 2–5, 13–16

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 35

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 6–7, 12–13

Slots 1, 3, 15, 17

Slots 1, 17

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not available

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A

Not available

Not available

Not available



6 PDH Boards

Product

SPQ4

MU04

TSB8

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 12–13

Slots 14, 16

Slot 14


SPQ4

MU04

TSB8

Basic function

4 x E4/STM-1(e) processing board

4 x E4/STM-1(e) interface board

8-channel electrical interface switching & bridging board

Service processing

Access and process 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals. Each path can carry both E4 and STM-1 electrical signals. Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services

Overhead processing

Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals, including B1, B2, K1, K2, M1, F1, and D1–D12. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination), including J1, B3, C2, G1, and H4. Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.



Protection schemes

The SPQ4 supports TPS protection when working with interface boards and switching & bridging boards. Supports two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP, and SNCP.

Maintenance


6.1.3 Principle Figure 6-1 shows the functional block diagram of the SPQ4.



6 PDH Boards Backplane

E4/STM-1 electrical signal

E4/STM-1 electrical signal

Interface module (MU04)

Cross-connect unit


Data recovery module



SCC

+3.3 V（Standby） +5 V +2.7 V

Power module

-48 V

+3.3 V

Figure 6-1 The functional block diagram of the SPQ4


The interface unit (MU04) accesses E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and then the data recovery module recovers the clock signal. Then, the clock signal and E4/STM-1 electrical signals are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals, converts it into parallel signals, and sends them to the overhead processing module. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received E4/STM-1 signals, and demultiplexes them into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane. 2. In Transmit Direction

The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit is multiplexed into E4/STM-1 signals in the overhead processing unit, and then sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module after being inserted with overhead bytes. The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and then sends them to the interface unit after scrambling. The interface unit sends the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals into the cable for transmission. 3. Auxiliary Units


This unit: −

communicates with the SCC and other boards through Ethernet ports.

−

collects and reports alarms and performance events.

−

process the configuration command from NM.



6 PDH Boards

Power module


6.1.4 Front Panel Figure 6-2 shows the front panel of the SPQ4 and the MU04. SPQ4

MU04

STAT ACT PROG SRV

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4

SPQ4

SPQ4

MU04

MU04

Figure 6-2 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the SEP1.





For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the MU04 or TSB8. 2. Interfaces

There are no interfaces on the SPQ4, the SPQ4 should work with the MU04 to input/output E4/STM-1 signals. Table 6-2 describes interfaces on the MU04.



6 PDH Boards

Table 6-2 Interfaces on the MU04

Interface

MU04

Access service

4 x E4/STM-1

Interface

75 ohm unbalanced interface

Interface type

SMB

6.1.5 Protection Configuration When used with the MU04 and TSB8, the SPQ4 can achieve 1:N TPS protection for 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical signals. Table 6-3 lists the TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-3 The TPS protection of the SPQ4

Product

TPS protection

TPS configuration



The board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5. The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13, 14, and 15.


Support two groups of 1:1 TPS protection

The board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7. The board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12.

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

—

OptiX OSN 1500A

Not supported

—

OptiX OSN 1500B



As an equipment level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment. 1. Protection Principle

Figure 6-3 shows the 1:3 TPS protection when the SPQ4 is used with the MU04 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500.



6 PDH Boards 4× E4/STM-1

TSB8

1

2

3

4× E4/STM-1

MU04

1

2

4× E4/STM-1

Switch control MU04 signal

MU04

1

2

1

2

Crossconnect and timing board Slot 9/10 Protection

Working

Working

Working

SPQ4

SPQ4

SPQ4

SPQ4

Fail Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Figure 6-3 The 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500

Normal status When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the SPQ4 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the MU04. Switching status When a working SPQ4 fails, the working board in each slot is protected in the following manners.

When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.

When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4.

When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.


When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:3 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-4.



6 PDH Boards

AUX

S L O T 5

S L O T 6

S L O T 7

S L O T 8

S L O T 10

FAN S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 SCC Protection 2 Working 2 Working 2 Working 2


S L O T 9

XCS

S L O T 4

TSB8

EU08

S L O T 3

XCS

S L O T 2

FAN

EU08

PIU

S L O T 1

EU08

TSB8

FAN

PIU

S L O T 37

EU08


EU08

S S L L O O T T 27 28

EU08


Fiber routing


In Figure 6-4, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5, and the board in slot 16 protects the ones in slots 13, 14, and 15. The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-4. Table 6-4 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500

Board

Protection group 1

Protection group 2

Protection SPQ4

Slot 2

Slot 16

TSB8

Slot 19

Slot 35

Working SPQ4

Slots 3, 4, 5

Slots 13, 14, 15

EU04

Slots 21, 23, 25

Slots 29, 31, 33


When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-5.



S L O T 12

S L O T 13

S L O T 14

Protection 2

SAP

S L O T 11

CXL16

CXL16

Working 1

Protection 1


Working 2

6 PDH Boards

S L O T 15

S L O T 16

S L O T 17

S L O T 18


FAN (SLOT24)

FAN (SLOT25)

PIU (SLOT23)


In Figure 6-5, the board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7, and the board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12. The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-5. Table 6-5 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500

Board

Protection group 1

Protection group 2

Protection SPQ4

Slot 6

Slot 13

TSB8

Slot 1

Slot 17

Working SPQ4

Slot 7

Slot 12

MU04

Slot 3

Slot 15


When the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-6. Slot 14

TSB8

Slot 15 Slot 16

EU08

Slot 17

Slot 20 FAN

Slot 18

PIU

Slot 19

PIU

Slot 1

Slot 11

Slot 2


Slot 6

Slot 3

Slot 13 Working

Slot 8

Slot 4

CXL16/4/1

Slot 9

EOW

Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

Slot 10

AUX

Figure 6-6 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

In the above figure, the board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.



6 PDH Boards

The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-6. Table 6-6 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

Board

Protection group

Protection SPQ4

Slot 12

TSB8

Slot 14

Working SPQ4

Slot 13

MU04

Slot 16

6.1.6 Parameter Configuration The following parameters should be set through the NM for the SPQ4.

J1


C2

C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frames and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 6-7 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 6-7 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SPQ4

Service type

C2 setting

E1 or T1

TUG structure

E3 or DS3

34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3

E4

140 Mbit/s into C-4

No service

Unequipped

6.1.7 Version Description The SPQ4 has version N1 and version N2. The two versions are different in the internal modules used, but realize functions in the same way. The two versions can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B. The two versions can be replaced by each other in products of version V100R003. The version of the MU04 and TSB8 is N1, which is the only version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B.

6.1.8 Technical Parameters Table 6-8 lists the technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04.



6 PDH Boards

Table 6-8 Technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04

Parameter

Description SPQ4

MU04

Bit rate

139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s

Process capability

Process 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals

Line code pattern

CMI

Connector

None

SMB

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

Access 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals

H D W

Weight (kg)

0.91

0.41


24

2









Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%





6 PDH Boards

6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S

The PL3 is a 3 x E3/DS3 processing board.

The PD3 is a 6 x E3/DS3 processing board.

The PL3A is a 3 x E3/DS3 processing board with cables led out from the front panel.

The C34S is a 3 x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board.

The D34S is a 6 x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board.

The PL3/PD3 works with the D34S to access and process 3/6 x E3 electrical signals. The PL3 works with the C34S to access and process 3 x E3 electrical signals .The PL3/PD3 and C34S/D34S work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N TPS protection. Table 6-9 lists the slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8 on the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-9 Slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8

Product

PL3/PD3

PL3A

C34S

D34S

TSB8


Slots 2–5, 13–16

Slots 1–8, 11–17

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 35


Slots 2–5, 13–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 35

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 6–7, 12–13

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 1, 3, 15, 17

Slots 1, 3, 15, 17

Slots 1, 17

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not available

Not available

Not available

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A

Not available

Slots 12–13

Not available

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 12–13

Slots 11–13

Slots 14, 16

Slots 14, 16

Slot 14


PL3

PD3

PL3A

C34S

D34S

TSB8

Basic function

3 x E3 processin g board

6 x E3 processin g board

3 x E3 processin g board (led out from front panel)

3x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board

6x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board

8-chann el electrical interface switching & bridging board

Service processing

Access and process E3/DS3 signals.



6 PDH Boards

Overhead processing

Support the setting and querying of all path overheads at VC-3 level.



Protection schemes

The PL3/PD3 supports TPS protection when working with interface boards and switching & bridging boards.

Maintenance

Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-3 level and locate faults quickly. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset does not affect services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.

6.2.2 Principle Figure 6-7 shows the functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A (one channel of E3/DS3 signal is processed). Backplane

D34S/D34S

E3/DS3 Decoder

Mapping

Encoder

Demapping

Interface module D34S/D34S

E3/DS3

Cross-connect unit

Cross-connect unit


SCC

+3.3 V （Standby） +5 V +2.7 V

Power module

-48 V

+3.3 V

Figure 6-7 The functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A


The E3/DS3 signal is accessed, through the interface module, into the decoder, where Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-12


6 PDH Boards

NRZ data signal and clock signal are recovered after decoding. Then, the signal is sent to the mapping module. In the mapping module, the E3/DS3 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-3, and formed as VC-3 after path overhead processing, as TU-3 after pointer processing, and finally as VC-4 after multiplexing. Then, the signal is sent to the cross-connect unit. Figure 6-8 shows the mapping process. VC-4

x3

TUG-3

TU-3

VC-3

C-3 44736 kbit/s or 34368 kbit/s

Figure 6-8 The mapping and multiplexing process of E3/DS3 signals

2. In Transmit Direction

The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signals from the VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit, and then sends them to the encoder, where E3 or DS3 signals are output. 3. Auxiliary Units

Logic control module This unit: −

Enables the communication between the boards and the SCC.

−

Collects and reports alarms and performance events to the SCC.

−

Processes the configuration command from the SCC.

Power module Provide the board with required DC voltages.

6.2.3 Front Panel Figure 6-9 shows the front panel of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S.



6 PDH Boards

PL3 STAT ACT PROG SRV

PD3 STAT ACT PROG SRV

PL3A

D34S

STAT ACT PROG SRV

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3

PL3

PL3

PD3

PD3

PL3A

PL3A

D34S

C34S

D34S

Figure 6-9 The front panel of the PD3, PL3, PL3A, C34S and D34S



6 PDH Boards

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the PL3, PD3, and PL3A.

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colours (red, green)


Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colours (red, green)

Service alarm indicator (SRV) – triple colours (red, green, and yellow)

For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the C34S, D34S or TSB8. 2. Interfaces

There are no interfaces on the PL3 or PD3. The board should work with the D34S to input or output E3/DS3 signals. There are three pairs of 75-ohm SMB unbalanced interfaces on the front panel of the PL3A. Table 6-10 describes interfaces on the D34S. Table 6-10 Interfaces on the D34S

Interface

C34S

D34S

Access service

3 x E3/DS3

6 x E3/DS3

Interface


Interface type

SMB

Corresponding processing board

PL3, PD3

6.2.4 Protection Configuration The PL3/PD3 works with the C34S/D34S and TSB8 to achieve 1:N protection for 3/6 x E3/DS3 signals. Table 6-11 lists the TPS protection of the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-11 The TPS protection of the PL3/PD3

Product

TPS protection

TPS configuration


Support two groups of 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection.

The board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5.

Support two groups of 1:1 TPS protection.



The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13, 14, and 15.

The board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12. OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported.

—

OptiX OSN

Not supported.

—



6 PDH Boards

1500A OptiX OSN 1500B

Support one group of 1:1 TPS protection.


As equipment-level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment. 1. Protection Principle

The protection principle of the PL3 is the same as that of the PD3. Figure 6-10 shows the principle of 1:3 TPS for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500. 6 x E3/DS3

TSB8

1 2

3

6 x E3/DS3

D34S

1

2

6 x E3/DS3

Switch control D34S signal

D34S

1

2

1

2 Crossconnect unit

SLOT 9/10 Protection PD3

Working PD3

Working PD3

Working PD3

Fail Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Figure 6-10 The 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500



6 PDH Boards

Normal status When each working board works normally, the service signal is accessed to the corresponding PD3 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the D34S. Switching status When a working PD3 failure is detected, the working board in each slot is protected in the following manners. When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3. When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4. When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5. 2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500

Table 6-12 shows the relation between the working board and protection board when the equipment is configured as 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3 or PD3. Table 6-12 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:3 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500

Working board

Protection board

Slot configuration

PL3 (E3)

PL3 (E3)

As shown in Figure 6-11.

PL3 (DS3)

PL3 (DS3)

PD3 (E3)

PD3 (E3)

PD3 (DS3)

PD3 (DS3)



6 PDH Boards

AUX

S L O T 5

S L O T 6

S L O T 7

S L O T 8

FAN

S L O T 10

S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 SCC Protection 2 Working 2 Working 2 Working 2


S L O T 9

XCS

S L O T 4

TSB8

EU08

S L O T 3

FAN

XCS

S L O T 2

EU08

PIU

S L O T 1

EU08

TSB8

FAN

PIU

S L O T 37

EU08


EU08

S S L L O O T T 27 28

EU08


Fiber routing

Figure 6-11 Board layout upon 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500

In the figure, slot 2 protects slots 3, 4, and 5, and slot 16 protects slots 13, 14, and 15. Table 6-13 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8. Table 6-13 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500

Board

Protection group 1

Protection group 2

PL3/PD3 (protection board)

Slot 2

Slot 16

PL3/PD3 (working board)

Slots 3, 4, 5

Slots 13, 14, 15

TSB8

Slot 19

Slot 35

D34S

Slots 21, 23, 25

Slots 29, 31, 33


Table 6-14 shows the relation between the working board and protection board when the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3 or PD3. Table 6-14 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 2500

Working board

Protection board

Slot configuration

PL3 (E3)

PL3 (E3)


PL3 (DS3)

PL3 (DS3)

PD3 (E3)

PD3 (E3)

PD3 (DS3)

PD3 (DS3)



S L O T 12

S L O T 13

S L O T 14

Protection 2

SAP

S L O T 11

CXL16

CXL16

Working 1

Protection 1


Working 2

6 PDH Boards

S L O T 15

S L O T 16

S L O T 17

S L O T 18


FAN (Slot 24)

FAN (Slot 25)

PIU (Slot 23)

Figure 6-12 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 n the OptiX OSN 2500

In the figure, slot 6 protects slot7, and slot 13 protects slots 12. Table 6-15 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8. Table 6-15 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500

Board

Protection group 1

Protection group 2


Slot 6

Slot 13


Slot 7

Slot 12

TSB8

Slot 1

Slot 17

D34S

Slot 3

Slot 15


Table 6-16 shows the relation between the working board and protection board when the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3 or PD3. Table 6-16 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 1500B

Working board

Protection board

Slot configuration

PL3 (E3)

PL3 (E3)


PL3 (DS3)

PL3 (DS3)

PD3 (E3)

PD3 (E3)

PD3 (DS3)

PD3 (DS3)



6 PDH Boards Slot 14

TSB8

Slot 15 Slot 16

EU08

Slot 17

Slot 20 FAN

Slot 18

PIU

Slot 19

PIU

Slot 1

Slot 11

Slot 2


Slot 3

Slot 13 Working

Slot 4 Slot 5

Slot 6

Slot 8

CXL16/4/1

Slot 9

EOW

CXL16/4/1

Slot 10

AUX

Figure 6-13 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

In the figure, slot 12 protects slot 13. Table 6-17 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8. Table 6-17 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B in the OptiX OSN 1500B

Board

Protection group


Slot 12


Slot 13

TSB8

Slot 14

D34S

Slot 16

6.2.5 Parameter Configuration The following parameters should be set on the T2000 for the PL3/PD3. Load indication When the service channel does not process the services it carries, select “Do not load”. Otherwise, select “Load”. Tributary loopback The tributary loopback function is generally used to locate faults for each service channel. The tributary loopback is a diagnosis function, which may interrupt services on relevant channels. Channel service type E3 or DS3 can be selected on the T2000 according to the input service type.

6.2.6 Version Description Version N1 is the only version for the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S, D34S, and TSB8. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.

6.2.7 Technical Parameters Table 6-18 lists the technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S, and D34S. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-20


6 PDH Boards

Table 6-18 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S

Parameter PL3

PD3

Description PL3A

C34S

D34S

Bit rate

34368 kbit/s or 44736 kbit/s


3x E3/DS3

6x E3/DS3

3x E3/DS3

None

None

Access capability

0

0

3x E3/DS3

3x E3/DS3

6x E3/DS3

Line code pattern

E3:HDB3, DS3:B3ZS

Connector

None

SMB

SMB

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

None

H D W

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

Weight (kg)

1.00

1.12

1.00

0.31

0.38


15

19

15

2

2







Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%

Humidity: 10%–100% Environment for transportation

Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%



6 PDH Boards

6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B

The PQ1 is a 63 x E1 processing board.

The PQM is a 63 x E1/T1 processing board.

The D75S is a 32 x 75 ohm E1 PDH interface switching board.

The D12S is a 32 x 120 ohm E1/T1 PDH interface switching board.

The D12B is a 32 x 120 ohm E1/T1 PDH interface board.

Table 6-19 lists slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-19 Slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B

Product

PQ1/PQM

D75S/D12S/D12B


Slots 1–5, 13–16

Slots 19–26, 29–36


Slots 1–5, 13–16

Slots 19–26, 29–36

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–7,12–13

Slots 1–4,15–18

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

Slots 14–17

Table 6-20 shows the difference between the PQ1 and PQM. Table 6-20 Comparison between the PQ1 and PQM

Board

PQ1

PQM


63 x E1

63 x E1/T1

Interface board (providing TPS)

2 x D75S or 2 x D12S

2 x D12S

Interface board (NOT providing TPS)

2 x D12B, 2 x D75S or 2 x D12S

2 x D12B or 2 x D12S

Comparison


PQ1

PQM

D75S/D12S/D12B

Basic function


63 x E1/T1 processing board

E1/T1 interface board

Service processing

Refer to Table 6-21 for details.

When working with interface boards, the PQ1 can access and process 63 x E1 signals. When working with interface boards, the PQM can access and process 63 x E1/T1 signals.



6 PDH Boards

Functionality

PQ1

PQM

D75S/D12S/D12B

Overhead processing

Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination) at VC-12 level, such as J2.



Protection schemes

The PQ1/PQM supports TPS protection when working with interface boards and switching & bridging boards. Support multiple protection schemes, such as SNCP protection, with switching time less than 50ms.

Maintenance

Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-12 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.

6.3.2 Principle Figure 6-14 shows the functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM (one channel of E1/T1 signal is processed). Backplane

D75S/D12S/ E1/T1 D12B

Decoder

Mapping

Encoder

Demapping

Interface module D75S/D12S/ D12B

E1/T1


Cross-connect unit

Cross-connect unit

SCC

+3.3 V（Standby） +5 V +2.7 V

Power module

+3.3 V

Figure 6-14 The functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM


-48 V


6 PDH Boards


The input E3/DS3 signal enters, through the interface module, the decoder, where HDB3 or B8ZS data signal and clock signal are recovered. Then, the signal is sent to the mapping module. In the mapping module, the E1/T1 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-12, and formed as VC-12 after channel overhead processing, as TU-12 after pointer processing, and finally as VC-4 through multiplexing. Then, the signal is sent to the cross-connect unit. The mapping process is shown in Figure 6-15. x3

VC-4

TUG-3

x7

TUG-2

x3

TU-12

VC-12

C-12 12


Figure 6-15 The mapping and multiplexing process of E1/T1 signals

2. In Transmit Direction

The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signal from the VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit, and sends the signal to the encoder, where E1 or T1 signals are output. 3. Auxiliary Units


This unit:

−

communicates the board with the SCC.

−

collects and reports alarms and performance events to the SCC.

−

process the configuration command from the SCC.

Power module


6.3.3 Front Panel Figure 6-16 shows the front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B.



6 PDH Boards

PQ1 STAT ACT PROG SRV

PQM

1～8

1～8

1～8

9～16

9～16

9～16

17～24

17～24

17～24

25～32

25～32

25～32

PQM

D75S

D12S

PQM

D75S

D12S

PQ1

PQ1

D12B

D12S

D75S

STAT ACT PROG SRV

D12B

D12B

Figure 6-16 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the PQ1 and PQM.





For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the D75S, D12S, or D12B. 2. Interfaces

There are no interfaces on the PQ1 or PQM. The board should work with the D75S, D12S, or D12B to input/output E1/T1 signals. Table 6-21 shows the difference between the D75S, D12S, and D12B. Table 6-21 Comparison between the D75S, D12S, and D12B

Comparison

Board

Access capability

D75S

D12S

D12B

32 x E1

32 x E1/T1

32 x E1/T1



6 PDH Boards D75S

D12S

D12B

Interface


120 ohm balanced interface


Interface type

DB44

DB44

DB44

Comparison

Board

6.3.4 Protection Configuration The PQ1 and PQM work with the D75S or D12S to achieve 1:N TPS protection for 63 x E1/T1 signals. Table 6-22 shows the TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-22 The TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM

Product

TPS protection

TPS configuration


Support one group of 1:N (N≤8) TPS protection

The board in slot 1 protects the ones in slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, and 16.

OptiX OSN 2500


The board in slot 5 protects the ones in slots 6, 7, 12, and 13.

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

—

OptiX OSN 1500A

Not supported

—

OptiX OSN 1500B


The board in slot 11 protects the ones in slots 12 and 13.


1. Protection Principle

The protection principle of the PQ1 is the same with that of the PQM. Figure 6-17 shows the protection principle of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500.



6 PDH Boards

S L O E1 protection bus T 1 9

S L O T 2 0

S L O T 2 1

S L O T 2 2

S L O T 2 3

S L O T 2 4

S L O T 2 5

S L O T 2 6

S L O T 2 9

S L O T 3 0

S L O T 3 1

S L O T 3 2

S L O T 3 3

S L O T 3 4

S L O T 3 5

S L O T 3 6

D75S D75S

D75S D75S

D75S D75S

D75S D75S

D75S D75S

D75S D75S

D75S D75S

D75S D75S

E1 service bus S L O T 1

S L O T 2

S L O T 3

S L O T 4

S L O T 1 3

S L O T 5

S L O T 1 4

S L O T 1 5

S L O T 1 6

Fail Protection

Working

Working

Working

Working

Working

Working

Working

Working

PQ1

PQ1

PQ1

PQ1

PQ1

PQ1

PQ1

PQ1

PQ1

Detect

board

fault

Cross-connect and timing board

TPS switching control bus

Figure 6-17 The 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500

When detecting a working PQ1 is faulty, the cross-connect board delivers the service switching command to control the interface board to switch the faulty board to protection board, thus achieving the protection of services. 2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500

When the equipment is configured as with 1:8 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Table 6-23. Table 6-23 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:8 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500

Working board

Protection board

Slot configuration

PQ1 (75 ohm)

PQ1 (75 ohm)

PQ1 (120 ohm)

PQ1 (120 ohm) or PQM

The board in slot 1 is a protection board, protecting the boards in slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, and 16.

PQM

PQM

Figure 6-18 shows the slots for the working and the protection boards.



6 PDH Boards

S S L L O O T T 27 28


S L O T 37

D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S

PIU

D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S

AUX

FAN S L O T 3

S L O T 4

S L O T 5

S L O T 6

S L O T 7

S L O T 8

S L O T 10

FAN S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 SCC Working Working Working Working

Working Working Working Working Protection

S L O T 9

XCS

S L O T 2

FAN

XCS

S L O T 1

PIU


Fiber routing



When the equipment is configured as with 1:4 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation between the working and the protection board is shown in Table 6-24. Table 6-24 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:4 TPS in the OptiX OSN 2500

Working board

Protection board

Slot

PQ1 (75 ohm)

PQ1 (75 ohm)

PQ1 (120 ohm)

PQ1 (120 ohm) or PQM

The board in slot 5 is a protection board, protecting the boards in slots 6, 7, 12, and 13.

PQM

PQM

Figure 6-19 shows the slots for the working and the protection boards.



S L O T 12

S L O T 13

S L O T 14

Working

SAP

S L O T 11

CXL16

CXL16

Working

Working

Protection


Working

6 PDH Boards

S L O T 15

S L O T 16

S L O T 17

S L O T 18

Fiber routing

PIU (Slot 22)

FAN (Slot 24)

FAN (Slot 25)

PIU (Slot 23)



When the equipment is configured as with 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Table 6-25. Table 6-25 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B

Board

Protection group

PQ1/PQM (protection)

Slot 11

PQ1/PQM (working)

Slots 12, 13

D75S/D12S

Slots 14, 15, 16, 17

6.3.5 Parameter Configuration The following parameter should be set through the NM for the PQ1 or PQM.

J2

It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status.

6.3.6 Version Description Version N1 is the only version of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B.

6.3.7 Technical Parameters Table 6-26 lists the technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B. Table 6-26 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B

Parameter Bit rate

Description PQ1 PQM 2048 kbit/s

D75S



D12S

D12B


6 PDH Boards

Parameter

Description PQ1 PQM

D75S

D12S

D12B


63 x E1

63 x E1/T1

Support TPS

Support TPS

Not support TPS

Accessing capability

0

0

32 x E1

32 x E1/T1

32 x E1/T1

Line code pattern

E1: HDB3, T1: B8ZS, AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)

Connector

None

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

None

DB44

DB44

DB44 H D

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

Weight (kg)

1.01

1.01

0.35

0.35

0.31


19

22

5.5

9

1









Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%




W


6 PDH Boards

6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S

The PD1 is a 32 x E1 half-slot processing board. It is used with the L75S or L12S in the OptiX OSN 1500A and used with D75S or D12S in the OptiX OSN 2500 and 1500B.

The PL1A is a 16 x E1(75-ohm) half-slot processing board, with signals led out from the front panel.

The PL1B is a 16 x E1 (120-ohm) half-slot processing board, with signals led out from the front panel.

The L75S is a 16 x E1 interface switching board (75-ohm). It is only used in the OptiX OSN 1500A.

The L12S is a 16 x E1/T1 interface switching board (120-ohm). It is only used in the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Note: When the impedance of interfaces is ignored, the PL1A and PL1B are called PL1 hereinafter.

Table 6-27 lists slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-27 Slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S

Product

PD1

PL1

L75S/L12S

OptiX OSN 3500 (80Gbit/s)

Not available

Not available

Not available


Not available

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–7, 19–21

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not available

Not available

Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 2, 12 (after slot segmentation)

Slots 6–9

Slots 6–7

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 1–3, 6–8, 11–13 (after slot segmentation)

Slots 6–9

Not available


PD1

PL1

L75S/L12S

Basic function



E1/T1 interface board



6 PDH Boards

Functionality

PD1

PL1

L75S/L12S

Service processing

When working with interface boards, the PD1 can access and process 32 x E1 signals. The PL1 accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals directly.

Overhead processing

Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination) at VC-12 level, such as J2.



Protection schemes

The PD1 supports TPS protection when working with interface switching boards. Support multiple protection schemes, such as SNCP protection, with switching time less than 50ms.

Maintenance

Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-12 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.

6.4.2 Principle The working principle of the PD1 and PL1 is the same as that of the PQ1. Refer to section 6.3.2 “Principle” for details.

6.4.3 Front Panel Figure 6-20 shows the front panel of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S. PD1 STAT ACT PROG SRV

PL1

L12S

L12S

1-16

PL1

1-16

1-16

PD1

L75S

STAT ACT PROG SRV

L75S

Figure 6-20 The front panel of the PD1, PL1, L12S and L75S



6 PDH Boards

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the PD1 and PL1.





For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the L75S and L12S. 2. Interfaces

In the OptiX OSN 1500A, the PD1 works with the L75S or L12S to input/output E1 signals. In the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500B, the PD1 working with the D75S or D12S to input/output E1 signals. Refer to section 6.3.3 for details on the D75S and D12S. Table 6-28 compares the PL1, L75S, and L12S. Table 6-28 Comparison between the PL1, L75S, and L12S

L75S

L12S

PL1

Access capability

16 x E1

16 x E1

16 x E1

Interface



75/120 ohm unbalanced/balance d interface

Interface type

2mmHM

2mmHM

2mmHM

Comparison

Board

6.4.4 Protection Configuration The PD1 and PL1 can only be used in the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The PD1 works with L75S/D75S or L12S/D12S to achieve 1:N protection to E1 signals. Table 6-29 shows the TPS protection of the PD1. Table 6-29 The TPS protection of the PD1

Product

TPS protection

TPS configuration


Not supported

—


The board in slot 5 protects the ones in slots 6 and 7.


The board in slot 19 protects the ones in slots 20 and 21. OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

—



6 PDH Boards

Product

TPS protection

TPS configuration

OptiX OSN 1500A



OptiX OSN 1500B

Support two groups of 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection at most

The board in slot 1 protects the ones in slots 2 and 3. The board in slot 11 protects the ones in slots 12 and 13. The board in slot 6 protects the ones in slots 7 and 8. The latter two groups in the above groups cannot coexist.

1. Protection Principle

The TPS protection principle of the PD1 is the same as that of the PQ1. 2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500

The 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 can be achieved after the OptiX OSN 2500 performs slot segmentation. Figure 6-21 shows the board distribution. S S S S S S S L L L L L L L O O O O O O O T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 19 20 21

S S S L L L O O O T T T 8 9 10

S L O T 11

S L O T 12

S L O T 13

S L O T 14

S L O T 15

S L O T 16

S L O T 17

S L O T 18

SAP

S L O T 7

CXL16

S L O T 6

CXL16

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

P2 W2 W2

S L O T 5

P1 W1 W1


FAN (SLOT24)

FAN (SLOT25)

PIU (SLOT23)

Figure 6-21 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500

Table 6-30 lists slots for the working, protection, and interface switching board of the PD1. Table 6-30 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:2 TPS of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500

Board

Protection group 1

Protection group 2

PD1 (protection)

Slots 5

Slot 19

PD1 (working)

Slots 6, 7

Slots 20, 21

D75S/D12S

Slots 2, 4

Slots 1, 3



6 PDH Boards

3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500A

The 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 can be achieved after the OptiX OSN 1500A performs slot segmentation. Figure 6-22 shows the board distribution. Slot 1 Slot 20

PD1(P) Slot 2 Slot 3

FAN

Slot 11

Slot 6 L75S(17~32)

Slot 12 PD1(W)

Slot 7 L75S(1~16)

Slot 13

Slot 8

Slot 4

CXL16/4/1

Slot 9

EOW

Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

Slot 10

AUX

Figure 6-22 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1


Table 6-31 shows the slot assignment of the working and the protection board of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B. Table 6-31 Slot assignment upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

Board



PD1 (protection)

Slot 11

Slot 6

Slot 1

Slot 11

Slot 6

PD1 (working)

Slots 12, 13

Slots 7, 8

Slots 2, 3

Slots 12, 13

Slots 7, 8

D75S/D12S

Slots 15, 17

Slots 15, 17

Slots 14, 16

Slots 15, 17

Slots 15, 17

Note: The protection group with slot 6 and that with slot 11 cannot coexist, because the two groups share protection bus. The OptiX OSN 1500B supports one group of TPS protection to E1 signals before slot segmentation, and supports two groups after slot segmentation.

6.4.5 Parameter Configuration The following parameter should be set through the NM for the PD1 or PL1.

J2

It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status.

6.4.6 Version Description Version N1 is the only version of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B after slot segmentation. The PL1 has PL1A and PL1B. A indicates the interface impedance is 75 ohm, and B indicates the interface impedance is 120 ohm.

6.4.7 Technical Parameters Table 6-32 lists the technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S.



6 PDH Boards

Table 6-32 Technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S

Parameter

Description PD1

PL1

Bit rate

2048 kbit/s

2048 kbit/s


32 x E1

Accessing capability

0

Line code pattern

E1: HDB3

Connector

None

Dimensions (mm)

L75S

L12S

16 x E1

TPS

TPS

0

16 x E1 (75-ohm)

16 x E1 (120-ohm)

2mmHM

2mmHM

2mmHM

H D

111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

W

Weight (kg)

0.50

0.45

0.24

0.27


15

6.7

2.7

4.5









Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%






7

Data Processing Boards

This chapter introduces data processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, including Ethernet data processing boards, ATM data processing boards and Ethernet data interface boards as follows.

Ethernet transparent transmission board – EFT4/EFT8/EGT2

Ethernet switching processing board – EFS4/EFS0/EGS2

Ethernet board with RPR function – EMR0/EGR2

ATM service processing board – ADL4/ADQ1

ATM service processing board with IMA function – IDL4/IDQ1

Multi-service transparent transmission processing board – MST4

Ethernet data interface board – EFF8/ETF8/ETS8

The technical details cover:

Functionality

Principle

Front panel



Version description


Refer to Table 4-3 for the name and descriptions of the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500.




7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

The EGT2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet transparent transmission board.

The EFT8 is an 8/16-port 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board.

The EFT4 (seated in the half-height slot) is a 4-port 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board.

The EFF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board.

The ETF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board.

Table 7-1 shows the slots for the EGT2, EFT8, EFT4, EFF8, and ETF8 boards. Table 7-1 Slots for the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

Product

EGT2 (Note 1)

EFT8 (led out from front panel) (Note 1)

EFT8 (used with interface boards) (Note 1)

EFT4

EFF8/ETF8


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–6, 13–16

Slots 2–5, 13–16

Not supported

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–6, 13–16

Slots 13

Not supported

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 7, 12–13

Slots 5–7, 19–212

Slots 1, 3, 15, 17

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

Slots 12–13

Not supported

Slots 2–3, slots 12–13, slots 6–92

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

Slots 11–13

Slots 12–13

Slots 1–3, slots 11–13, slots 6–92

Slots 14, 16

Note 1: The EGT2 and the EFT8 support bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically according to the capacity of the slots they are seated in. Note 2: These slots are half-height slots.




7.1.1 Functionality Function

Board

Basic function

EGT2

EFT8

EFT4

Transparent transmission of 2 GE signals

Transparent transmission of 8/16 FE signals

Transparent transmission of 4 FE signals

The EFT8 can access 8 electrical Ethernet signals itself.

Used with an interface board

Used with the ETF8, the EFT8 can access 16 electrical Ethernet signals.

-

-

Used with the EFF8, the EFT8 can access 8 optical Ethernet signals and 8 electrical Ethernet signals. 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface, supporting auto-negotiation function and compliant with IEEE802.3z. Interface specifications

Service frame format

Adopt hot-swappable SFP optical interface to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber (or use 40 km and 70 km optical modules according to the actual condition).

Used with the ETF8, the EFT8 supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX. Used with EFF8 to support 100Base-FX, compliant with IEEE802.3u.

Support 10Base-T/100Base-TX, and comply with IEEE802.3u.

Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, supporting 64-byte–9600-byte frames and 9600-byte Jumbo frame. 1.25 Gbit/s;

Maximum uplink bandwidth

2.5 Gbit/s

Number of VCTRUNKs

2

Access up to 24 VC-3s or 126 VC-12s + 18 VC-3s or 63 VC-12s + 21 VC-3s 16

High level data link control (HDLC) Encapsulation format

Link access procedure-SDH (LAPS) Generic Framing Procedure-Frame Mapped (GFP-F)


622 Mbit/s

4

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Board

7 Data Processing Boards EGT2

EFT8

EFT4

Mapping mode

VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-Xv, and VC-4-Xv

VC-3, VC-12, VC-12-Xv (X ≤63) and VC-3-Xv (X ≤3)

VC-3, VC-12, VC-12-Xv (X ≤63) and VC-3-Xv (X ≤3)

CAR

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Flow control

GE port based IEEE 802.3X complaint flow control

FE port based IEEE 802.3X complaint flow control

FE port based IEEE 802.3X complaint flow control

Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)

ITU-T G.7042, supporting dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and bandwidth protection.

Link stat pass through (LPT)

Support LPT, which can be enabled or disabled.

Testing frame

Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.

Ethernet performance monitoring

Support port level Ethernet performance monitoring.

Alarm and performance

Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment management and maintenance.

Function

7.1.2 Principle The working principle of the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT4 is the same, except that GE signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-1 takes a GE signal as an example to introduce the working principle of the EGT2.



7 Data Processing Boards Backplane

1000 M

Interface module

Service processing module

Encapsulation module

Mapping module

Crossconnect unit

1000 M

Control and communication module

SCC unit

+3.3 V (standby) +1.5 V +1.8 V +2.5 V +3.3 V

Power module

-48 V

Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2


The interface module accesses 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals from external Ethernet equipment (such as LAN switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. Then it sends signals to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy code (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. At the encapsulation module, HDLC, LAPS or GFP-F encapsulation is done to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services are mapped into VC-3 or VC-4 at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit. 2. In Transmit Direction

Demap the VC-3 or VC-4 signals from the cross-connect unit and send them to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines the route according to the level of the equipment; it also provides frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics. Finally, the interface module performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding to the signals and then sends them out from the Ethernet interface. 3. Auxiliary Units


Implement communication, control and service configuration functions.

Power module

Provide DC power supply of various voltages for the board.

7.1.3 Front Panel The front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 is shown in Figure 7-2.




EGT2

EFT8

STAT ACT PROG SRV

ETF8

EFF8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STAT ACT PROG SRV

LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2

LINK ACT

OUT1 IN1

FE1

FE2 FE3 FE1

IN2

FE2

OUT2

FE4

FE5

FE3

FE6

FE4

FE7 FE5 FE6

FE8

EFT4 STAT ACT PROG SRV

FE2

FE7

FE1

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8


FE3

FE8

FE4

EGT2

EGT2

EFT8

EFT8

ETF8

EFF8

ETF8

EFF8

EFT4

Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT4.





For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. Except the above common indicators, the EGT2 has other four indicators to show port connection status. Table 7-2 shows the indicators description.




Table 7-2 Indicators of the EGT2

Indicator

Status

Description

Connection indicator–LINK1 (green)

On

GE port 1 connects with remote equipment successfully

Off

GE port 1 fails to connects with remote equipment

Flashing

GE port 1 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data

Off

GE port 1 and remote equipment do not receive/send data

On

GE port 2 connects with remote equipment successfully

Off

GE port 2 fails to connects with remote equipment

Flashing

GE port 2 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data

Off

GE port 2 and remote equipment do not receive/send data

Data receiving/sending indicator–ACT1 (orange) Connection indicator–LINK2 (green) Data receiving/sending indicator–ACT2 (orange)

Each Ethernet port of the EFT8, EFT4 and ETF8 has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators near the port. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those in Table 7-2. Each Ethernet port on the front panel of the EFF8 has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators. Table 7-3 shows the indicator description. Table 7-3 Indicators of the EFF8

Indicator

Status

Description

Connection indicator–LINK (green)

On

Fiber-port connection succeeded.

Off

Fiber-port connection failed

Flashing

Receiving/Sending data

Off

No data received/sent

Data receiving/sending indicator–ACT (orange)

2. Interfaces

Table 7-4 shows the interface description of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8. Table 7-4 Interfaces of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

Board

EGT2

EFT8

EFT4

EFF8

ETF8

Number of interfaces

2 pairs

8

4

8

8

Access capacity

2 x GE

8 x FE

4 x FE

Interface board

Interface board

Connector

LC

RJ-45

RJ-45

LC

RJ-45

Item



Item

7 Data Processing Boards Board


EGT2

EFT8

EFT4

EFF8

ETF8

Supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

7.1.4 Parameter Configuration The parameters required by the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 are as follows:

J1

It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. The J1 byte is set to “HuaWei SBS” by default.

C2

It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4.

Ethernet interface setting

Table 7-5 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4. Table 7-5 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2/EFT8/EFT4

Parameter

Description

Working mode

The EGT2 can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The EFT8/EFT4 can be set to auto-negotiation or 10/100 Mbit/s half-duplex or 10/100 Mbit/s full-duplex. Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost or the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.

LCAS enable

Enable LCAS or not.

Maximum packet length

Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.

Mapping protocol

Available protocols: HDLC, LAPS and GFP-F. It is preferable to select the default – GFP-F.

7.1.5 Version Description The EGT2 and EFT8 have N1 version only. The EGT2 and EFT8 are applicable to the OptiX the OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, or OptiX OSN1500 (A and B). The EFT4, seated in the half-height slot, has R1 version only. The EFT4 is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN1500 (A and B). The EFF8 and ETF8 interface boards have N1 version only. The EFF8 and ETF8 are Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-8



applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, or OptiX OSN1500 (B).

7.1.6 Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 are shown in Table 7-6. Table 7-6 Technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

Parameter

Description EGT2

EFT8

EFT4

ETF8/EFF8

Bit rate

1000 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

Processing capacity

2 x GE

16 x FE

4 x FE

8 x FE E/O interface board

Line code pattern

NRZ

Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s)

Connector

LC (SFP)

RJ-45

RJ-45

Interface specifications

IEEE 802.3z compliant

IEEE 802.3u compliant



Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

Weight (kg)

0.9

1.01

0.53


23

26

14

Optical module type

1000Bas e-SX

1000Bas e-LX

1000Bas e-ZX

1000Bas e-ZX

100BaseFX

100Ba se-FX

Central wavelength (nm)

850

1310

1270–13 55

1480–15 80

1270–13 80

1261–1 360


0–0.55

0–10

40

70

2

15


–9.5 to –4

–11.5 to –3

–2 to –5

–23

–19 to –14

–15 to –8

Optical receiver sensitivity (dBm)

–17

–19

–4 to –2

–22

–30

–32


Temperature: 0°C to 45°C Humidity: 10%–90%


E: RJ-45 O: LC

EFT8: 0.37 EFF8: 0.44 EFT8: 2 EFF8: 6

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Parameter

7 Data Processing Boards Description EGT2

EFT8







EFT4

ETF8/EFF8

Humidity: 5%–95%



Note: The EFT8 has no optical interface. The 100 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EFF8. The 1000 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EGT2.




7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8

The EGS2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet processing board with L2 switching.

The EFS4 is a 4-port FE processing board with L2 switching.

The EFS0 is a FE processing board with L2 switching.

The ETF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board.

The EFF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board.

The ETS8 is an 8-port 10/100M BaseT Ethernet interface switching board.

The Ethernet switching boards are responsible for transparent transmission, convergence and Layer 2 switching of GE/FE services. Table 7-7 shows the slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8 in OptiX OSN products. Table 7-7 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8

OptiX OSN product

EGS2 (Note 1)

EFS4 (Note 1)

EFS0 (Note 1)

ETS8

EFF8/ETF8


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 2–5, 13–16

Slots 21, 33

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 2–5, 13–16

Slots 21, 33

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 6–7, 12–13

Slots 1, 3, 15, 17

Slots 1, 3, 15, 17

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

Slots 12–13

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

Slots 11–13

Slots 12–13

Slots 14

Slots 14, 16

Note 1: The EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 supports bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically according to the capacity of the slot they are seated in.




7.2.1 Functionality EFS4

EFS0

EGS2 (Note 1)

Basic function

Access and process 4 FE signals

Process 8 FE signals

Access and process 2 GE signals

Used with an interface board

-

Used with ETF8, the EFS0 can access 8 electrical FE signals;

-

Function

Board

Used with EFF8, the EFS0 can access 8 optical FE signals; Used with ETS8, the EFS0 can provide TPS protection for 8 electrical FE signals Interface specifications

10Base-T/100Bas e-TX, compliant with IEEE802.3u

Used with ETF8, the EFS0 supports 10Base-T/100Base-T X; Used with EFF8 to support 100Base-FX; compliant with IEEE802.3u

1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface; supporting auto-negotiation function and compliant with IEEE802.3z; Adopt hot-swappable SFP optical interface to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber (or use 40 km and 70 km optical modules according to the actual condition).


Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG, supporting 64Byte–9600Byte frame, supporting 9600Byte Jumbo frame.


622 Mbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

2.5 Gbit/s

Number of VCTRUNKs

24

24

48

Mapping mode

VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv

VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv

VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv

Encapsulation format

GFP-F

GFP-F

GFP-F

Ethernet Private Line (EPL)

Support Port based transparent transmission and Port+VLAN based virtual private line service.



Function


Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL)

EFS4

EFS0

EGS2 (Note 1)

Support EVPL, with service frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG or Multi-protocol Label Switch (MPLS) MartiniOE. Support port or port+ VLAN based MPLS encapsulation and forward.

Ethernet Private LAN (EPLAN)

Support Layer 2 based convergence and point-to-multipoint convergence; Support Layer 2 switching, including local switching and SDH-side switching; Support self-learning of source medium access control (MAC) address. The MAC address table is 16 k and the MAC address aging time can be set and queried through T2000; support configuration of static MAC route; Support virtual bridge (VB)+VLAN based data isolation; Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum number of VBs is 32 and that of logic ports is 16 for each VB

Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN)

Support EVPLAN, in MPLS Martini OE, MPLS MartiniOP and stack VLAN frame encapsulation format.

MPLS

Supported

Supported

Supported

Virtual local area network (VLAN)

IEEE 802.1q/p

IEEE 802.1q/p

IEEE 802.1q/p

VLAN convergence

4000 VLANs

4000 VLANs

4000 VLANs

Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)

Support broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, compliant with IEEE 802.1w.

IGMP Snooping

Supported

CAR

Port based or port+VLAN based, with the granularity being 64 kbit/s.

Board protection

Support 1+1 backup

Traffic classification

Support port based or port+VLAN based traffic classification.

LCAS (Note 1)

ITU-T G.7042, achieving dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and bandwidth protection

LPT

Support LPT, which can be enabled or disabled.

Flow control

Port based IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control

Testing frame

Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.

Loopback

Support inloop at Ethernet port (PHY layer or MAC layer).

Supported

Supported

Support inloop and outloop at VC3 level. Ethernet performance monitoring




Function


Alarm and performance event

EFS4

EFS0

EGS2 (Note 1)


Note 1: N1EGS2 does not support LCAS function, N2EGS2 supports LCAS function.

7.2.2 Principle The working principle of the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 is the same, except that GE signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-3 shows the functional block diagram of the EGS2 (one GE signal is taken as an example). Backplane

1000 M

1000 M

Interface processing module

Service processing module

Cross-connect unit Encapsulation module

Mapping module Cross-connect unit


SCC

+3.3 V （Standby） +5 V +2.7 V +3.3 V

Power module

-48 V

Figure 7-3 Functional block diagram of the EGS2


The interface processing module accesses 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals from external Ethernet equipments (such as Ethernet switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. Then, the signals are sent to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy code (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. In addition, traffic classification is performed according to the service type and configuration requirement (message formats MPLS, Layer 2 MPLS VPN and Ethernet/VLAN are supported), and Tunnel and VC double labels are added according to the service for mapping and transfer. At the encapsulation module, the GFP-F encapsulation is performed to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services are mapped into VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit. 2. In Transmit Direction

The VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 signals from the cross-connect unit are demapped and sent Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-14



to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines the route according to the level of the equipment, and performs traffic classification according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also, frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics are performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signals are sent out from the Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at interface processing module. 3. Auxiliary Units



Power module


7.2.3 Front Panel The front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 is shown in Figure 7-4. EGS2 STAT ACT PROG SRV

EFS0

EFS4

STAT ACT PROG SRV

LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2

ETS8

STAT ACT PROG SRV


OUT1 IN1

FE1 FE1

IN2

FE2

OUT2

FE3

FE2

FE4 FE5

FE3

FE6 FE7

EGS2

EGS2

EFS0

EFS4

EFS0

EFS4

FE8

FE4

ETS8

ETS8

Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8




1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0.





For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. Except the above common indicators, the EGS2 has other four indicators to show port connection. Table 7-8 shows the description of the indicators on the EGS2. Table 7-8 Indicators of the EGS2

Indicator

Status

Description


On

GE port 1 connects with remote equipment successfully.

Off

GE port 1 fails to connect with remote equipment.

Flashing

GE port 1 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data.

Off

GE port 1 and remote equipment do not receive/send data.

On


Off


Flashing


Off



Each Ethernet port of the EFS4, EFS0 and ETS8 has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those of the EGS2. For indicator description of the interface board, see section 7.1.3. 2. Interfaces

Table 7-9 shows the interface description of EGS2, EFS4, EFS0, and ETS8. Table 7-9 Interfaces of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8

EGS2

EFS4

EFS0

ETS8


2 pairs

4 pairs

0

8 pairs

Processing capacity

2 x GE

4 x FE

8 x FE

Ethernet interface switching board

Connector

LC

RJ-45

None

RJ-45

Item

Board



Item



EGS2

EFS4

EFS0

ETS8

Supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

7.2.4 Protection Configuration The EFS0 is used with the ETS8 and TSB8 to implement 1:1 TPS protection for FE electrical services. Table 7-10 shows the TPS protection of the EFS0. Table 7-10 TPS protection of the EFS0

OptiX OSN product

TPS protection

Configuration


Support two groups of 1:1 TPS.

The board in slot 2 protects the board in slot 3. The board in slot 16 protects the board in slot 15.


Support one group of 1:1 TPS.

The board in slot 13 protects the board in slot 12.

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

-

OptiX OSN 1500A

Not supported

-

OptiX OSN 1500B

Support one group of 1:1 TPS.

The board in slot 12 protects the board in slot 13.


The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 3500 is shown in Figure 7-5.




S L O T 5

S L O T 6

S L O T 7

S L O T 8

S L O T 10

FAN S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 SCC Protection 2 Working 2

Working 1 Protection 1

S L O T 9

XCS

S L O T 4

XCS

S L O T 3

PIU

S L O T 2

S L O T 37 AUX

PIU

S L O T 1

FAN

TSB8

TSB8

FAN

S S S SS SS S L L L LL LL L O O O OO OO O T T T TT TT T 2930313233343536 ETS8

S S L L O O T T 27 28

ETS8


Fiber routing

Figure 7-5 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 3500

In Figure 7-5, slot 2 protects slot 3, and slot 16 protects slot 15. The slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 is shown in Table 7-11. Table 7-11 Slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500

Board

Protection group 1

Protection group 2

EFS0 (protect board)

Slot 2

Slot 16

EFS0 (working board)

Slot 3

Slot 15

TSB8

Slot 19

Slot 35

ETS8

Slot 21

Slot 33


The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 2500 is shown in Figure 7-6.



S L O T 13

S L O T 14

S L O T 15

SAP

ETS8

S L O T 16

S L O T 17

S L O T 18

TSB8

S L O T 12

EFS0(P)

S L O T 11

CXL16

CXL16


EFS0(W)



FAN (Slot 24)

FAN (Slot 25)

PIU (Slot 23)

Figure 7-6 Board configuration upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 2500

Slot 13 protects slot 12. The ETS8 seated in slot 15 is used with the working EFS0 and the TSB8 seated in slot 17 is used with the protect EFS0. 3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500 B

The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 1500B is shown in Figure 7-7. Slot 14

TSB8

Slot 15 Slot 16

ETS8

Slot 17

Slot 20 FAN

Slot 18

PIU

Slot 19

PIU

Slot 1

Slot 11

Slot 6

Slot 2

Slot 12

EFS0 (P)

Slot 7

Slot 3

Slot 13

EFS0 (W)

Slot 8

Slot 4

CXL16/4/1

Slot 9

EOW

Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

Slot 10

AUX

Figure 7-7 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OSN 1500

Slot 12 protects slot 13. The ETS8 seated in slot 16 is used with the working EFS0 and the TSB8 seated in slot 14 is used with the protect EFS0.

7.2.5 Parameter Configuration The major parameters required by the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 are as follows:

J1


C2






Table 7-12 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0. Table 7-12 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0

Parameter

Description

Tag flag

Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG flags are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. (1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets with the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag flag. (2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to the packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards those with the Tag flag. (3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets without the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.

VLAN ID

VLAN ID of the port.

Working mode

The EGS2 can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The EFS4 and EFS0 can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full duplex, 100 Mbit/s half duplex or 100 Mbit/s full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost and the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.

Port type

There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal port of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of the service provider. Port type is needed when configuring EVPL and EVPLAN services.

LCAS enable

Enable LCAS or not.



Mapping protocol

It is preferable to select the default – GFP-F mapping protocol.

7.2.6 Version Description The EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 have two versions: N1 and N2. N1 is the basic one. In this version, the uplink bandwidth at the SDH side is half that in N2 version. The functions and parameters of N2 version are listed in this section. Table 7-13 shows the version description of the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0.




Table 7-13 N1 and N2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 boards

Item

Description

Similarity

The working principle and functions of N1 and N2 boards are the same. In N1 version, the uplink bandwidth at the SDH side is half that in N2 version.

Difference

The N1EFSO and the N2EFSO boards are the same in hardware and are different in software. The hardware of the N1EGS2 is different from that of the N2EGS2. The N1EGS2 board does not support LCAS, LPT, RSTP, IGMP Snooping, MPLS (including QinQ), link aggregation (802.3ad), and port rate query function.

NM support

The T2000 differentiates N1 from N2. V100R001 products only support N1 Ethernet processing boards. If N2 boards are inserted, the T2000 takes the board as N1 version by default and uses the boards as N1 boards.

Product support

V100R002 products support N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards. When the T2000 uploads board configuration, all Ethernet processing boards (N1 or N2) are displayed as N1 boards by default. At this time, the boards are used as N1 boards. If you need to use N2 boards, select and configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to N2 software. V100R003 products support N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards. When the T2000 uploads board configuration, all Ethernet processing boards (N1 or N2) are displayed as N1 boards by default. At this time, the boards are used as N1 boards. If you need to use N2 boards, select and configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to N2 software. For any product version, the board software can be upgraded from N1 to N2.

Replacement

The N1 boards are only used as N1 boards. For V100R002 and V100R003 products, N2 boards can be used as either N1 boards (displayed as N1 boards on the T2000) or N2 boards (displayed as N2 boards on the T2000). When N2 boards are used as N1 boards, the boards can be upgraded to N2 boards by deleting the original board and adding an N2 board. During the upgrade, services will be interrupted.

The EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B). The ETS8 has only one version. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500B.

7.2.7 Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 are shown in Table 7-14.




Table 7-14 Technical parameters of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8

Parameter

Description EGS2

EFS4

Bit rate

1000 Mbit/s

100 Mbit/s

Access capacity

2 x GE

Processing capacity

EFS0

ETS8

4 x FE

0

8 x FE Ethernet interface switching board

2 x GE

4 x FE

8 x FE

0

Line code pattern

NRZ

Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s)

Connector

LC (SFP)

RJ-45

None

RJ-45

Interface impedance

-

100 ohm

-

100 ohm


IEEE 802.3z compliant


Optical module type

1000Base-SX

1000Base-LX

1000Base-ZX

1000Base-ZX


850

1310

1270–1355

1480–1580


0–0.55

0–10

40

70


–9.5 to –4

–11.5 to –3

–2 to 5

–23


–17

–19

–4 to 2

–22

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

Weight (kg)

1.04

0.98

0.98

0.37


40/43.2

30

35

2.5





Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Parameter

7 Data Processing Boards Description EGS2

EFS4





EFS0



Note: The 1000 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EGS2.


ETS8



7.3 EMR0/EGR2

The EMR0 is a 12 FE + 1 GE Ethernet board with RPR function.

The EGR2 is a 2-port GE processing board with RPR function.

The EMR0 and EGR2 are responsible for accessing and processing Ethernet signals, and constructing resilient packet ring (RPR). Table 7-15 shows the slots for the EMR0 and EGR2 in OptiX OSN products. Table 7-15 Slots for the EMR0 and EGR2

Product

EMR0 (led out from front panel)

EMR0 (used with interface board)

EGR2


Slots 1–6, 13–16

Slots 2–3, 13–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16


Slots 1–6, 13–16

Slots 2–3, 13–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 6–7, 12–13

Slots 5–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

Not supported

Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

Slots 12–13

Slots 11–13

Note: The EMR0 and EGR2 support bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically according to the capacity of the slot they are seated in.

Note: For the OptiX OSN 3500, if SDH cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 6–8 and slots 11–13 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 622 Mbit/s. If the SDH cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 5–8 and slots 11–14 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 1.25 Gbit/s. For the OptiX OSN 2500, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 5–6 is 622 Mbit/s, that of slots 7, 8, 11, 12 is 2.5 Gbit/s, and that of slot 13 is 1.25 Gbit/s.


Board

Basic function

EMR0

EGR2

Process 12 FE signals and 1 GE signals.

Access and process 2 GE signals.

Support RPR.

Support RPR.



Function


Used with interface board

EMR0

EGR2

Provide 4 FE ports and 1 GE port.

-

Used with the ETF8, the EMR0 can access 12 electrical FE signals. Used with the EFF8, the EMR0 can access 8 optical FE signals.


Used with the ETF8, the EMR0 supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX over a transmission distance of up to 100 m. Used with the EFF8, the EMR0 supports 100Base-FX. Comply with IEEE802.3u.

1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface, supporting auto-negotiation and compliant with IEEE802.3z. Adopt hot-swappable SFP optical interface to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber (or use 40 km and 70 km optical modules according to the actual condition).


MPLS, supporting 64Byte–9600Byte frame and 9600Byte Jumbo frame


2.5 Gbit/s

Mapping mode

VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-Xv (X≤8)


GFP-F: compliant with ITU-T G.7041

Ethernet private line (EPL)

Support port-base transparent transmission and port+VLAN virtual private line service.

Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)

Support EVPL with service frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG or Multi-protocol label switch (MPLS) Martini frame.

2.5 Gbit/s

LAPS: compliant with ITU-T X.86

Support port-based or port+VLAN-based MPLS encapsulation and forward; Support five types of label switch path (LSP): ingress LSP, egress LSP, transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR transit LSP. Support 2000 LSPs.



Function


Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN)

EMR0

EGR2

Support EVPLAN service in stack VLAN or Martini frame encapsulation format. Support self-learning of MAC address. The MAC address table has 64,000 entries k and the MAC address aging time can be set and queried through T2000. Support configuration of up to 4000 static MAC routes. Support virtual bridge (VB)+VLAN based data isolation. Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum number of VBs is 16 and that of logic ports is 32 for each VB.

MPLS

Support MPLS frame format to construct EVPL and EVPLAN services. Support 4000 MPLS labels.

Virtual local area network (VLAN)

IEEE 802.1q/p

IEEE 802.1q/p

VLAN convergence

Support 4000 VLANs.

Support 4000 VLANs.

VLAN switching

Support VLAN tag switching.

Support VLAN tag switching.

Port aggregation

Support the aggregation of up to 12 FE ports.

-

RPR feature

Supported and compliant with IEEE 802.17.

Supported and compliant with IEEE 802.17.

RPR function

Support up to 255 nodes and destination node stripping. Support weighted fair algorithm. Support fiver priority levels: A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR and C. Provide auto discovery of topology to show the network status in real time. Support protection modes of steering, wrapping and wrapping + steering. The signal fail time is less than 50ms. Support configuring service route on RPRs manually. Support self-learning function, that is, learning the correspondence between MAC address and node number.

Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)

Support broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, compliant with IEEE 802.1w.

IGMP snooping

Supported

CAR

Port based or port+VLAN based, with the granularity being 64 kbit/s, ranging from 64 kbit/s to 100 Mbit/s. 2000 CARs are supported.

Traffic classification

Support port-based ,port+VLAN and port + VLAN + PRI based traffic classification.




Function

EMR0

EGR2

LCAS

ITU-T G.7042, supporting dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and bandwidth protection.

Flow control

Port based IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control.

Echo test frame

Support the Echo function in RPR OAM which tests the link status.

Loopback

Support inloop at Ethernet port (at PHY layer or MAC layer). Support inloop and outloop at VC-3 level.

Ethernet performance monitoring




7.3.2 Principle The working principle of the EMR0 is the same as that of the EGR2, except that GE signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-8 shows the functional block diagram (one 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s signal is taken as an example). Backplane

10/100 Mbit/s 10/100 Mbit/s

Interface module

Ethernet processing module

RPR processing module

Encapsulation and mapping module

Communication and control module


SCC unit

+3.3 V (standby) +5 V +2.7 V +3.3 V

Power module

-48 V

Figure 7-8 Functional block diagram of the EMR0


The interface processing module accesses a 10/100Base-TX/100Base-FX signal from external Ethernet equipment (such as the Ethernet switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signal. Then, the signal is sent to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. In Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-27



addition, traffic classification, Layer 2 switching, convergence, MPLS frame processing, RPR inner ring and outer ring mapping are performed according to service type and configuration requirement. The RPR processing module performs IEEE 802.17 based ring network control function. In the encapsulation module, LAPS or GFP-F encapsulation of Ethernet frame is completed. Finally, the signal is mapped into VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit. 2. In Transmit Direction

The VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv signal from the cross-connect unit is demapped and sent to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. In the RPR processing module, IEEE 802.17 based ring network control function is performed. The service processing module determines the route according to the level of the equipment, and performs traffic classification according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also, frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics are performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signal is sent out from the Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at the interface processing module. 3. Auxiliary Units



Power module


7.3.3 Front Panel Figure 7-9 shows the front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2.



EMR0 STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK ACT


EGR2 STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

OUT1 OUT1

IN1

IN1

FE1

OUT2 IN2

FE2

FE3

FE4

EMR0

EGR2

EMR0

EGR2

Figure 7-9 Front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2

1. Indicators

The EGR2 has six board indicators and the EMR0 has eight board indicators as follows:





Connection indicator (LINK1/2) – green

Data receiving/sending indicator (ACT1/2) – orange

For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. The four indicators of the EGR2 indicating port connection are described in Table 7-16. The LINK and ACT indicators on the EMR0 indicating GE optical interface connection status, as described in Table 7-16.




Table 7-16 Indicators of the EGR2

Indicator

Status

Description


On


Off


Flashing


Off


On


Off


Flashing


Off



Each FE port on the front panel of the EMR0 also has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those of the EGR2. 2. Interfaces

Table 7-17 shows the interface description of the EMR0 and EGR2. Table 7-17 Interfaces of EMR0 and EGR2

Board

Item


EMR0

EGR2

1 pair of GE optical interfaces + 4 FE electrical interfaces

2 pairs of GE optical interfaces

GE: LC (SFP)

Connector

FE: R-J45


Supported

GE: LC (SFP) Supported

7.3.4 Parameter Configuration The parameters required by the EMR0 and EGR2 are as follows:

J1

It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. The J1 byte is set to “HuaWei SBS” by default. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-30



C2



Table 7-18 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2. Table 7-18 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2

Parameter

Description

Tag flag

Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG flags are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. (1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets with the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag flag. (2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to the packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards those with the Tag flag. (3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets without the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.

VLAN ID

Set VLAN ID for external port only.

Working mode

The GE interface can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The FE interface can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full duplex, 100 Mbit/s half duplex or 100 Mbit/s full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work in the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost, or the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.

Port type

There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal port of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of the service provider. Set the external port to PE and internal port to P.


Multiple encapsulation formats are available: MartinioE, CCCoE, stack VLAN, and MartinioP. This attribute takes effective for a P port. MartinioE is applicable for point-to-multipoint Ethernet connection, MartinioP for point-to-point Ethernet connection and stack VLAN for EVPLAN service.

Enable LCAS

Enable LCAS or not



Mapping protocol

LAPS and GFP-F are available. GFP-F is recommended.




7.3.5 Version Description The EMR0 and EGR2 boards have N1 version and N2 version. N1 version is the basic version. N2 version is the enhanced version, having some new functions compared with N1 version. The functions and parameters listed in this section are applicable to the boards of N2 version. Table 7-19 gives the version description of the two versions. Table 7-19 Version description of the EMR0 and the EGR2

Item

Description

Similarity

The two versions are similar in the working principle and basic function. N2 version provides some new functions besides all functions of N1 version.

Difference

N1 version

N2 version

–

Support the aggregation of up to 12 FE ports.

–

Support the replacement of the VLAN tag in Ethernet data.

Support EVPLAN services, using stack VLAN encapsulation format.

Support EVPLAN services, using MPLS Martini encapsulation format.

Support the MAC address with 16,000 entries.

Support the MAC address with 64,000 entries.

Support the creating, deleting and query of VB. There can be 32 VBs and 16 logic ports for each VB at most.

Support the creating, deleting and query of VB. There can be 16 VBs and 32 logic ports for each VB at most.

–

Support configuring service routes on RPR manually.

–

Support the Echo function in RPR OAM which tests the link status.

NM support

The T2000 distinguish the boards of N1 version and that of N2 version directly.

Product support

The V100R001 product only supports the RPR board of N1 version. The V100R002 product supports the RPR board of N1 or N2 version. The V100R003 product supports the Ethernet board of N1 or N2 version.

Replacement

Boards of N1 version can only be used as boards of N1 version. To the V100R002 or V100R003 product, boards of N2 version can replace the ones of N1 version.

The EMR0 and the EGR2 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).




7.3.6 Technical Parameters Table 7-20 shows the technical parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2. For the parameters of GE and FE optical interface, refer to Table 7-14. Table 7-20 Technical Parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2

Board

Parameter Bit rate

EMR0

EGR2

10/100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s

1000 Mbit/s

4 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s; Access capacity

12 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s when used with ETF8 or EFF8

2 x 1000 Mbit/s

Processing capacity

12 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s

2 x 1000 Mbit/s

Line code pattern

Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s), NRZ

NRZ

Connector

RJ-45, LC (SFP)

LC (SFP)

Interface impedance

100 ohm

–


FE interface comply with IEEE802.3u and GE interface comply with IEEE802.3z

IEEE802.3z compliant

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

Weight (kg)

1.20

1.10


50

54




Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 10%–90%




Humidity: 5%–95%

Humidity: 5%–95%









Humidity: 10%–100% Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%



7.4 ADL4/ADQ1 The ADL4 is a 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board. The ADQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 ATM service processing board. The ADL4 and ADQ1 are responsible for accessing and processing ATM service. Table 7-21 shows the slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1 in OptiX OSN products. Table 7-21 Slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1

Product

ADL4

ADQ1


Slots 1–8, 11–17

Slots 1–8, 11–17


Slots 6–8, 11–13

Slots 6–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 7–8, 11–13

Slots 7–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

Slots 11–13

7.4.1 Functionality ADL4

ADQ1

Basic function

Access and process 1 STM-4 ATM signal.


Optical Interface specifications

Support S-4.1, L-4.1.

Support I-1, S-1.1, and L-1.1.

Connector

Hot-swappable LC (SFP)


E3 ATM interface

12 × E3, inserted through PD3/PL3

12 × E3, inserted through PD3/PL3


8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4

8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4

ATM switching capacity

1.2 Gbit/s

1.2 Gbit/s

Mapping mode

VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=1–4)


Service type

CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR


ATM connection

8000

8000

Statistics multiplexing

Supported

Supported

Traffic type and QoS

IETF RFC2514

IETF RFC2514

ATM multicast connection

Spacial multicast, logic multicast


Function

Board



7 Data Processing Boards ADL4

ADQ1

ATM protection (ITU-T I.630)

Unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1 and 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring


Board protection

Support 1+1 backup

Support 1+1 backup

OAM function (ITU-T I.610)

AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (continuity check)

AIS, RDI, LB, CC

Maintenance

Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM layer level for maintenance and fault localization.

Alarm and performance

Provide abundant alarms and performance events for maintenance and fault location.

Function

Board

7.4.2 Principle Figure 7-10 shows the functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1 (one STM-1/STM-4 signal is taken as an example). Backplane

STM-1/STM-4

STM-1/STM-4

Physical layer processing module

ATM service processing module

Mapping module



SCC

+3.3 V(Standby) +5 V

Power module

+3.3 V

-48 V

Figure 7-10 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1


The STM-1/STM-4 signal accessed from the optical interface is sent to the physical layer processing module after O/E conversion. After recovering data and clock, the physical layer processing module performs SDH functions such as framing, descrambling, overhead processing and pointer processing. In addition, it performs the functions of ATM cell delimitation, descrambling and filtering. The ATM service processing module establishes or disconnects connection for ATM service, and sends ATM service to the mapping module after parameter configuration. The mapping Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-35



module maps ATM service to VC3, VC4 and VC4-Xv, and finally sends the service to the cross-connect unit. 2. In Transmit Direction

The VC-3 (E3), VC-4 or VC4-Xv signal from the cross-connect unit is sent to the mapping module for demapping, and then to the ATM service processing module for establishing or disconnecting connection as well as configuring parameters. The uplink service is sent to the mapping module after being processed by the ATM service processing module, and then sent to the cross-connect unit. The downlink service is directly sent to the physical layer processing module for service rate matching, insertion of idle cell, and cell descrambling, and then for SDH mapping, overhead insertion, multiplexing and scrambling. Finally, the signal is sent out after E/O conversion. 3. Auxiliary Units



Power module


7.4.3 Front Panel Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1.l



ADL4 STAT ACT PROG SRV


ADQ1 STAT ACT PROG SRV



OUT1 IN1

OUT1 IN1


ADL4

ADL4

ADQ1

ADQ1

Figure 7-11 Front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the ADL4 and ADQ1.






Number of optical interfaces: The ADL4 has one pair and the ADQ1 has four pairs of optical interfaces. Optical interface type: LC Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The ADL4 and ADQ1 use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-37



7.4.4 Protection Configuration The ADL4 and ADQ1 support 1+1 board level protection. The 1+1 board level protection for the ADL4 and the ADQ1 requires the working and protection ADL4/ADQ1 boards. The working and protection boards do not require seating in paired slots.

7.4.5 Parameter Configuration The parameters required by the ADL4 and ADQ1 are as follows:

J1


C2


ATM interface setting

Table 7-22 lists the major parameters to be set for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1. Table 7-22 Parameters for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1

Parameter

Description

Port type

NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value.

Traffic type

Set according to the port.

Service type

CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR

Peak cell rate (PCR)

Set the parameter for all types of services.

Sustainable cell rate (SCR)

Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.

Maximum cell burst size


Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)

Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or UBR.




7.4.6 Version Description The ADL4 and ADQ1 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).

7.4.7 Technical Parameters Table 7-23 shows the technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1. Table 7-23 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1

Parameter

Description ADL4

ADQ1

Bit rate

622080 kbit/s

155520 kbit/s

Access capacity

1 x STM-4

4 x STM-1

ATM processing capacity

1.2 Gbit/s

Line code pattern

NRZ

Connector

LC (SFP)

Dimensions (nm)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

W

Weight (kg)

0.9

0.95


35

37

Optical module type

S-4.1

L-4.1

I-1

S-1.1

L-1.1

Wavelength (nm)

1310

1310

1310

1310

1310

Transmission distance

2–15

15–40

2–15

2–15

15–40


–15 to –8

–3 to 2

–15 to –8

–15 to –8

–5 to 0


–28

–28

–23

–28

–34


–8

–8

–8

–8

–10







Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%





Parameter

Description ADL4


ADQ1


7.5 IDL4/IDQ1 The IDL4 is a 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board with IMA. The IDQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 ATM service processing board with IMA. The IDL4 and IDQ1 can access and process 63×E1 inverse multiplexing ATM (IMA) services if used with the E1 service processing board. Table 7-24 shows the slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1. Table 7-24 Slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1

Product

IDL4

IDQ1


Slots 1–8, 11–17

Slots 1–8, 11–17


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 5–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

Slots 11–13

7.5.1 Functionality IDL4

IDQ1

Basic function




Support S-4.1, L-4.1.

Support I-1, S-1.1, and L-1.1.

Connector



E3 ATM interface

12 x E3, inserted through PD3/PL3

12 x E3, inserted through PD3/PL3


8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4

8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4

ATM switching capacity

1.2 Gbit/s

1.2 Gbit/s

Mapping mode



Function

Board



Function


IMA feature

IDL4

IDQ1

Access and process IMA service when used with the E1 service processing board. Process 63 x E1 IMA services. Support up to 32 IMA groups, 1–32 E1 for each group. The maximum multipath delay is 226ms.

Service type


ATM connection

8000

Statistics multiplexing

Supported

Traffic type and QoS

IETF RFC2514

ATM multicast connection


ATM protection (ITU-T I.630)


Board protection

Support 1+1 backup

OAM function (ITU-T I.610)

AIS, RDI,loopback (LB),continuity check (CC)

Maintenance

Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM layer level for maintenance and fault localization



7.5.2 Principle The working principle of the IDL4 and IDQ1 is similar to that of the ADL4 and ADQ1, except that IMA processing is added to the ATM processing module. For the workings of the IDL4 and IDQ1, refer to Figure 7-10.

7.5.3 Front Panel Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1.l



IDL4 STAT ACT PROG SRV


IDQ1 STAT ACT PROG SRV



OUT1 IN1

OUT1 IN1


IDL4

IDL4

IDQ1

IDQ1

Figure 7-12 Front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the IDL4 and IDQ1.






Number of optical interfaces: The IDL4 has one pair and the IDQ1 has four pairs of optical interfaces. Optical interface type: LC Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The IDL4 and IDQ1 use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.




7.5.4 Protection Configuration The IDL4 and IDQ1 support 1+1 board level protection. The working and protection IDL4/IDQ1 boards should seat in paired slots. Table 7-25 lists the paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1. Table 7-25 Paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1

Product

Paired slots


(8&11), (7&12), (6&13), (5&14), (4&15), (3&16), (2&17)


(8&11), (7&12), (6&13), (5&14), (4&15), (3&16)

OptiX OSN 2500

(8&11), (7&12)

OptiX OSN 1500A

(13&12)

OptiX OSN 1500B

(13&12)

7.5.5 Parameter Configuration The parameters required by the IDL4 and IDQ1 are as follows:

J1


C2


ATM interface setting

Table 7-26 lists the major parameters to be set for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1. Table 7-26 Parameters for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1

Parameter

Description

Port type

NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value.

Traffic type

Set according to the port.

Service type

CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR

Peak cell rate (PCR)

Set the parameter for all types of services.

Sustainable cell rate (SCR)


Maximum cell burst size





Parameter

Description

Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)

Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or UBR.

7.5.6 Version Description The IDL4 and IDQ1 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).

7.5.7 Technical Parameters Table 7-27 shows the technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1. Table 7-27 Technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1

Parameter

Description IDL4

IDQ1

Bit rate

622080 kbit/s

155520 kbit/s

Access capacity

1 x STM-4

4 x STM-1

ATM processing capacity

1.2 Gbit/s

IMA processing capacity

Process 63 E1s (provide 63 PHY addresses), and support 32 IMA groups. Number of E1s within an IMA group is configurable, which can be 1–32. Support configurable IMA frame length. Support IMA1.1 protocol. The maximum multipath delay is 226ms.

Line code pattern

NRZ

Connector

LC (SFP)

Dimensions (nm)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

W

Weight (kg)

1.01

1.01


36.6

36.6

Optical module type

S-4.1

L-4.1

I-1

S-1.1

L-1.1

Wavelength (nm)

1310

1310

1310

1310

1310


2–15

15–40

2–15

2–15

15–40


–15 to –8

–3 to 2

–15 to –8

–15 to –8

–5 to 0


–28

–28

–23

–28

–34




Parameter

Description IDL4

IDQ1


–8

–8

–8









–8

–10

Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%



7.6 MST4 The MST4 is a 4 x multi-service transparent transmission processing board, responsible for accessing and transmitting transparently fiber channel (FC), fiber connection (FICON), enterprise systems connection (ESCON), and digital video broadcast - asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) services. Table 7-28 shows the slots for the MST4. Table 7-28 Slots for the MST4

Product

MST4


Slots 1–8, 11–16


Slots 1–8, 11–16

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13


Board

Basic function

MST4 Provide four independent multi-service access interfaces and support transparent transmission of 4 storage area network (SAN)/video signals.



Function


MST4 Support FC50, FC100/FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI signal. The service types and rates are shown in Table 7-29. Support four-port FC service (FC50, FC100/FICON and FC200), with the total bandwidth not exceeding 2.5 Gbit/s.

Service type

Support transmission of FC service at full rate, that is, transmission of one FC200 or two FC100, or four FC50 services. Support four-port ESCON or DVB-ASI service. Connector


Distance extension function

The first and second interfaces support SDH side distance extension function: FC100 supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km. The first and second interfaces support client side distance extension function: FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km.


The backplane supports the connection of four 622 Mbit/s buses to the cross-connect unit. The total uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.


Support GFP-T encapsulation format in compliance with ITU-T G.7041.

Mapping mode

VC-4-Xc(X=1, 4, 8, 16)

Maintenance

Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level for maintenance and fault localization



Table 7-29 The service types and rates provided by the MST4

Service type

Bit rate

Remarks

FC50

531.25 Mbit/s

Storage area network (SAN)

FC100/FICON

1062.5 Mbit/s

SAN service

FC200

2125 Mbit/s

SAN service

ESCON

200 Mbit/s

SAN service

DVB-ASI

270 Mbit/s

Video service

7.6.2 Principle Figure 7-13 shows the working principle of the MST4.



7 Data Processing Boards Backplane

FC ESCON

ATM service processing module

Interface module

DVB-ASI

FE protocol processin g module

Mapping module


Cross-connect unit

SCC

+3.3 V (Standby) +5 V +2.5 V +3.3 V

Power module

-48 V

Figure 7-13 The functional block diagram of the MST4


The interface processing module accesses the optical signal from external equipment (such as Ethernet switch, router, SAN equipment, or multi-media equipment), decodes the signal after O/E conversion and sends the signal to the encapsulation module for GFP-T encapsulation. The encapsulated signal is sent to the mapping module for mapping to VC-4-Xc or VC-4. And finally sent to the SDH cross-connect unit. If port 1 and port 2 need to implement distance extension function for FC100 and FC200 services, the first and second signal from the interface processing module is sent to the FC protocol processing module, then sent to the encapsulation module and mapping module, and finally sent to the cross-connect unit or DWDM equipment. 2. In Transmit Direction

The VC-4-Xc signal from the cross-connect unit or DWDM equipment is demapped and then sent to the encapsulation module for de-encapsulation. The FC service needing distance extension is sent to the FC protocol processing module. Other services are sent to the interface processing module and then sent out after E/O conversion. 3. Auxiliary Units


It achieves control, communication and service configuration for the board.

Power module

Provide various voltages required by the boards.




7.6.3 Front Panel Figure 7-14 shows the front panel of the MST4. MST4 STAT ACT PROG SRV

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4

MST4

Figure 7-14 The front panel of the MST4

1. Indicator

There are four indicators on the MST4.





For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. 2. Interface

Number of optical interfaces: The MSTE has four pairs of optical interfaces. Optical interface type: LC Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-48



Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The MST4 uses swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.

7.6.4 Parameter Configuration Parameters to be configured for the MST4:

J1

J1 is the path trace byte. The transmit end sends the byte (higher order access point identifier) successively to inform the receive end that the connection between the two ends is normal. Once the receive end detects J1 mismatch, the involved VC-4 path will generate the HP TIM alarm. J1 byte is set as “Huawei SBS” by default.

C2

C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. The C2 bytes transmitted should match with those received, once mismatch is detected, the involved VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4.

7.6.5 Version Description The MST4 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).

7.6.6 Technical Parameters Table 7-30 shows the technical parameters of the MST4. Table 7-30 Technical parameters of the MST4

Parameter

Description

Line code pattern

NRZ

Optical interface type

LC (SFP)

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg)

0.9


40







Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%

Humidity: 10%–100% Environment for




8

8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards

Cross-Connect and System Control Boards This chapter introduces cross-connect and system control boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The technical details cover:

Functionality

Principle

Front panel



Version description


Refer to Table 4-4 for the name and descriptions of the cross-connect and system control boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500.




8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE The GXCS/EXCS/UXCS is the cross-connect and synchronous timing board of the OptiX OSN 3500. The XCE is a lower-order cross-connect and synchronous timing board used for extended subracks. The GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE, seated in slot 9 or 10 on the subrack, implement the functions of cross-connection and system timing. The GXCS is an ordinary cross-connect and synchronous timing board, but the EXCS is an enhanced one, and the UXCS is a super one. The UXCS can also be classified into UXCSA and UXCSB. Table 8-1 shows their differences. Table 8-1 Comparison among GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE.

Cross-connect and timing board

Higher order cross-connect capability

Lower order cross-conne ct capacity

Usage

GXCSA

40 Gbit/s

5 Gbit/s

Used for the main subrack, not supporting the extended subrack.

EXCSA

80 Gbit/s

5 Gbit/s


UXCSA

80 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s


UXCSB

80 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

Used for the main subrack, not supporting the 1.25 Gbit/s extended subrack.

XCE

0 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

Used for the extended subrack.(Note)

Note: The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack is adopted.

8.1.1 Functionality

Support VC-4 unblocked higher order full cross-connect and VC-3 or VC-12 unblocked lower order full cross-connect. For the cross-connect capacity of different boards, see Table 8-1.

Provide flexible service grooming capability, and support loopback, cross-connect, multicast and broadcast services.

Support SNCP protection at VC-3 or VC-12.

The XCE provides 1.25 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect capability and is capable of adding/dropping up to 504 E1s/T1s.

Support such concatenation services as AU4-4C, AU4-8C, AU4-16C, and AU4-64C.

Support 1+1 hot backup, with the protection mode being revertive switching and non-revertive switching.

Support smooth upgrade from GXCS to EXCS or UXCS, with signal failure time less than 50ms.

Support smooth upgrade from EXCS to UXCS, with signal failure time less than 50ms.




Process S1 byte to realize clock protection switching.

Input and output two channels of synchronization clock, with clock signal set to 2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s.

Communicate with other boards.

8.1.2 Principle Here takes the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS board as an example to introduce their working principle, as shown in Figure 8-1. The working principle of the XCE board is little different from that of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS board, only supporting lower order cross-connect. Lower order crossconnect matrix 5 Gbit/s or 20 Gbit/s Higher order crossconnect matrix VC-4

-48 V

Timing unit

40 Gbit/s or 80 Gbit/s

Power module

+3.3 V +5 V +2.7 V

Board and system Clock source

Communication and control unit

Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS

1. Higher Order Cross-Connect Matrix

The GXCS performs 40 Gbit/s space division higher order cross-connect, and the EXCS or UXCS performs 80 Gbit/s space division higher order cross-connect. 2. Lower Order Cross-Connect Matrix

GXCS or EXCS implement 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize unblocked full cross-connect. UXCS implement 20 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize unblocked full cross-connect. They are providing the system with powerful service grooming capability. 3. Timing Unit

Trace the external clock source or internal clock source, providing itself and the system with the synchronization clock source. At the same time, it provides various nodes in the data flow of the system with clock signals appropriate to the frequency and phase, so that the devices at each node can meet the requirements for data setup time and hold time, and provide the system with framing signals for identifying the position of the frame head in the data. 4. Control and Communication Unit

Communicate with the SCC and other boards, and ensure communication with other boards when the SCC is not in position. It also generates various other control signals Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-3



for the GXCS/EXCS and system. 5. Power Module

Provides power supply of various voltages for the board.

8.1.3 Front Panel Figure 8-2 shows the front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS, and XCE.

GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA

UXCSB

XCE

Figure 8-2 Front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE

1. Indicators

There are indicators on the front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE to indicate their working status. The description of the indicators is shown in Table 8-2




Table 8-2 Indicators of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE

Indicator

Color and status

Description

STAT (red or green)

On, green

The board works normally.

On, red

The board hardware fails.

Off

The board is not powered on, or no service is configured.

On

The service is activated.

Off

The service is not activated.

On, green

The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.

On for 100ms and off for 100ms alternatively, green

The board software or software for FPGA is being uploaded.


The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS boot stage.

On, red

The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing.

Off

No power supply.

On, green

Service is normal, and no service alarm occurs.

On, red

A critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow

A minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off

No service is configured.

On, green

The clock works in synchronous status.

On, red

The clock works in hold-over or free-run mode.

ACT (green)

PROG (red or green)

SRV (red, yellow or green)

SYNC (red or green)

2. Interfaces

There are interfaces on the front panel of UXCSB/XCE for connecting extended subrack cables. “EXA” and “EXB” backup each other. Through these two interfaces, the main subrack and the extended subrack can be connected, as shown in Figure 8-3.



AUX

S 1 0

S S S S S S S S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W)

EXB EXA

XCE

S S S S S S S S S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

FAN

XCE

FAN

EXB EXA

FAN

PQ1/PQM (P) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W)

D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S

PIU

PIU

D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S


(1)(2)(3) (4)

Figure 8-3 Configuration of extended subracks (1) The “EXB” interface of the XCE (in slot 9) is connected to the “EXB” of the UXCSB (in slot 9) on the main subrack. (2) The “EXA” interface of the XCE (in slot 9) is connected to the “EXA” of the UXCSB (in slot 9) on the main subrack. (3) The “EXB” interface of the XCE (in slot 10) is connected to the “EXB” of the UXCSB (in slot 10) on the main subrack. (4) The “EXA” interface of the XCE (in slot 10) is connected to the “EXA” of the UXCSB (in slot 10) on the main subrack.

The input/output interface for external clock of the cross-connect and synchronous timing board is on the AUX board. Here only the interface names are given, as shown in Table 8-3. For a detailed description of relevant interfaces, refer to the interface description of the AUX board. Table 8-3 External clock interface of the GXCS, EXCS and UXCS

Interface name

Description

Interface type

CLKO1

75-ohm clock output interface 1

SMB

CLKO2

75-ohm clock output interface 2

SMB

CLKI1

75-ohm clock input interface 1

SMB

CLKI2

75-ohm clock input interface 2

SMB

CLK1

120- ohm clock interface 1

RJ-45

CLK2

120-ohm clock interface 2

RJ-45

8.1.4 Protection Configuration The GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE supports 1+1 protection.




8.1.5 Parameter Configuration The parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE to be set through NM are as follows. 1. When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM) is not Started

Primary reference clock

Trace level of clock source

2. When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started



Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS)

S1 byte

Threshold for clock switching protection

8.1.6 Version Description The GXCSA of the OptiX OSN 3500 has two versions: N1 and N2, as described in Table 8-4. Table 8-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards

Item

Description

Similarity

Board functions and board software are the same.

Difference

Different FPGA program is uploaded due to different hardware.

NM support

The T2000 does not distinguish N1 from N2.

Product support

Each product version (including V100R001, V100R002 and V100R003) supports N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA. The N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA can be replaced by each other.

Version replacement

Because the N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA use different FPGA program, select corresponding FPGA program in upgrading. Otherwise, the upgrading will fail.

The EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE have only one version: N1. They are only applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and extended subrack. Technical Parameters Table 8-5 shows the technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE. Table 8-5 Technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE

Parameter

Description GXCSA EXCSA

UXCSA

UXCSB

XCE

Higher order cross-connect capability

40 Gbit/s

80 Gbit/s

80 Gbit/s

80 Gbit/s

0 Gbit/s

Lower order cross-connect capacity

5 Gbit/s

5 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s




Parameter

Description GXCSA EXCSA

External clock

UXCSA

UXCSB

XCE

2 channels, 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz

Dimensions (mm)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 40 (W)

W

Weight (kg)

1.81

2.00

2.00

2.00

1.50


27

62

65

65

25

Long-term working condition


Short-term working condition




Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%






8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are boards integrating the functions of the SDH processing unit, system control & communication unit, cross-connect unit and timing unit. They are only applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500. The CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 is seated in slots 9–10 in the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. The CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 is seated in slots 4–5 in the OptiX OSN 1500 subrack. Table 8-6 shows a comparison among them. Table 8-6 Comparison among CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16

Board name

CXL1

CXL4

CXL16

Line processing capacity

1 x STM-1

1 x STM-4

1 x STM-16

Cross-connect capacity (higher order)

20 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

20 Gbit/s

Cross-connect capacity (lower order) (Note)

5 Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s

5 Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s

5 Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s

Clock function

Same

System control function

Same

Note: The CXL series boards have two versions: Q1 and Q2. The lower order cross-connect capacity of Q1 version is 5 Gbit/s and that of Q2 version is 20 Gbit/s.

8.2.1 Functionality 1. SDH Processing Unit

The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 boards are responsible for receiving and transmitting one optical signal at STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 level respectively. Their optical interfaces are compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.957, frame structures compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.707, and the jitter specifications compliant with ITU-T G.825 and ITU-T G.958.

The CXL1 supports S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2 optical modules for different transmission distances.

The CXL4 supports S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 optical modules for different transmission distances.

The CXL16 supports I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical modules for different transmission distances.

The CXL16 supports VC-4-4C, VC-4-8C and VC-4-16C concatenated services.

Support various protection schemes such as two-fiber and four-fiber bidirectional MS ring protection, linear MSP and SNCP.

Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment management and maintenance.

Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces for fast fault location.

Support ALS function, avoiding laser injury to human body during maintenance.

Support on-line query of the board information and the optical power.




Support smooth software upgrade and capacity expansion.

2. System Control & Communication Unit

Configure and groom service, monitor service performance, and collect performance events and alarm information.

Provide 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for NM connection.

Provide F&f interface through the SEI board for COA management.

Provide one 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between various boards.

Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active and standby CXL.

Provide the OAM interface through SEI, supporting remote maintenance of the Modem of RS232 DCE.

Process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management.

Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.

Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.

3. Cross-Connect Unit

Implement 20 Gbit/s VC-4 full cross-connection and 5 Gbit/s20/Gbit/s VC-12/VC-3 full cross-connection respectively.

Provide two 4 Mbit/s HDLC emergency paths for MSP and SNCP.

Support flexible service grooming, including loopback, cross-connection, multicast, and broadcasting.

Provisioning/removing service does not affect other services.

Support SNCP at VC-3 and VC-12 levels.

Support AU4-4C, AU4-8C and AU4-16C concatenated services.

Support 1+1 hot backup protection, both revertive and non-revertive mode. The default is non-revertive.

4. Timing Unit

Provide standard system synchronization clock.

Input two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals, and is capable of selecting the external timing source.

Output two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals.

Provide SSM, extract, insert and process clock ID.

8.2.2 Principle The CXL16 is taken as an example in the following description. Figure 8-4 shows the functional block diagram of the CXL16. The CXL16 integrates the STM-16 SDH processing unit, cross-connect unit, system control & communication unit and timing unit.




Front panel

Backplane STM-16 SDH processing unit

Cross connect unit

System control and communication unit

Timing unit

Figure 8-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL16

8.2.3 Front Panel The front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 is shown in Figure 8-5. CXL1

CXL16

CXL4

STAT ACTX ACTC PROG SRVX SRVL SYNC ALMC






OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

IN RESET

RESET

RESET

ALM CUT

ALM CUT

ALM CUT

CXL1

CXL4

CXL16

CXL1

CXL4

CXL16

Figure 8-5 Front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16

1. Indicators

The indicator description of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 is shown in Table 8-7. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-11



Table 8-7 Indicators of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16

Indicator

Color and status

Description

STAT

On, green


On, red


Off

The board is not powered on, or service is not configured.

On, green

The cross-connect unit is in active status.

Off

The cross-connect unit is in standby status.

On, green

The system control & communication unit is in active status.

Off

The system control & communication unit is in standby status.

On, green






On, red


Off

No power supply.

On, green

Service operates normally on the cross-connect unit.

On, red

Switching (for example, TPS) occurs to the service on the cross-connect unit.

On, green

Service operates normally on the line unit, and no service alarm occurs.

On, red

A critical or major alarm occurs to the line service.

On, yellow

A minor or remote alarm occurs to the line service.

Off

The line service is not configured or no power supply.

On, yellow

Alarm is cut off permanently.

Off

Alarm is normally provided.

ACTX

ACTC

PROG

SRVX

SRVL

ALMC




Indicator

Color and status

Description

SYNC (red or green)

On, green

The clock works in synchronous status.

On, red

The clock works in a hold-over or free-run mode.

2. Interfaces

The interfaces on the front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 boards are shown in Table 8-8. Table 8-8 Interfaces of CXL

Name

Description

Function

Line optical interface

LC

Receive and transmit optical signal. Use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.

RESET

Reset button

Press the button to warm reset the SCC unit.

ALM CUT

Alarm cut switch

Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once. Press and hold the ALM CUT for three seconds to cut off audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT again to enable audible alarms.

8.2.4 Protection Configuration The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 support 1+1 protection.

8.2.5 Parameter Configuration The parameters required by the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are as follows. 1. J1

J1 is the path trace byte. It is used to transmit repetitively a higher order access point identifier so that the receive end can verify its continued connection to the intended transmit end. When J1 mismatch is detected at receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate an HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default. 2. C2

C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate an HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 8-9 associates C2 byte setting to service type.




Table 8-9 Correspondence between C2 byte setting and service type

service type

C2 byte setting

E1 or T1

TUG structure

E3 or DS3

34 Mbit/s/45 Mbit/s asynchronously mapped into C-3

E4

140 Mbit/s asynchronously mapped into C-4

Null

Unloaded

3. When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM) is not Started



4. When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started



Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS)

S1 byte

Threshold for clock switching protection

8.2.6 Version Description The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 have two versions: Q1 and Q2. Except that cross-connect capacity and software features, the two versions support the same functions. Q1CXL1/Q1CXL4/Q1CXL16: Higher order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s and lower order cross-connect capacity is 5 Gbit/s. On the T2000, the Q1CXL board is displayed as three logic boards: CXL, SCC and Q1SL1/4/16. Q2CXL1/Q2CXL4/Q2CXL16: Higher order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s and lower order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s. Support intelligent features. On the T2000, the Q2CXL is displayed as three logic boards: ECXL, GSCC and Q1SL1/4/16.

8.2.7 Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are shown in Table 8-10. Table 8-10 Technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16

Parameter

Description CXL1

CXL4

CXL16

Bit rate

155520 kbit/s

622080 kbit/s

2488320 kbit/s

Connector

LC

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 1.12

1.12


W

1.12



Parameter Power consumption (W)

Description CXL1

CXL4

CXL16

40

40

40

CXL1 Optical module type

S-1.1

L-1.1

L-1.2

Le-1.2

Wavelength (nm)

1310

1310

1550

1550


2–15

15–40

40–80

80–100


–15 to –8

–5 to 0

–5 to 0

–3 to 2


–28

–34

–34

–34


–8

–10

–10

–10

Optical module type

S-4.1

L-4.1

L-4.2

Le-4.2

Wavelength (nm)

1310

1310

1550

1550


2–15

15–40

40–80

80–100


–15 to –8

–3 to 2

–3 to 2

–3 to 2


–28

–28

–28

–33


–8

–8

–8

–8

CXL4

CXL16 Optical module type

I-16

S-16.1

L-16.1

L-16.2

Wavelength (nm)

1310

1310

1310

1550


0–2

2–15

15–40

40–80


–10 to 3

–5 to 0

–2 to 3

–2 to 3


–18

–18

–27

–28


–3

0

–9

–9




Parameter

Description CXL1

CXL4

Long-term working condition


Short-term working condition






CXL16

Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%



8.3 SCC/GSCC The SCC is the system control and communication board, seated in slot 17 or 18. It functions main control, orderwire, communication and system power monitoring. The OptiX OSN 3500 also provides the GSCC that supports intelligent features and extended subrack.

8.3.1 Functionality

Support 1+1 hot backup protection. When the active board fails, the service will switch to the standby board automatically.

Monitor service performance, and collect performance events and alarm information.

Provide the F&f interface through the AUX board for management of case-shape optical amplifier (COA).

Provide one 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface (the port is on the AUX board) for communication with the NM.

Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active and standby SCCs.

Process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management information.

Process such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and Serial 1–4.

Provide one 64 k codirectional data interface F1 through AUX.

Provide the OAM interface through AUX, supporting remote maintenance of the Modem of RS232 data connected equipment (DCE).

Monitor –48 V power supply of the system.

Support control of four cabinet indicators.

Process 16 housekeeping alarm inputs and four housekeeping alarm outputs.

Support management of intelligent fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.

Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.




8.3.2 Principle

Caution: There are four important databases on the SCC: mdb, drdb, fdb0 and fdb1. The mdb is in the dynamic random-access memory (RAM), saving the current databases. The drdb is saved in flash RAM. When power failure occurs to NE, the databases will be recovered in the order of drdb→fdb0→fdb1. The drdb will be checked first for configuration data. If the configuration data are safe in drdb, they will be recovered to mdb from drdb; if they are damaged, data will be recovered from fdb0 or fdb1, depending on which saves the latest data. If data in fdb0 are also damaged, fdb1 is used for data recovery. Therefore, it is important to back up data to fdb0 and fdb1 and compare the data in them.

Figure 8-6 shows the functional block diagram of the SCC. F1 1 orderwire phone 2 SDH NNI phones Serial 1-4 40 DCCs (D1-D3)

Overhead processing module

Power monitoring module

Control module

Communication module

16 alarm inputs and 4 alarm outputs interface 5 cabinet alarm indicator interface AUX backup power alarm detection Fan alarm detection and management PIU alarm detection and management

NM interface F&f OAM

+3.3 V Power module

-48 V

+2.7 V +5 V

Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the SCC

1. Control Module

The control module configures and manages boards and NEs, collect alarms and performance events, and backs up important data. The control module processes 40 DCC (D1–D3) bytes. 2. Communication Module

The communication module provides 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for NM connection, F&f interface for managing external devices such as COA, and the OAM interface. The communication module also process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management. 3. Overhead Processing Module

The overhead processing module receives overhead signals from the line slot and Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-17



processes such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and serials 1–4. The overhead processing module also sends overhead signals to the line board, and externally provides one orderwire interface, two SDH NNI audio interfaces, interface F1, and the broadcast data interfaces serials 1–4. The position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame is shown in Figure 8-7. A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

J0

B1

E1

F1

D1

D2

D3

Serial 1 Serial2

AU_PTR B2

B2

D4

Serial 4

B2

K1

K2

D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

D10

D11

D12

S1

M1

Serial3

E2

Figure 8-7 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame

4. Power Monitoring Module

The power monitoring module comprises –48 V power monitoring and working power.

The working power provides the SCC with working voltage and detects and switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through AUX).

The –48 V power monitoring module monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX, monitors fan alarms, monitors and manages the PIU, and processes sixteen housekeeping alarm inputs and four housekeeping alarm outputs as well as the cabinet alarm indicator signal.

8.3.3 Front Panel The SCC front panel is shown in Figure 8-8.




SCC STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC

RESET

ALM CUT

SCC

Figure 8-8 The front panel of the SCC and the GSCC

1. Switch

The switch description of the SCC is shown in Table 8-11 Table 8-11 Switch description of the SCC

Name

Function

RESET

Reset button

ALM CUT

Alarm cut switch Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once. Press and hold the ALM CUT for three seconds to cut off audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT again to enable audible alarms.




2. Indicators

The indicator description of the SCC is shown in Table 8-12 Table 8-12 Indicator description of the SCC

Indicator

Status

Description

STAT (red or green)

On, green


On, red


Off


On

The service is activated.

Off

The service is not activated.

On, green






On, red


Off

No power supply.

On, green

Service is normal, no service alarm occurs.

On, red

A critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow

A minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off

No service is configured.

On, green

The –48 V power supply A is normal.

On (red/off)

The –48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed).

On, green

The –48 V power supply B is normal.

On (red/off)

The –48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed).

ACT (green)

PROG (red or green)

SRV (red, yellow or green)

PWRA (red or green)

PWRB (red or green)




Indicator

Status

Description

PWRC (red or green)

On, green

The 3.3 V protection power is normal.

On, red

The 3.3 V protection power is lost.

On, green

Permanent alarm cut-off.

Off

Give audible warning upon alarm.

ALMC (yellow)

Note: Power supply A indicates the first power input. Power supply B indicates the second power input.

3. Interfaces

The interfaces provided by the SCC are led out through the AUX. For details, refer to the interface description of the AUX.

8.3.4 Version Description The SCC has one version N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500. It does not support intelligent features or extended subracks. The GSCC has two versions: N1 and N2. The N1GSCC is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and supports intelligent features or extended subracks. The N2GSCC is applicable to the OptiX OSN 7500 or OptiX OSN 3500 and supports intelligent features.

8.3.5 Technical Parameters Table 8-13 shows the technical parameters of the SCC. Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the SCC

Parameter

Description


System control, inter-board communication, orderwire, and power detection

Dimensions (mm)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) Weight (kg)

0.88


10










W



8.4 CRG The CRG is the system control and clock unit of the OptiX OSN 2500 REG, seated in slots 9–10. It implements control, orderwire, communication, and clock assignment and tracing functions.

8.4.1 Functionality 1. System Control and Communication Unit

Implement service configuration and grooming, monitor service performance, and collect performance events and alarm information.

Provide the F&f interface through the SEI board for management of case-shape optical amplifier (COA).

Provide a 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface through the SEI board for communication with the NM.

Provide the RS232 DCE remote maintenance interface (X.25) through SEI, supporting the access of Modem

Process 40 data communication channels (DCCs) to provide the transmit link for network management

Process such bytes as E1, Serial 1–4, F1, D1–D12, and ID.

Provide transparent transmission of D1–D12 bytes of other manufacturers.

Provide two 485 bus lines for communication between boards. The two lines backup each other.

Provide a 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for communication between boards, and report of board alarm information and performance information.

Provide a 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between active and standby SCC boards.

Monitor –48 V power supply of the system.

Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.

Support control of four cabinet indicators.

Support revertive or nonrevertive switching between active and standby boards without impact on services.

Support warm reset, cold reset and reset by pressing button. The warm reset does not affect services.

Support querying board information, which includes board software version, FPGA version, BIOS version, and board manufacturing information.

2. Clock Unit

Implement system timing function, which complies with the timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks under REG mode specified in ITU-T G.813.

When REG works normally, the clock at the transmit end is synchronized with that at the receive end. The clock works in pass-through mode. If the clock at the receive end is lost, the clock at the transmit end traces the free-run clock in the equipment. The accuracy is greater than 20 ppm.

Support trace and free-run working modes and switching between the two. The Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-22



current working mode can be queried.

Support processing S1 byte.

Support setting and querying the clock trace source priority table.

The reference clock source of the system clock is the line clock or clock within the system.

8.4.2 Principle Figure 8-9 shows the functional block diagram of the CRG.

System control module

FPGA

2K

Timing module

Line clock from line units

-48 V


Power module

38M 5V 3.3 V 1.5 V

NM interface F&f OAM

Boards in other slots

Detecting module

Figure 8-9 Functional block diagram of the CRG

1. System Control Module

Configure and manage the board and NEs, collect alarms and performance events, and backup important data. 2. Communication Module

It provides:

10 Mbit/s/100Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interfaces for connection with NM and communication between boards.

F&f interface to manage external equipment such as COA as well as OAM interface to support maintenance and management.

communication processing function through ECC channel.

3. FPGA

It is a software processing module. 4. Clock Module

When the REG works normally, the clock module extracts and traces the line clock received by the source end, and provides system clock signals (2 kbit/s or 38 Mbit/s signals, for example) required by the system. 5. Detection Module

It detects board temperature, power supply (over-voltage and under-voltage), clock Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-23



frequency deviation and failure. 6. Power Module

The power monitoring module comprises –48 V power monitoring and working power. The working power provides the CRG board with working voltage and detects and switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through AUX). The –48 V power monitoring monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX, monitors and manages the fan, and processes housekeeping alarm inputs and outputs as well as the cabinet alarm indicator signal.

8.4.3 Front Panel Figure 8-10 shows the front panel of the CRG. CRG STAT ACTC PROG SYNC ALMC

RESET

ALM CUT

CRG

Figure 8-10 Front panel of the CRG

1. Switch

The switch description of the CRG is shown in Table 8-14. Table 8-14 Switch description of the CRG

Name

Function

RESET

Reset button




Name

Function

ALM CUT

Alarm cut switch Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once. Press and hold the ALM CUT for five seconds to cut off audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT again to enable audible alarms.

2. Indicators

The indicator description of the CRG is shown in Table 8-15. Table 8-15 Indicator description of the CRG

Indicator

Status

Description

STAT (red or green)

On, green


On, red


Off


On

The CRG is in the active status.

Off

The CRG is in the standby status.

On, green






On, red


Off

No power supply.

On, green

The clock works in synchronous status

On, red

Clock source is lost and the clock is working in the hold-over or free-run mode.

On

Permanent alarm cut-off

Off

Audible warning upon alarm.

ACTC (green)

PROG (red or green)

SYNC (red or green)

ALMC (yellow)




3. Interfaces

The interfaces provided by the CRG are led out through the SEI. For details, refer to the interface description of the SEI.

8.4.4 Version Description The CRG has one version Q1. It is only applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 REG.

8.4.5 Technical Parameters Table 8-16 shows the technical parameters of the CRG. Table 8-16 Technical parameters of the CRG

Parameter

Description


System control, inter-board communication, orderwire, and power detection

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg)

0.90


12











9 Other Boards

9

Other Boards

This chapter introduces the optical amplifier board, built-in WDM unit, power board, orderwire board and auxiliary interface board of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The technical details cover:

Functionality

Principle

Front panel

Version description


9.1 LWX The LWX is an arbitrary rate wavelength conversion board, converting signal of arbitrary rate (10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s NRZ encoding) at the client side into standard wavelength optical signal in compliance with G.692. Table 9-1 shows the slots for the LWX in the OptiX OSN products. Table 9-1 Slots for the LWX

Product

LWX


Slots 1–8, 11–17


Slots 1–8, 11–16

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

9.1.1 Functionality

Convert client-side signals into ITU-T G.692 (DWDM) compliant standard Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-1


9 Other Boards

wavelength signals and transmit the signals transparently.

Provide 3R function for client-side signals (at the rate of 10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s), perform clock recovery and monitor its rate.

Provide two types of LWX board: one is single-fed single receiving, and the other is dual-fed signal selection.

The dual-fed signal selection LWX supports intra-board protection, realizing optical channel protection with one board. The protection switching time is less than 50ms.

The single-fed single receiving LWX supports inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection. The protection switching time is less than 50ms.

Support sub-carrier modulation to realize ECC communication.

The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and channel spacing is 100 GHz. Support automatic laser shutdown function (ALS). When no light is received, the corresponding optical transmitting module will be automatically shut down.

Support inloop and outloop function at optical interface level for fault location.

Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient maintenance.

Note: Sub-carrier modulation: Couple a weak 2.4 Gbit/s signal (after spreading) into the service signal and then modulate the laser. Obtain 2.4 Gbit/s signal through the bandpass filter after O/E conversion at the receiving end and then get the original signal through demodulation.

9.1.2 Principle The functional block diagram of the LWX board is shown in Figure 9-1. Backplane ITU-T G.692 wavelength 10 Mbit/s 2.7 Gbit/s Optical Client side transponder WDM side module 10 Mbit/s -

Performance and alarm monitoring

SCC


SCC

2.7 Gbit/s

+3.3 V (Standby) +5 V

Power module

+2.7 V +3.3 V

Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the LWX


-48 V


9 Other Boards


The optical transponder module processes 10Mbit/s～2.7Gbit/s optical signal received from the client side. At the DWDM side, the LWX outputs ITU-T G.692-compliant standard wavelength signal. The optical transponder module can separate one channel of signal to the performance monitoring circuit for counting B1 bit errors. The optical transponder module has jitter suppression function which guarantees good jitter suppression performance. 2. In Transmit Direction

The LWX receives ITU-T G.692-compliant standard wavelength signal from the DWDM side. The optical transponder module processes the optical signal and outputs the 10Mbit/s～2.7Gbit/s signal at the client side . 3. Auxiliary Units



Power module

Provide power supply of various voltages for the board.

9.1.3 Front Panel Figure 9-2 shows the front panel of the LWX board.



9 Other Boards

LWX STAT ACT PROG SRV CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

TX RX OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2

LWX

Figure 9-2 Front panel of the LWX

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the LWX.






The LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX are described in Table 9-2. Table 9-2 Interfaces of the LWX

Interface

Type

Description

IN1/IN2

LC

Receive the signals from the optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2.

OUT1/OUT2

LC

Send signals to the optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2.

TX

LC

Send service signal to client-side equipment.



9 Other Boards

Interface

Type

Description

RX

LC

Receive the service signal from client-side equipment.

Note: IN1/OUT1 is a pair of receive/transmit optical interfaces, and IN2/OUT2 is another pair.

9.1.4 Version Description The LWX has only one version N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.

9.1.5 Technical Parameters Table 9-3 and Table 9-4 show the optical interface parameters on client side and DWDM side of the LWX. Table 9-5 shows the technical parameters of the LWX. Table 9-3 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX

Item

Unit

Description

Bit rate

10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s

Source type

MLM

SLM

SLM

2

15

80


km

Characteristics of transmitter at point S Operating wavelength range

nm

850

1260–1360

1500–158 0

Maximum mean launched power

dBm

–3

0

+3

Min. mean launched power

dBm

–10

–5

–2

Min. extinction ratio

dB

+8.2

+8.2

+8.2

Min. side mode suppression ratio

dB

NA

30

30

G.957 compliant

G.957 compliant

G.957 compliant

PIN

PIN

APD

Eye pattern Characteristics of receiver at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range

nm

1200–1600

1200–1600

1200–160 0

Receiver sensitivity

dBm

–18

–18

–28

Min. receiver overload

dBm

–3

0

–9

Maximum reflectance

dB

–27

–27

–27



9 Other Boards

Table 9-4 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX

Item

Unit

Description

Channel spacing

GHz

100

Characteristics of transmitter at point Sn Transmission distance

km

640

170

80

Maximum mean launched power

dBm

–2

–2

–2

Min. mean launched power

dBm

+3

+3

+3

Min. extinction ratio

dB

+10

+10

+10

Nominal central frequency

THz

192.10–196. 00

192.10–196.00

192.10–196.00

Central frequency offset

GHz

±12.5

±12.5

±12.5

Maximum –20 dB spectrum width

nm

0.2

0.4

0.4

Min. side mode suppression ratio

dB

35

35

35

Dispersion tolerance value

ps/nm

12800

2400

1600

G.957 compliant

G.957 compliant

G.957 compliant

Eye pattern Characteristics of receiver at point Rn Receiver type

APD

PIN

Operating wavelength range

nm

1200–1600

1200–1600

Receiver sensitivity

dBm

–31

–21

Min. receiver overload

dBm

–9

0

Maximum reflectance

dB

–27

–27

Table 9-5 Technical parameters of the LWX

Parameter

Description

Line code pattern

NRZ encoding

Connector

LC

Dimensions (mm)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) Weight (kg)

1.10


W


9 Other Boards

Parameter

Description


30







Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%



9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C The MR2A, MR2B and MR2C are 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing boards, adding/dropping and multiplexing any adjacent two channels of signals.

MR2A: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board

MR2B: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (half-height slot)

MR2C: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (interface area)

Table 9-6 shows the slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C in OptiX OSN products. Table 9-6 Slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C

OptiX OSN product

MR2A

MR2B

MR2C


Slots 1–8, 11–17

Not supported

Slots 19–26, 29–36


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Not supported

Slots 19–26, 29–36

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 5–6, 19–21

Slots 1–4, 15–18

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

Slots 6–9, 12–13

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

Slots 6–9, 1–3, 11–13

Slots 14–17

9.2.1 Functionality

Add/drop two adjacent standard wavelengths in compliance with ITU-T G.692 (DWDM), with signals transmitted transparently and operating wavelength ranging from 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm.

Serve as an OTM or OADM station adding/dropping two channels, as shown in Figure 9-3. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-7


9 Other Boards

Two MR2A/MR2B/MR2C boards connected in serial can form an OTM station adding/dropping four channels, as shown in Figure 9-4.

Work with the LWX to form an OADM station to add/drop two channels of signals.

The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and the channel spacing is 100 GHz. Drop1

Drop2

Out

In

Drop1

MI MR2A/ MR2B/ MR2C

Add1

Drop2

Out

MO

In

Add2

Drop1

MI MR2A/ MR2B/ MR2C

Add1

MO

In

Add2

(1)

Drop2

Out

Add1

MI MR2A/ MR2B/ MR2C

MO

Add2

(2)

(1) MR2A/MR2B/MR2C can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping two channels. (2) Two MR2A/MR2C boards connected in serial can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping four channels. Figure 9-3 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C serves as OTM station

In

Out

Drop1

Add2 MR2A/ MR2B/ MR2C

LWX Add1 MI

LWX Drop2 MO

Figure 9-4 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals

9.2.2 Principle The functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C board is shown in Figure 9-5.



9 Other Boards

Front panel

Backplane Out Add1 Add2 MI MO

OADM module

Drop2 Drop1 In

Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

The MR2A/MR2B/MR2C mainly includes the OADM module adding/dropping two channels of signals. The OADM adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. It also provides concatenation interfaces to connect other add/drop multiplexing boards for more powerful add/drop capability. The MR2A/MR2B/MR2C is a passive board has no interface with the backplane.

9.2.3 Front Panel Figure 9-6 shows the front panel of the MR2A board. The front panel of the MR2 B and MR2C is the same as the MR2A board, except the panel dimensions.



9 Other Boards

MR2A


OUT AO1 AO2 M I MO DO2 DO1 IN

MR2A

Figure 9-6 Front panel of the MR2A

1. Indicators

None 2. Interfaces

There are four pairs of LC optical interfaces on the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C front panel, as described in Table 9-7. Table 9-7 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

Interface

Type

Description

A01–A02

LC

Access two channels of service signal added locally.

D01–D02

LC

Drop two channels of service signal locally.

IN

LC

Receive two channels of multiplexed signal.

OUT

LC

Send two channels of multiplexed signal.

MO/MI

LC

Concatenation interface, through which multiple MR2A/MR2B/MR2C boards can be concatenated.



9 Other Boards

9.2.4 Version Description The MR2A, MR2B and MR2C have only one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.

9.2.5 Technical Parameters Table 9-8 shows the technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C. Table 9-8 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

Parameter

Description

Operating wavelength

Any two adjacent channels with G.692 (DWDM) compliant standard wavelength, with operating wavelength being 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm

Line code pattern

NRZ

Connector

LC

Channel spacing (GHz)

100

Insertion loss (dB)

<2

Adjacent channel isolation (dB)

>25

Non-adjacent channel isolation (dB)

>35

–0.5 dB channel wavelength (nm)

<0.11

Dimensions (mm)

MR2A: 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) MR2B: 111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) MR2C: 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

Weight (kg)

1.01


0







Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%





9 Other Boards

9.3 BA2/BPA The BA2 is a 2-port booster amplifier board. The BPA is a booster amplifier & pre-amplifier board. Table 9-9 shows the slots for the BA2 and BPA in OptiX OSN products. Table 9-9 Slots for the BA2 and BPA

Product

BA2

BPA


Slots 1–8, 11–17

Slots 1–8, 11–17


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 5–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A

Slots 12–13

Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 11–13

Slots 11–13

9.3.1 Functionality

Increase the launched power of line board to +14 dBm or +17 dBm, thus to achieving a transmission distance of above 120 km or 130 km (in the case of G.652 optical fiber and 0.275 dB/km power loss on such fiber).

The BPA uses the pre-amplifier (PA) module to pre-amplify the received optical signal and increase the power gain of weak signals to 22 dB–25 dB, thus improving the receiver sensitivity to –38 dBm.

Control automatically laser temperature and optical power of the EDFA module.

Support automatic monitoring of input and output optical power and querying of the optical power of the EDFA module.

Support report of laser performance parameters.

Support the protection function of EDFA module. When no light is input, the software will automatically shut down the laser; when light is input again, the software will automatically start the laser.


Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.

9.3.2 Application In the long distance transmission, the attenuation of optical signal is great. To make the optical receiver receive normal optical signal, BA and PA are needed. The position of BA and PA in the optical transmission system is shown in Figure 9-7.



Transmit

9 Other Boards

Receive

BA

PA

Transmit

Receive

Figure 9-7 Position of BA and PA in the network

9.3.3 Principle Figure 9-8 shows the functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA. Optical input

Optical output

Optical input

Optical output Fixed filter

EDFA optical module 1

Pump current check

EDFA optical module 2

Module Input/output Drive temperature pow er module control check

Pump current check

Drive module

Optics part

Input/output Module pow er temperature check control

Drive and check part

A/D and D/A conversion

SCC


Control module

Data processing and communication part

Figure 9-8 Functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA

1. Optics Part

This part is composed of two EDFA optical modules for optical amplification. 2. Drive and Check Part

This part provides the EDFA optical modules with drive current, checks working status of each part of the EDFA optical modules, and forecasts and handles the possible faults. This drive and check part also checks the pump current, drives the optical module, controls the optical module and checks the input and output optical power. 3. Data Processing and Communication Part

This part comprises central processing unit (CPU) and peripheral chips. Analysis of the measuring result of the check circuit is conducted at this part. Then, the drive Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-13


9 Other Boards

circuit will be adjusted within the rated range according to the analysis result, so that the gain of EDFA optical modules and the output optical power can be regulated above the rated value. Any abnormity indicated by the measured value will be arranged and reported to NM.

9.3.4 Front Panel The front panel of the BA2 and BPA is shown in Figure 9-9. BA2 STAT ACT PROG SRV

OUT1 OUT2

IN1

IN2

BA2

BPA STAT ACT PROG SRV

OUT1 OUT2

IN1

IN2

BPA

Figure 9-9 Front panel of the BA2 and BPA

1. Indicators

There are four indicators on the BA2 and BPA.






There are two pairs of LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BA2 and BPA for Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-14


9 Other Boards

receiving and transmitting optical signal. Using swappable optical module is easy for maintenance.

9.3.5 Version Description The BA2 and BPA have only one version N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500.

9.3.6 Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA are shown in Table 9-10. Table 9-10 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA

Parameter

Description BA2

BPA

Bit rate

2488320 kbit/s and 9953280 kbit/s


2-channel power amplification

1-channel power amplification and 1-channel pre-amplification

Line code pattern

NRZ

Connector

LC

Dimensions (mm)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

W

Weight (kg)

1.01

1.01


20

20

Operating wavelength range (nm)

BA: 1530–1565

BA: 1530–1565

Input power range (dBm)

BA: –6 to +3

PA: 1550.12 BA: –6 to +3 PA: –10 to –38

Output power (dBm)

BA: +14 or +17

BA: +14 or +17


–

PA: –38

Noise figure (dB)

<6.5

BA: <6.5, PA: <6

Type of optical interface

V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, U-64.2

V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, U-64.2





Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%



9 Other Boards

Parameter

Description BA2


BPA




9.4 COA The COA, a case-shape optical amplifier, integrates the EDFA module, drive circuit and communication circuit in an aluminium case. Two types of COA are available: 61COA and 62COA.

Note: The COA mentioned below includes 61COA and 62COA.

The 61COA is used for 1550 nm window. Its appearance is shown in Figure 9-10. The 61COA is equipped with only one EDFA optical module and can work as optical amplifier, pre-amplifier or line amplifier. The optical characteristics of the 61COA are the same as those of the BPA and the BA2. The COA is externally installed and does not occupy any slot in the subrack. It can be installed in the ETSI cabinet but needs separate power supply. Each OptiX OSN 3500 can work with up to two 61COAs.

Figure 9-10 Appearance of the 61COA (PA)

The 62COA is a case-shape Raman amplifier used at the receiving end of the SDH equipment. It inputs counter-propagating pump light to fibers for distributed Raman amplification. The gain medium of Raman amplification is the line fiber that can realize better noise performance. Therefore, the 62COA can extend the transmission distance, lower the signal-to-noise ratio and realize ultra long hop transmission for a single span. Figure 9-11 shows the appearance of the 62COA.



9 Other Boards 4

1

2 3

5

1. Captive screw 4. ESD jack

2. Ejector lever 5. Power access board

3. COA board

Figure 9-11 Appearance of the 62COA

9.4.1 Functionality

The 61COA is an erbium doped fiber amplifier, mainly used as optical booster amplifier. It can raise the launched optical power of the line board up to +14 dBm or +17dBm, thus extending the transmission distance.

The 61COA can also work as the preamplifier with the receiver sensitivity of –38 dBm.

The 62COA is configured at the receiving end of the SDH system as a Raman amplifier. It works with an EDFA of +17 dBm at the transmitting end to realize the transmission of more than 170 km.

The 62COA provides the preamplification function with the receiver sensitivity of –39 dBm.

The 61COA and 62COA support automatic laser shutdown.

Communicate with the SCC board through RS-232 serial port, report the alarms and performance events of the local board to the NM and receive configuration commands from the NM.

The COA is externally installed and does not occupy any slot in the subrack. It can work separately.

9.4.2 Application The 61COA is applied in the optical transmission system in the same way as the BA2 and BPA. The 62COA is a Raman fiber amplifier, used at the receiving end of the optical transmission system. It amplifies optical signal by means of stimulated Raman scattering (SRS) effect. The 62 COA needs to work with the EDFA to realize the transmission of more than170 km, as shown in Figure 9-12. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-17


9 Other Boards Raman Amplifier Signal light

EDFA

Pump light Pump light

Fiber Transmitting end

Optical receiver

Laser

Coupler

Receiving end

Figure 9-12 Application of Raman amplifier (62COA)

The Raman amplifier inputs counter-propagating pump light to fibers for distributed Raman amplification. Counter pumping means the pump light is injected at the fiber end and the direction is opposite to the main signals. This kind of pumping results in a big phase difference between the main signals and the pump light. And the Raman pump power vibration is leveled in the reverse direction of signal transmission, thus effectively suppressing the noise created by pump.

9.4.3 Principle The functional block diagram of the 61COA board is shown in Figure 9-13. Optical input

Optical output Fixed filter

EDFA optical module

Pump current check

Drive module

Optics part

Module Input/output temperature power control check

Drive and check part

A/D and D/A conversion

SCC

Communicatio n module

Control module

Data processing and communication part

Figure 9-13 Functional block diagram of 61COA

1. Optics Part

It consists of EDFA to amplify the optical signal. 2. Drive and Check Part

It provides the EDFA with driving current and detects the working status of the components of the EDFA. It predicts and processes the possible faults. It implements the functions such as detecting pump current, driving optical module controlling optical module temperature, and detecting input/output optical power. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-18


9 Other Boards

3. Data Processing and Communication Part

It consists of the CPU and peripheral chips. It analyzes the measurement results of the detected circuit. Based on the analysis, it adjusts the driving circuit within the nominal range to keep the EDFA gain or power output at the nominal value level. It sorts out the abnormalities indicated by the measured value and reports to the NM. The 62COA works in the same way as the 61COA, except that the 62COA uses Raman amplifier while the 61COA uses EDFA amplifier.

9.4.4 Front Panel The front panel of the 61COA is shown in Figure 9-14. 9

8

1

2

3

1. ID DIP switch 5. RS232-2 9. OUT optical port

4

5

2. Running indicator 6. MONITOR-1 10. Power switch

10

7

6

11

3. Alarm indicator 4. RS232-1 7. MONITOR-2 8. IN optical port 11. –48 V power interface

Figure 9-14 Front panel of the COA

The front panel of the 62COA is shown in Figure 9-15.

1. SC/PC optical interface 4. Fan board 7 RS232-2 10. Power input interface

2. E2000 optical interface 5. RJ-45 8. DIP switch (5–8 bits) 11. Power switch

3. Air filter 6 RS232-1 9. DIP switch (1–4 bits)

Figure 9-15 Front panel of the 62COA

1. Indicators

The indicators of the 61COA/62 COA are described in Table 9-11.



9 Other Boards

Table 9-11 Indicators of the 61COA/62COA

Indicator

Color and status

Description

ALM (Red)

The ALM is constantly on and the RUN is off

Memory self-check error

Flashing 3 times every other second

Critical alarm

Flashing twice every other second

Major alarm

Flashing once every other second

Minor alarm

Flashing once every 2 seconds

Normal (in service)

Flashing once every 4 seconds

Database protected mode; communication with the SCC interrupted

Flashing 5 times every second

Program startup/load

RUN (Green)

2. Interfaces

Optical interface

There is one pair of SC/PC optical interface on the front panel of the 61COA for inputting/outputting optical signals. The input optical interface of the 62COA is of E2000 type, and the output optical interface is of SC type. The following figure shows the flange and optical fiber connector used by the input port on the 62COA board.

Figure 9-16 E2000 flange and fiber connector

Caution: The E2000 fiber jumper integrates a specially designed optical cap. Do not remove this optical cap during fiber connection. Just insert the fiber connector (with the optical cap) into the E2000 flange.

RS-232-1/RS-232-2 serial port

Control & communication interface. It communicates with the SCC, reports alarms Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-20


9 Other Boards

and performance events.

Note: The RS-232-1 port on the COA is connected with the F&f port on the subrack through the serial control cable to realize communication with the SCC.

When there are several COAs on the same station, the RS-232-2 port is employed. Use serial cable to connect the RS-232-2 of No. 1 COA with the RS-232-1 of No. 2 COA, and then the RS-232-2 of No. 2 COA with the RS-232-1 of No. 3 COA. The ports are all connected in this way. All the COAs communicate with the SCC unit on the subrack through the RS-232-1 port of No.1 COA, as shown in Figure 9-17. F&f

RS232-1

RS232-2 Rx

Tx

Tx

GND

SCC

RS232-2

Rx

Tx

Tx

Rx

GND Tx

Rx

RS232-1

Rx

COA

COA

Figure 9-17 Serial communication between the COA and the SCC

Note: To concatenate the COAs, the last four digits of the DIP switch on the panel should be switched to different IDs to identify the COAs. The maximum number of concatenated subracks of the OptiX OSN 3500 is 2.

MONITOR-1/MONITOR-2 interface

MONITOR-1 and MONITOR-2 serve as the alarm output port when the 61COA is used alone. The relation between the output alarm and the interface pin is illustrated in Table 9-12. Table 9-12 Relation between output alarm and interface pin

MONITOR-1 pin number


Definition

1, 6

1, 6

EDFA’s input optical power is too low

2, 7

2, 7

Working temperature of the pump laser is over threshold

3, 8

3, 8

Cool current of pump laser is over threshold



9 Other Boards



Definition

4, 9

4, 9

Environment temperature is over threshold

5

5

Digital ground

RJ-45 Ethernet interface

Specially designed for the 62COA, the interface is used to connect a computer to load the board software.

–48 V power interface

It inputs the –48V power from PIU board or power box on the cabinet. The voltage range under normal working condition: –38.4 V to –57.6 V.

DIP switch

The DIP switch of the 61COA is located on the lower left corner of the panel. It is used to set the ID of the 61COA. When it is in the upper state, it is OFF. When it is in the lower state, it is ON. The SCC identifies and communicates with 61COAs with different IDs. The DIP switch of the 62COA is used for setting the ID of 62COA and the type of fiber. For each bit of the 8-bit DIP switch (bit 8 to bit 1 from left to right), up position means 0 and down position means 1. The bits 1–4 show the board ID, and indicate the ID number ranging from 20 to 35. Normally the ID number ranges from 20 to 27. The fifth bit indicates the type of fiber. “0" indicates G.652 fiber, and “1” indicates G.655 fiber.

9.4.5 Installation The COA adopts case-shape design, not occupying any slot in the subrack. In the OptiX cabinet, a special bracket is designed to hold the 61COA. The 62COA is installed directly in the cabinet with the mounting ears. 1. Installation of the 61COA

The bracket is fixed on the crossbars on both sides of the cabinet. The 61COA is pushed into the brackets along the guide rail and fixed. One bracket can house two 61COAs side by side with the front panel of the 61COA facing the front side of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 9-18.



9 Other Boards

Figure 9-18 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet

2. Installation of the 62COA

The 62COA can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm cabinet with mounting ears and screws. If adopting upward-wiring, the 62COA is installed at the bottom of the ETSI cabinet (first and third floating nuts). If adopting downward-wiring mode, the 62COA is installed in any idle place of the 2.6 m high cabinet or in the ETSI cabinet not fully configured.

9.4.6 Version Description. The 61COA and 62COA are the externally installed case-shape optical amplifier. Their logic slots on the NM T2000 are slots 101 and 102. The 61COA and 62COA are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The OptiX OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 2500 can be equipped with up to two COAs, but the OptiX OSN 1500 can be equipped with only one COA.

9.4.7 Technical Parameters Table 9-13 shows the technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA. Table 9-13 Technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA

Parameter

Description 61COA

62COA

Dimensions (mm)

240 (L) x 190 (W) x 50 (H)

436 (L) x 294 (W) x 86 (H)

Weight (kg)

3.5

8


10

75


One optical signal

One optical signal

Connector

SC/PC

SC/PC and E2000

Operating wavelength (nm)

1550

1550.12

Input optical power range (dBm)

NA

–39 to –20 (2.5 Gbit/s signal without FEC)



9 Other Boards

Parameter

Description 61COA

62COA

Output optical power (dBm)

+14/+17

NA

Pump wavelength (nm)

NA

1451.2

Max, on/off gain (dB)

NA

>15 (applied to G.652 fiber)

Noise figure (dB)

NA

<–1.5



9 Other Boards

9.5 DCU The DCU is the dispersion compensation board. It can compensate for the optical signal dispersion accumulated during transmission in the 10 Gbit/s system. In addition, it compresses the optical signal and works with the booster amplifier to achieve long distance optical transmission. The DCU can be seated in slots 1–8 and slots 11–17 of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and it is only used in the 10 Gbit/s system.

9.5.1 Functionality

Use chirp grating to compensate for the optical dispersion and compress the pulse signal for signal recovery.

Make dispersion compensation to two channels of optical signals simultaneously, with the compensation being 1020 ps/nm (for dispersion generated on 60 km G.652 fiber) or 1360 ps/nm (for dispersion generated on 80 km G.652 fiber), or the free combination of the two.

Work with BA and PA for long distance optical transmission.

9.5.2 Application After long distance transmission over optical fiber, the pulse of the 10 Gbit/s signal becomes broadened due to dispersion. The signal is distorted seriously and cannot be received by the optical receiver normally. Thus, the DCU is needed for dispersion compensation. Its position in the optical transmission system is shown in Figure 9-19. Pulse broading

Pulse compressing

Long fiber Optical transmitter

BA

PA

DCU

Optical receiver

1550.12 nm 1550.12 nm

Figure 9-19 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system

Note: The operating wavelength of the chirp grating of the DCU is 1550.12 nm, so it is required that the central wavelength of the optical signal sent from the remote optical interface board is also 1550.12 nm. Otherwise, it is impossible to make dispersion compensation to the optical signal. And insertion loss is very large and no optical signal is output.



9 Other Boards

9.5.3 Principle Figure 9-20 shows the functional block diagram of the DCU. Input

Chirp grating

IN Coupler OUT Output

Long Short w avelength w avelength

Figure 9-20 Functional block diagram of the DCU


The 10 Gbit/s optical signal is sent into IN interface of the coupler, and then to the chirp grating through the single port of the coupler after an attenuation of 3 dB. For spectrum components with different wavelengths, the chirp grating has different reflection positions. The reflection position for short wavelength components is at the inner part of the grating, which means a longer transport distance. While that for long wavelength components is at the external part of the grating, which means a shorter transport distance. Additionally, the delay of signals with different frequencies is different. As a result, the signals reflected back by the grating is “compressed”, thus achieving the compensation effect. 2. In Transmit Direction

The signal after compensation will be returned to the coupler and then sent out from the OUT interface after an attenuation of 3 dB. These pulse-compressed optical signals can be received by receiver and transmitted for a long distance over optical fiber.

9.5.4 Front Panel The front panel of the DCU is shown in Figure 9-21.



9 Other Boards

DCU

OUT1 OUT2

IN1

IN2

DCU

Figure 9-21 Front panel of the DCU

1. Indicators

None 2. Interfaces

There are two pairs of LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCU for receiving and transmitting two 10 Gbit/s optical signals. Using pluggable optical module is easy for maintenance.



9 Other Boards

9.5.5 Version Description The DCU board has two versions: N1 and N2. The DCU is only applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500. The N2 version DCU, as a low insertion loss DCU, brings the insertion loss 3-5 dB less than what the N1 version DCU brings. Caution: When replacing the N1 version DCU with an N2 version DCU, add an attenuator to avoid optical power overload.

9.5.6 Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the DCU are shown in Table 9-14. Table 9-14 Technical parameters of the DCU

Parameter

Description

Bit rate

9953280 kbit/s


Dispersion compensation for 2 x STM-64 optical signals

Line code pattern

NRZ

Connector

LC

Dimensions (mm)

H D

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) Weight (kg)

0.42


0


1550.12 ±0.05

–0.5 dB bandwidth (nm)

>0.4

Dispersion compensation (ps/nm)

1020 (60 km) 1360 (80 km)

Insertion loss (dB)

<8.3

<3








W


9 Other Boards





9 Other Boards

9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI The AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI are the system auxiliary interface board, providing the system with various auxiliary interfaces, management interfaces, central backup of the +3.3 V board power supply, orderwire interface and broadcast data interface. The AUX has three versions: N1, R1 and R2. The SAP and SEI has one version Q1, the EOW has one version R1. Table 9-15 shows their slots in OptiX OSN products. Table 9-15 Slots for the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI

Board

Function

Product

Slot

N1AUX


OptiX OSN 3500

Slot 37

Q1SAP

System auxiliary processing board

OptiX OSN 2500

Slot 14

The extended signal interface board, providing the system with various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces

OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Auxiliary interface area

R1EOW

Orderwire board, providing orderwire interface and broadcast data interface

OptiX OSN 1500

Slot 9

R1/R2AUX


OptiX OSN 1500

Slot 10

Q1SEI

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

9.6.1 Functionality Board Function

N1AUX

R1/R2AUX

R1EOW

Q1SAP

Q1SEI

Management interface

Provide an X.25-compliant OAM interface;

Provide an X.25-complia ntOAM/F&f interface;

—

Provide a ETH NM interface.

Provide an X.25-compliantO AM interface;

Provide an F&f serial interface; Provide a ETH NM interface ;

Provide an F&f serial interface.

Provide a ETH NM interface.

Provide a EXT interface to manage extended subracks.



9 Other Boards

Board Function

N1AUX

R1/R2AUX

R1EOW

Q1SAP

Q1SEI

Auxiliary interface

Provide Serial 1–4 broadcast data interfaces;

—

Provide Serial 1–4 broadcast data interfaces;

—

Provide Serial 1–4 broadcast data interfaces; Provide F1 codirectional data interface (64 kbit/s).

—

Provide two BITS clock input/output interfaces with impedance being 120 Ω.

Provide F1 codirectional data interface (64 kbit/s) .

Clock interface

Provide two 2.048 MHz BITS clock input/output interfaces; Provide two 2.048 Mbit/s BITS clock input/output interfaces .

Housekeeping alarm interface

Provide house-keeping alarm interface for 16 inputs and 4 outputs; Provide a output alarms concatenating interface for 4 output alarms.

Cabinet alarm indicator

Provide a four cabinet alarms output interface;

Provide F1 codirectional data interface (64 kbit/s), which also serves as the OAM interface. Provide two BITS clock input/output interfaces with impedance being 120 Ω.

—

Provide house-keepi ng alarm interface for three inputs and one output.

—

—

—

Provide two BITS clock input/output interfaces with impedance being 75 Ω. Support house-keeping alarm input, output, and output concatenation.

Provide house-keeping alarm interface for 8 inputs and 4 outputs; Provide a output alarms concatenating interface for 4 output alarms.

Provide a four input cabinet alarms concatenating interface.

Drive and concatenate four cabinet indicator signals.


Provide a four cabinet alarms output interface; Provide a four input cabinet alarms concatenating interface.


9 Other Boards

Board Function

N1AUX

R1/R2AUX

R1EOW

Q1SAP

Q1SEI

Orderwire interface

Provide one orderwire interface.

—


—


Provide two off network signaling interface.

Provide two off network signaling interface. Provide two off network audio interface.

Provide two off network audio interface. Commissionin g interface

Provide one commissioning interface (COM).

Provide one commissioni ng interface (COM).

—

Provide one commissioning interface (COM).

—

Internal communicatio n

Support communication between boards on one subrack.

Support communicati on between boards on one subrack.

—

Support communication between boards on one subrack.

—

Orderwire processing

—

—

Process E1, E2, F1, Serial 1–4 bytes.

Process E1, E2, F1, Serial 1–4 bytes.

—

Power backup and detection

Monitor two –48 V subrack power supplies and detect over-voltage (–72 V) and undervoltage;

—

Monitor two –48 V subrack power supplies and detect over-voltage (–72 V) and undervoltage

—

Provide centralized backup of +3.3 V board power (secondary power supply 1:N protection).

. Provide centralized backup of +3.3 V board power (secondary power supply 1:N protection).

Detect over-voltage (3.8 V) and under-voltage (3.1 V) for 3.3 V standby power supply. The power is 80 w.

The power is 1000 w. Detect over-voltage (3.8 V) and under-voltage (3.1 V) for 3.3 V standby power supply.



9 Other Boards

Board Function

N1AUX

R1/R2AUX

R1EOW

Q1SAP

Q1SEI

Audio alarm

Support audio alarm and alarm cut-up.


—


—

9.6.2 Principle Of AUX The AUX consists of communication module, interface module and power module. Figure 9-22 shows its functional block diagram. NM interface

Auxiliary interface

Interface module


+3.3 V -48 V

Power module

+3.3 V +2.7 V +5 V

Inter-board communication interface

(standby power supply for each board)

Figure 9-22 Functional block diagram of the AUX

1. Communication Module

Provide the NM interface for active/standby SCCs, OAM interface for remote maintenance, and interfaces for inter-board communication. 2. Interface Module

Provide various auxiliary interfaces, such as F&f, OAM, F1 and clock input/output. The N1 AUX and R1/R2 AUX provide different auxiliary interfaces. For details, see section 9.6.1. 3. Power Module

Provide the AUX with working power, and other boards on the subrack with +3.3 V centralized backup power.

9.6.3 Principle of EOW Figure 9-23 shows the functional block diagram of the EOW.



9 Other Boards Overhead processing unit

SCC unit

PHONE Broadcasting data interface and orderwire processing unit

S1 S2 S3 S4

Ringing current generating, resetting, timing unit Backplane

Front panel

Figure 9-23 Functional block diagram of the EOW

The overhead processing module processes E1, E2, F1, and Serial 1–4 bytes. The position of each overhead byte in the SDH frame is shown in Figure 9-24. A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

J0

B1

E1

F1

D1

D2

D3

Serial 1 Serial2

AU_PTR B2

B2

D4

Serial 4

B2

K1

K2

D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

D10

D11

D12

S1

M1

Serial3

E2

Figure 9-24 Position of orderwire bytes in the SDH frame

9.6.4 Principle of SAP Figure 9-25 shows the functional block diagram of the SAP.



9 Other Boards 1 orderwire phone

Overhead processing module ETH COM

System communication module

Power monitoring module

2 SDH NNI phones 1 F1 4 S1-S4 13 communications between boards 2 NM itnerfaces 2 protocol bus 8 alarm inputs/4 alarm outputs and concatenation Cabinet indicator activating and concatenation 2 -48V power monitoring 3.3V backup power monitoring

Front panel

Backplane

Figure 9-25 Functional block diagram of the SAP

1. Overhead Processing Module

It processes E1, E2, F1, and Serial 1–4 bytes. Figure 9-24 shows the position of each orderwire byte in the SDH frame. 2. System Communication Module

It implements communication between 13 boards and provides a bus for transmitting MSP, SNCP, TPS protection switching and clock protocol. 3. Power Monitoring Module

It detects two –48 V power supplies and 3.3 V backup power supply, and implements eight house-keeping alarm inputs and four house-keeping alarm outputs and their concatenation, and the drive and concatenation of four cabinet indicators.

9.6.5 Principle of SEI Figure 9-26 shows the functional block diagram of the SEI.



9 Other Boards Backplane 防护和滤波电路 Protection and filtering circuits Front panel

F&f OAM F1 Series 4 Series 3 Series 2 Series 1 Clock output interface Clock input interface House-keeping alarm output Outgoing subnet voice Orderwire interface Indicator concatenation Indicator output House-keeping alarm concatenation House-keeping alarm output House-keeping alarm input Figure 9-26 Functional block diagram of the SEI

The SEI provides a protect and filter circuit. The SEI accesses and sends various control and management signals to the CXL and SAP for processing.

9.6.6 Front Panel 1. N1AUX

There is an indicator on the N1AUX front panel to show its working status, as described in Table 9-16. Table 9-16 Indicator of the AUX

Indicator

Status

Description

STAT (red and green)

On, green

The +3.3 V power supply is normal.

On, red

The +3.3 V power supply is abnormal, and the AUX board is fed with the backup power.

Off

Both the +3.3 V working power and the backup power fail, and the board is fed with no power.

The interfaces of the N1AUX are described in Table 9-17.



9 Other Boards

Table 9-17 Interfaces of the N1AUX

Front panel

STAT CLKO1 CLKO2

CLKI1 CLKI2

CLK1

CLK2

REV

ETH

F&f

COM

F1

EXT

Interface

Description

Interface type

CLKO1

75 Ω clock output interface 1

SMB

CLKO2

75 Ω clock output interface 2

SMB

CLK1

120 Ω clock interface 1

RJ-45

REV

Reserved

RJ-45

F&f

F&f interface

RJ-45

F1

F1 interface

RJ-45

PHONE

Orderwire interface

RJ-45

V1

Off network audio interface 1

RJ-45

V2


RJ-45

PHONE

LAMP1

OAM

OAM interface

RJ-45

V1

LAMP2

S1

Serial 1

RJ-45

V2

ALMO1

S2

Serial 2

RJ-45

OAM

ALMO2

S3

Serial 3

RJ-45

S4

Serial 4

RJ-45

CLKI1

75 Ω clock input interface 1

SMB

CLKI2

75 Ω clock input interface 2

SMB

CLK2

120 Ω clock interface 2

RJ-45

ETH

NM interface

RJ-45

COM

COM commissioning interface

RJ-45

EXT

Extended subrack interface

RJ-45

LAMP1

Cabinet indicator output interface

RJ-45

LAMP2

Input cabinet indicator concatenating interface

RJ-45

ALMO1

House-keeping alarm concatenating interface

RJ-45

ALMO2

1–4 house-keeping alarm output interface

RJ-45

ALMI1

1–4 house-keeping alarm input interface

RJ-45

ALMI2


RJ-45

S1

ALMI1

S2

ALMI2

S3

ALMI3

S4

ALMI4



9 Other Boards

Front panel

Interface

Description

Interface type

ALMI3


RJ-45

ALMI4


RJ-45

Table 9-18 Pin assignment of CLK1 and CLK2 interface

Front view

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Pin No.

Description

1

Negative receiving end

2

Positive receiving end

3

Ground

4

Negative transmission end

5

Positive data transmission end

6

Ground

7 and 8

Not defined.

Table 9-19 Pin assignment of ETH, COM, EXT and F1 interface

Front view

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Pin No.

Description

1

Positive data transmission end

2

Negative transmission end

3

Positive receiving end

4

Not defined.

5

Not defined.

6

Negative receiving end

7 and 8

Not defined.

Table 9-20 Pin assignment of F&f interface

Front view

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

Pin No.

Description

4

RS-232 receiving end

5

Ground

8

RS-232 transmission end

1, 2, 3, 6 and 7

Not defined.

1



9 Other Boards

Table 9-21 Pin assignment of PHONE, V1 and V2 interface

Front view

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

Pin No.

Description

4

Signal 1

5

Signal 2

1, 2, 3, 6, 7 and 8

Not defined.

1

Table 9-22 Pin assignment of LAMP1 and LAMP2 interface

Front view

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Pin No.

Description

1

The positive of critical alarm signal

2

The negative of cirtical alarm signal

3

The positivie of major alarm signal

4

The positive of power indicator signal

5

The negative of power indicator signal

6

The negative of major alarm signal

7

The positive of minor alarm signal

8

The negative of minor alarm signal

Table 9-23 Pin assignment of ALMO1 and ALMO2 interface

Front view

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Pin No.

Description

1

The positive of critical alarm output signal

2

The negative of cirtical alarm output signal

3

The positivie of major alarm output signal

4

The positive of alarm 1 output signal

5

The negative of alarm 1 output signal

6

The negative of major alarm output signal

7

The positive of alarm 2 output signal

8

The negative of alarm 2 output signal



9 Other Boards

Table 9-24 Pin assignment of OAM interface

Front view

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Pin No.

Description

1

Request to send

2

Data terminal ready

3

Transmit data

4

GND

5

GND

6

Receive data

7

Data set ready

8

Ready to recieve

Table 9-25 Pin assignment of S1, S2, S3 and S4 interface

Front view

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Pin No.

Description

1

The positive of RS-422 data transmission

2

The negative of RS-422 data transmission

3

The positivie of RS-422 data recieving

4

RS-232 data recieving

5

Ground

6

The negative of RS-422 data recieving

7

Not defined.

8

RS-232 data transmission


Front view

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Pin No.

Description

1

Alarm input 1

2

The ground of alarm input 1

3

Alarm input 2

4

Alarm input 3

5


6


7

Alarm input 4

8




9 Other Boards


Front view

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Pin No.

Description

1

Alarm input 5

2


3

Alarm input 6

4

Alarm input 7

5


6


7

Alarm input 8

8



Front view

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Pin No.

Description

1

Alarm input 9

2


3

Alarm input 10

4

Alarm input 11

5


6


7

Alarm input 12

8



Front view

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Pin No.

Description

1

Alarm input 13

2


3

Alarm input 14

4

Alarm input 15

5


6


7

Alarm input 16

8




9 Other Boards

2. R1/R2AUX

There is no indicator on the R1/R2AUX front panel. The interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel are described in Table 9-30. Table 9-30 Interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel

Interface

Description

Interface type

ETH

NM interface

RJ-45

COM

Commissioning interface

RJ-45

CLK

120 Ω external clock input/output interface

RJ-45

ALM

House-keeping alarm input/output interface

RJ-45

OAM/F&f

NM and management serial interface

RJ-45

3. EOW

There are two indicators on the EOW front panel as described in Table 9-31. Table 9-31 Indicators of the EOW

Indicator

Status

Description

STAT (red or green)

On, green


On, green


Off


On, green






On, red


Off

No power supply.

PROG (red or green)



9 Other Boards

The interfaces on the EOW front panel are described in Table 9-32. Table 9-32 Interfaces of the EOW

Interface

Description

Interface type

PHONE

Orderwire interface

RJ-11

S1

Broadcast data interface S1

RJ-45

S2


RJ-45

S3


RJ-45

S4


RJ-45

4. SAP

There are indicators on the SAP front panel. For their description, see Table 9-31. The interfaces on the SAP front panel are described in Table 9-33. Table 9-33 Interfaces of the SAP

Interface

Description

COM

Commissioning interface

ETH

NM interface

5. SEI

There is no indicator on the Q1SEI front panel. The interfaces on the SEI front panel are described in Table 9-34. Table 9-34 Interfaces of the SEI

Interface

Description

Interface type

Interface

Description

Interface type

ALMO1

4 house-keeping alarms output interface

RJ-45

ALM1

4 house-keeping alarms input interface

RJ-45

ALMO2

4 output house-keeping alarms concatenating interface

RJ-45

ALM2

4 house-keeping alarms input interface

RJ-45



9 Other Boards

Interface

Description

Interface type

Interface

Description

Interface type

LAMP1

4 cabinet alarm indicators output interface

RJ-45

S1

Serial 1

RJ-45

LAMP2

4 input cabinet alarm indicators concatenating interface

RJ-45

S2

Serial 2

RJ-45

OAM

OAM interface

RJ-45

S3

Serial 3

RJ-45

F1

F1 interface

RJ-45

S4

Serial 4

RJ-45

F&f

F&f interface

RJ-45

V1


RJ-45

PHONE

Orderwire interface

RJ-45

V2


RJ-45

CLK1

120 Ω clock 1

RJ-45

18

Reserved

RJ-45

CLK2

120 Ω clock 2

RJ-45

20

Reserved

RJ-45

CLKO1

75 Ω clock output 1

SMB

CLKO2

75 Ω clock output 2

SMB

CLK1

75 Ω clock input 1

SMB

CLK2

75 Ω clock input 2

SMB

ALMO1 ALMO2

LAMP1 LAMP2 OAM

F1

F&f

PHONE CLK1

CLK2

CLKO1 CLKO2

ALM1

ALM2

S1

S2

S3

S4

V1

CLKI1 CLKI2

V2

9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation 1. House-keeping alarm concatenation

Figure 9-27 shows the connection of alarm input and output of a single or multiple OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. Figure 9-28 shows the connection of alarm input and output of a single or multiple OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. Connect the alarm output interface to the alarm concatenation interface downstream. Make the connections one by one until the alarm output is connected to the centralized alarm system.



9 Other Boards Cabinet 1

Centralized alarm system

Cabinet 2

Subrack 1

Subrack 3

ALMO1

ALMO1

ALMO2

ALMO2

ALMI1

ALMI1

Subrack 2

Subrack 4

ALMO1

ALMO1

ALMO2

ALMO2

ALMI1

ALMI1


To the centralized alarm system ALMO1 ALMO2

Subrack 1

ALMO1 ALMO2

Subrack 3

ALMO1 ALMO2

ALMO1 ALMO2

Subrack 2

Subrack 4

Cabinet 1

Cabinet 2


2. Cabinet alarm indicator connection

The connection of the four OptiX OSN 3500 cabinet alarm indicators is shown in Figure 9-29. The connection of the four OptiX OSN 2500 cabinet alarm indicators is shown in Figure 9-30. Connect the cabinet alarm indicator signal output of subrack 2 to the concatenated cabinet alarm indicator input of subrack 1, and then connect the cabinet alarm indicator signal output of subrack 1 to the indicator interface on the top of the cabinet.



9 Other Boards

4 cabinet alarm indicators

Cabinet indicator subrack 1

LAMP1 LAMP2

subrack 2 LAMP1 LAMP2


Cabinet indicators LAMP1

LAMP2

Subrack 2 LAMP1

LAMP2

Subrack 1 Cabinet


9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper The jumper J9 at the lower right part of the N1AUX board is used to set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the main subrack or extended subrack, as shown in Table 9-35. Table 9-35 Jumper J9 setting

Jumper

Setting

Description

J9

shorted

Set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the main subrack.

Not shorted

Set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the extended subrack.

9.6.9 Version Description The AUX has three versions: N1, R1 and R2. The SAP and SEI have one version Q1 and the EOW has one version R1. For the application of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI in OptiX OSN products, see Table 9-15. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-46


9 Other Boards

9.6.10 Technical Parameters Table 9-36 Technical parameters of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI

Parameter

Description N1AUX

R1/R2AUX

EOW

SAP

SEI

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 44 (W)

111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

290 (H) x 30 (D) x 25.4 (W)

Weight (kg)

0.96

0.96

0.40

0.71

0.91


19

19

10

20

10









Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%





9 Other Boards

9.7 PIU The PIU or PIUA is a power interface board. It functions power access, lightening protection and filtering. The PIU has three versions: N1, Q1 and R1. The PIUA has one version R1.

The N1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and seated in slots 27 and 28.

The Q1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 2500 REG and seated in slots 22 and 23.

The R1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500B and seated in slots 18 and 19.

The R2PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500A and seated in slots 1 and 11.

9.7.1 Functionality

Provide lightning protection function and report the lightning protection failure alarm.

Enhance the electro magnetic compatibility (EMC) of the system by filtering and shielding the power supply.

Report the board in position information.

Support 1+1 hot backup protection. Any one PIU can provide power for the whole subrack independently.

Supply the FAN board with 48 V±20% power.

The N1PIU provides two 50 W power interfaces for external devices such as COA and HUB. The Q1PIU and R2PIU provide one 50 W power interface for external devices such as COA and HUB. The R1PIU does not provide external power interface.

The R1PIU provides a 75 Ω clock input interface and a 75 Ω clock output interface, and protects the clock signal.

9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU Figure 9-31 shows the functional block diagram of the N1PIU and Q1PIU. BGND

-48V

Pow er access unit

Lightning protection unit and failure detection

Filter unit

Lightning protection unit failure alarm

Backplane

SCC

Figure 9-31 The principle block diagram of the PIU

1. Power Access Unit

The power access unit accesses the –48/–60 V power for the system. 2. Lightning Protection Unit

The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection. The PIU will Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-48


9 Other Boards

report the failure of lightning protection unit to the SCC. 3. Filter Unit

The filter unit uses the electromagnetic interference (EMI) filter to filter the EMI signal to guarantee the stable operation of the equipment.

9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU Figure 9-32 shows the functional block diagram of the R1PIU. NEG(-)

NEG(-)

Lightning protection unit

Filter unit

RTN(+)

RTN(+)

Power detection

Clock input LED indication

Clock protection

Clock output



The power access unit accesses the –48/–60 V power for the system. 2. Lightning Protection Unit

The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection. 3. Filter Unit

The filter unit uses the electromagnetic interference (EMI) filter to filter the EMI signal to guarantee the stable operation of the equipment. 4. Power Detection

Detect whether the input power fails and indicates the status of the input power through an indicator. 5. Clock Protection

Protect the input clock signal.

9.7.4 Principle of R2PIU Figure 9-33 shows the functional block diagram of the R2PIU.



9 Other Boards

External power supply interface NEG(-)

Lightning protection unit

RTN(+)

Filter unit

Power detectio n

NEG(-) RTN(+) Fan power unit

LED indication



The power access unit accesses the –48 V/–60 V power for the system. 2. Lightning Protection Unit

The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection. 3. Filter Unit

The filter unit uses the electromagnetic interference (EMI) filter to filter the EMI signal to guarantee the stable operation of the equipment. 4. Power Detection

Detect whether the input power fails and indicates the status of the input power through an indicator. 5. Fan Power Unit

Provide the fan with regulated power supply. 6. External power interface unit

Provide external equipment (COA) with –48 V power. The power interface is on the front panel.

9.7.5 Front Pane 1. N1PIU

The N1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-34.



9 Other Boards

Figure 9-34 Front panel of the N1PIU

There are power interfaces on the N1PIU front panel, as described in Table 9-37. Table 9-37 Interfaces on the N1PIU front panel

Interface

Description

PWR

–48 V power access interface

PS1/PS2

50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB

2. Q1PIU

The Q1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-35.

Figure 9-35 Front panel of the Q1PIU



9 Other Boards

There are power interfaces on the Q1PIU front panel, as described in Table 9-38. Table 9-38 Interfaces of the Q1PIU

Interface

Description

PWR

–48 V power access interface

PWS

50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB

3. R1PIU

The R1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-36.


There is an indicator on the R1PIU front panel as described in Table 9-39. Table 9-39 Indicator of the R1PIU

Indicator

Status

Description

Power indicator (POWER)

On, green

Power input is normal.

Off

No power input or power failure

There are interfaces on the Q1PIU front panel as described in Table 9-40. Table 9-40 Interfaces of the Q1PIU

Interface

Description

PWR

–48 V power input interface

ClK IN

75 Ω clock input interface (SMB)

ClK OUT

75 Ω clock output interface (SMB)

4. R2PIU

The N1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-37.



9 Other Boards


The indicator on the R2PIU front panel is the same as that on the R1PIU. Refer to Table 9-39. There are two interfaces and one switch on the R2PIU front panel, as described in Table 9-41. Table 9-41 Indicators and the switch on the R2PIU front panel

Interface

Description

PWR

–48 V power input interface

PWS

50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB.

Power switch

Switch on the power by pushing the switch to the ON (1) position. Switch off the power by pushing the switch to the OFF (0) position.



9 Other Boards

9.7.6 Version Description The NIPIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and seated in slots 27 and 28. The Q1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 2500 REG, and seated in slots 22 and 23. The R1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500B and seated in slots 18 and 19. The R2PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500A and seated in slots 1 and 11.

9.7.7 Technical Parameters Table 9-42 Technical parameters of the PIU

Parameter

Description N1PIU

Q1PIU

R1PIU

R2PIU

Input voltage

–38.4 V to –72 V

–38.4 V to –72 V

–38.4 V to –72 V

–38.4 V to –72 V

Protecion tube F7

Main loop:

Main loop: 250V-20A-0.003 55 Ω

Main loop: 250V-10A-0.006 Ω

Main loop: 250V-10A-0.006 Ω

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 x 110 x 44

220 x 74 x 44

108 x 110 x 41.5

111.8 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg)

1.15

1.25

1.25

1.5


8

8

3

3









250 V-20 A-0.00355 Ω

Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%





9 Other Boards

9.8 UPM The uninterruptible power module (UPM), numbered GIE4805S, is a special power supply system. It can convert 110 V/220 V AC power supply directly to –48 V DC needed by transmission equipment, such as OptiX OSN 2500/1500. It is suitable for telecom carriers who do not have –48 V DC power supply equipment or who require storage batteries. The UPM power supply system consists of a power box (from 110 V/220 V to –48 V) and storage batteries. The output power of each UPM is 2 x 270 W. The power box is 1U high and can be installed directly in the 19-inch or ETSI cabinet. The appearance of the power box is shown in Figure 9-38.

E4 GI

5S 80

Figure 9-38 Appearance of the power box

Note: The UPM is displayed as a CAU board on the T2000. You can operate the CAU to manage and maintain the UPM power system.

The UPM power supply system can be protected by the storage battery. When the mains 110V/220V AC supply is interrupted, the battery module can supply power for nearly 4 hours. Only one power box is needed to connect to storage batteries when used with OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN 1500. For more detailed information, refer to OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual.



9 Other Boards

9.8.1 Functionality The OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN 1500 needs to be configured with two power boxes and four 12 V-40 Ah storage batteries. If the equipment does not need storage battery, one power box is all right. Each power box is configured with two rectifier modules and one monitoring module (standard configuration). 1. Hot Backup

The power conversion part of the UPM power supply system adopts two AC/DC rectifier modules for hot backup, and the rectifier module can balance load during working. If one rectifier module fails, the other will take over all the load immediately, not affecting the service on the equipment and thus enhancing the stability of the system. 2. Hot-Swap

In the UPM power supply system, the AC/DC rectifier module is hot-swappable. When the faulty rectifier module is replaced, the other one is still working normally. 3. Storage Battery Protection

The UPM power supply system can be protected by the storage battery. When the mains supply is interrupted, the UPM power system can switch automatically to the storage battery, ensuring normal operation of the equipment. The battery module can provide 40 Ah capacity. 4. Monitoring Function

The UPM power supply system integrates module monitoring and NM monitoring functions. The monitoring module can monitor and control the rectifier module, the parameters and status of AC/DC and the battery group in real time and report them to the transmission NM. The battery can achieve floating charge and current limitation management. 5. Loading Capacity

The load bearing capability of each rectifier module is designed to be 270 W.

9.8.2 Principle The UPM power supply system is supplied by one 220 V AC mains power. The input AC power is rectified into –48 V DC voltage by the rectifier module to provide two DC branches and one battery branch to the users. Under normal conditions, the rectifier module, storage battery loop and load loop work according to pre-defined parameters or user settings and they are under control of the monitoring module. The monitoring module monitors various statuses and data. In case of mains supply failure, the equipment will be supplied by storage batteries connected to the UPM power supply system. The batteries must be connected to the UPM power supply system before mains supply failure happens. When batteries start to discharge due to mains supply failure, the monitoring unit will report the alarm of no mains supply. With the discharge of batteries, battery voltage starts to drop. When battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring unit will report the alarm of DC under-voltage. When battery voltage reaches 43 V termination voltage, batteries will initiate power disconnection protection to cut connection of batteries with equipment to achieve automatic protection of batteries. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-56


9 Other Boards

When mains supply is recovered, the UPM power supply system resumes normal operation.

9.8.3 Front Panel The rear view of the power box is shown in Figure 9-39. 1

2

3

AC100~240

4

RUN ALM ALM Vout

ALM Vout RS232

5

1. AC input 5. Load

2. Rectifier module/air outlet 6. Load

3. Communication interface

6

4. Battery interface

Figure 9-39 Rear view of the power box

1. Indicators

There are two indicators (ALM and Vout) on the left side of the front panel of each rectifier module and two indicators (ALM and RUN) on the front panel of the monitoring module. When the power box works normally, the Vout indicators of the two rectifier modules are on (green) and the RUN indicator of the monitoring board is flashing (green). Table 9-43 Indicators of the power box

Module

Indicator

Status

Description

Rectifier module

ALM

On (red)

The rectifier module is faulty.

Vout

On (green)

The output of the rectifier is normal.

Monitoring module

RUN

Flashing (green)

The power system is normal.

ALM

On (red)

The power system is faulty.

2. Interfaces

The interfaces of the power box are described in Table 9-44. Table 9-44 Interfaces on the power box front panel

Interface

Description

AC100–240

It is an AC mains input socket for accessing 110 V/220 V AC power.

Red on/off button

It is at the upper right corner of the front panel of the rectifier module. You can enable/disable the rectifier module by pressing the button.



9 Other Boards

Interface

Description

RS-232 communication interface

Through this interface the UPM power supply system can communication with the SCC board of OptiX OSN products to report alarms and realize remote control. (The RS-232 serial port of one power box is connected to the F&f interface of OptiX OSN products, the RS-232 serial port of the other power box is connected to the ALM1 interface of the OptiX OSN products.)

Power output interface

There are three power output interfaces on the right of the power box. The one above is battery interface, through which the power box connects to the battery input socket at the back of the storage battery box with battery cable. The two interfaces below are load interface. They can supply power to OptiX OSN products through power cable.

9.8.4 Precautions

The battery input interface and load input interface shall not be mixed. Otherwise the UPM power supply system cannot work normally.

When load is added with power on, the strict tool and personal insulation measures must be taken to avoid accidents during operation.

9.8.5 Technical Parameters Table 9-45 shows the technical parameters of the UPM. Table 9-45 Technical parameters of the UPM

Parameter

Description

AC input voltage range

90 V–264 V AC

AC input

One channel of monophase three-wire AC power: 47 Hz–63 Hz

Rated input current

≤3.5 A

Output nominal voltage

54.0 V±0.5 V

Rated output current

10 A (two user load branches with each current not more than 5 A)

Number of backup battery groups

1 group (40 Ah)

Charging current of backup battery

≤3 A

Backup battery fuse

10 A

Storage battery: DC under-current point

45±0.5 V

Storage battery: termination voltage point

43±0.5 V



9 Other Boards

Parameter

Description

Storage battery: floating charge voltage

–54.0±0.5V

Regulated voltage precision

≤±1%

Non-balance of load sharing

≤±5% (50%–100% load)

Rated efficiency of integrated equipment

≥80%

Peak stray noise voltage

≤200 mV

Voltage drop in the power panel (20℃)

≤500 mV

Network adjustment rate

≤±0.1%

Dimensions of a power box

438 mm x 240 mm x 44 mm

Dimensions of a storage battery

197 mm x 165 mm x 170 mm

9.9 FAN The OptiX OSN equipment uses the modularized fan, as shown in Figure 9-40. The FAN is a fan control board, responsible for fan speed adjustment, fan failure detection and failure report, as well as report of the fan not-in-position alarm. The fan has two versions N1 and R1. The N1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 2500, and the R1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500. The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack uses three fan boxes. The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack uses two fan boxes. The OptiX OSN 1500 subrack uses one fan box.

Figure 9-40 Appearance of the FAN (OptiX OSN 3500)



9 Other Boards

9.9.1 Functionality

The fan boxes support hot swapping.

Power supplies for N1 fan boxes are for mutual backup.

Provide intelligent fan speed adjustment, which is reflected in the following aspects: −

Adjust the fan speed automatically

−

When one fan goes faulty, others operate at their full speeds

When the speed-adjusting signal is not normal, control the fans to operate at their full speeds.

−

Detect fan failure.

Reports alarms and online information of fans.

Provide an indicator on front panel to indicate the running status.

9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN Figure 9-41 shows the functional block diagram of the N1FAN. Status signal Speed adjusting signal Status ouput

Pow er supply

FAN

Fan

Alarm output External pow er ground 1 Pow er supply

Pow er ground External pow er supply 1 External pow er ground 1

Fan pow er board

External pow er supply 2 External pow er ground 2

Figure 9-41 Functional block diagram of the N1FAN

1. Fan Power Board

The FAN provides the fans with drive voltage. 2. Fan Control Board

The value of the drive voltage is controlled by the fan speed-adjusting signal for different rotating speeds. The fan control board also detects the failure of the fans, fan power board and itself. At fault occurrence, it will report alarm to the SCC for sending command to make the other two fans operate at their full speeds. The FAN also receives the turn-off command in case of low temperature and turn off the fans. The following items involves in the detection by the fan control board: failure of the fan power board, fault of the speed-adjusting signal, fan failure, and fan in-position.



9 Other Boards

9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN Figure 9-42 shows the functional block diagram of the R1FAN. － 48 V 1 － 48 V 2 GND1 GND2

GND Power access unit

GND

－48 V

Delay start unit

Fan －48 V

－ 48 V

GND

Fan alarm signals Voltage drop unit

－48 V

Status detection unit

GND

Figure 9-42 Functional block diagram of the R1FAN


Provide –48 V power for the FAN. 2. Status Detection Unit

Detect the status of the FAN. It reports the fan failure to the CXL and drive the corresponding alarm indicator when any of the six fans stops.

9.9.4 Front Panel 1. N1FAN

There is an indicator on the front panel of the FAN to show its working status, as described in Table 9-46. Table 9-46 Indicator of the N1FAN

Indicator

Color

Description

STATE (red, yellow and green)

On, green

The fan operates normally.

On, red

The fan, fan power board or fan control board is abnormal.

On, yellow

The fan is turned off due to low temperature.

2. R1FAN

The R1FAN front panel is shown in Figure 9-43.



9 Other Boards

FAN RUN ALM

Figure 9-43 Front panel of the R1FAN

The indicators on the R1FAN front panel are described in Table 9-47. Table 9-47 Indicators of the R1FAN

Indicator

Color

Description

RUN

On, green

The board operates normally.

Off, green

The board is not powered.

On, red

A fan stops.

Off, red

The fans operate normally.

ALM

9.9.5 Version Description The FAN has two versions: N1 and R1. The N1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 2500, and the R1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500.

9.9.6 Technical Parameters Table 9-48 Technical parameters of the FAN

Parameter

Description N1FAN

R1FAN

Dimensions (mm)

50.8 x 120 x 120

120 x 25.4 x 220

Weight (kg)

1.50

1.01

Power consumption (W) (Note)

15 (the input voltage is 48 V)

20 (the input voltage is 48 V)

Working voltage

–48 V±20% DC



9 Other Boards

Parameter

Description N1FAN









R1FAN

Humidity: 10%–90%

Humidity: 5%–95%



Note: The value is the power consumption for each fan frame.



10 Cables

10

Cables

This chapter describes the cables in the following aspects: cable classification, cable structure, connector, and pin assignment. Cables used by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 include:

Fiber jumper

Power cable and grounding cable

Alarm cable

Management cable

Clock cable

Signal cable

10.1 Fiber Jumper 10.1.1 Classification The fiber jumpers used by the OptiX OSN 3500 are classified as shown in Table 10-1.


10-1


10 Cables

Table 10-1 Classification of fiber jumper

Usage

Connector 1

Connector 2

Cable

Length

Optical fiber connecting OSN equipment to the ODF or other equipment

LC/PC

FC/PC

2 mm SLM optical fiber

6 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m

2 mm MLM optical fiber

3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m


5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m


10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m

LC/PC

Optical fiber connecting OSN equipments

SC/PC

SC/PC

SC/PC


2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m, 80 m

LC/PC

LC/PC


1.5 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m


3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m

LC/PC

FC/PC


6 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m

LC/PC

SC/PC


5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m

LC/PC

E2000/APC


NA

Select fiber connector and fiber length according to the on-site survey. The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 uses LC/PC fiber connector (SC/PC for the N2OU08 board). The “IN” interface on the externally-installed 62COA uses E2000/APC connector.

Caution: Multi-transverse mode optical transmitting module needs to be connected to multi-mode fiber; the single-longitudinal mode or multi-longitudinal mode optical transmitting module needs to be connected to single-mode fiber.

10.1.2 Connector Most optical interfaces on the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/2500 board front panel are of LC/PC type, as shown in Figure 10-1. The N2OU08 board provides SC/PC optical Huawei Technologies Proprietary

10-2


10 Cables

interface. The “IN” interface of the externally-installed 62COA uses E2000/APC connector, as shown in Figure 10-4. On the client-side ODF, the FC/PC or SC/PC optical interface is used. The matched FC/PC and SC/PC connectors are shown in Figure 10-3 and Figure 10-2 respectively. The four types of connector are described in Table 10-2. Table 10-2 Classification of fiber connector

Internal fiber connector

Description

LC/PC

Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished

E2000/APC

Connector with dust-proof cover/protruding polished (8°)

FC/PC

Round fiber connector/protruding polished

SC/PC

Square fiber connector/protruding polished

1. LC/PC Optical Interface

The appearance of the LC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-1.

Figure 10-1 LC/PC optical interface

The plugging/unplugging of LC/PC optical interface only needs axial operation instead of rotation. When inserting the fiber jumper with LC/PC connector, be careful to align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface on the optical board and push in the fiber with proper strength. When pulling it out, press the clip first, then push fiber connector inward slightly, and then pull out the connector. 2. SC/PC Optical Interface

The appearance of the SC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-2.


10-3


10 Cables

Figure 10-2 SC/PC Optical interface

3. FC/PC Optical Interface

The appearance of the FC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-3.

Figure 10-3 FC/PC optical interface

4. E2000/APC Optical Interface

The appearance of the E2000/APC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-4.


10-4


10 Cables

Figure 10-4 E2000/APC optical interface

10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables are listed in Table 10-3. Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 1500

Cabinet –48V/BGND/PGND power cable



Cabinet door grounding cable

Cabinet door grounding cable

_

Subrack power cable

Subrack power cable

Equipment –48 V/-60 V power cable/PGND power cable

HUB/COA power cable

HUB/COA power cable

_

_

UPM power cable

UPM power cable

10.2.1 Cabinet –48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable –48 V, BGND and PGND power cables are used for supplying power to the equipment in the cabinet. One end of the power cable connects to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the equipment room, and the other end connects to the power distribution box at the cabinet top. 1. Structure

The structure of the –48 V cabinet power cable/BGND power cable is shown in Figure 10-5. The PGND power cable is shown in Figure 10-6.


10-5


10 Cables

1

2

3 1. Naked connector

2. Naked connector-OT type

3. Cable tie

Figure 10-5 –48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable

1. Naked connector-OT type 4. Heat-shrink tube 7. Heat-shrink tube

2. Cable tie 5. Main tag

3. Naked connector 6. Wire

Figure 10-6 Cabinet PGND power cable

2. Pin Assignment

None 3. Technical Parameters Item –48 V cabinet power cable

Description Connector 2

Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin plating-naked ring terminal

Connector 1

Single cord end terminal-16 mm2-length 24 mm-inserted 12 mm deep-80A-green

Cable type

Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-round and bllue-85A


10-6


10 Cables

Item Cabinet BGND grounding cable

Cabinet PGND grounding cable

Description Connector 2


Connector 1

Single cord end terminal-16 mm2-24 mm-inserted 12 mm deep-80A-green

Cable type

Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-round and black-85A

Connector 1


Connector 3

Naked crimping connector-JG2-16 mm2-M6-95A-tin plating

Cable type

Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-yellow and green-85A

Fireproof level

CM

Length

10 m, 20 m, 30 m

10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable The cabinet door grounding cable grounds the front door, rear door and side panels. This cable is installed before delivery. 1. Structure

The structure of the cabinet door grounding cable is shown in Figure 10-7.

1. Naked connector--OT6-6

2. Heat-shrink tube

3. Main tag

Figure 10-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable

2. Pin Assignment

None


10-7


10 Cables

3. Technical Parameters Item

Description

Connector X1/X2

Naked crimping terminal-OT-6mm2-M6-tin plating-insulated ring terminal-12~10AWG

Cable

Model

Wire-600 V-UL1015-10AWG-50A-yellow and green

Fireproof level

CM

Length

350 mm

10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable The subrack power cable connects the power distribution box at the cabinet top and the PIU board on the subrack, leading the –48 V power supply from the top of the cabinet to subrack. This cable is installed before delivery. 1. Structure

The structure of the subrack power cable is shown in Figure 10-8.

1. Cable connector

2. Main tag

3. Cable tie

4. Tag

5. Common connector


2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the subrack power cable is shown in Table 10-4. Table 10-4 Pin assignment of subrack power cable

Cable connector

Bare connector

Relation

Core color

X1.A1

X2

A1 connects to X2

Blue (–48 V power)

X1.A3

X3

A3 connects to X3

Black (power ground)


10-8


10 Cables


Parameter

Cable connector X1

Cable connector-D type-3PIN-female

Naked connector X2/X3

Single cord end terminal-4 mm2-20A-insertion depth 10mm-gray

Cable

Model

Power cable-600 V-0 mm2-12AWG-balck (the core is blue and black)-41A

Number of cores

2

Fireproof level

CM

Color

Blue or black

Length

2500 mm, 3000 mm, 3500 mm

10.2.4 Equipment –48 V/–60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable The –48 V/–60 V power cable and grounding cable connects –48 V/–60 V power supply to the PIU board of the OptiX OSN 1500 to access –48 V/–60 V power to the equipment. 1. Structure

The structure of the –48 V/–60 V power cable is shown in Figure 10-9 and that of the PGND grounding cable is shown in Figure 10-10.

A3 A2

A

A1

Figure 10-9 Structure of the –48 V/–60 V power cable


10-9


10 Cables

1. Bare connector-OT type 5. Main tag

2. Cable tie 6. Wire

3. Bare connector 7. Heat-shrink tube

4. Heat-shrink tube

Figure 10-10 Structure of the PGND power cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the –48 V/–60 V power cable is shown in Table 10-5. Table 10-5 Pin assignment of the –48 V/–60 V power cable

Cable connector

Cable

Core color

A1

W1

Blue (–48 V/–60 power)

A3

W2


3. Technical Parameters Cable connector

–48 V/–60 V power cable

PGND grounding cable


Bare connector-OT-6mm2-M4-tin plating-round insulated conennctor-12 to 10AWG Bare connector-OT-6mm2-M8-tin plating-round insulated conennctor-12 to 10AWG


10-10


10 Cables

Cable

–48 V/–60 V power cable

PGND grounding cable

Model

Wire-300 V-16AWG-black(the core is blue and black)-13A

Wire-600 V-0mm2-10AWG-yellow/green50A

Number of cores

2

1

Fireproof level

CM

CM

Color

Blue and black

Yellow and green

Length

15 m, 30 m

15 m, 30 m

10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable The OptiX OSN 3500/2500 PIU board can supply power to external equipment (such as COA or HUB). The HUB/COA power cable connects power port on the PIU and the power port of external equipment. Both ends of the HUB/COA power cable use 4PIN connector, with one end connected to the PIU board and the other end to the power port of external equipment (HUB or COA). 1. Structure

The structure of the HUB/COA power cable is shown in Figure 10-11. 1

3

A

A-A

W1

3 1

4 2

B

X1 A 2 X3

W2 X2 W1.1 W1 W1.2 W2.1

B

X3

W2 W2.2

1. Common connector-female A-A. Sectional view in A direction

2. Plug-4PIN

Figure 10-11 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable


10-11

3. Main tag


10 Cables

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the HUB/COA power cable is shown in Table 10-6. Table 10-6 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable

Connector X1, X2

Cable W1, W2

Color

Connector X3

X1.1

W1.1

Brown

X3.1

X2.1

W2.1

X1.3

W1.2

Black

X3.3

X2.3

W2.2


Description

Connector X3

Common plug-4 PIN-double rows/4.20 mm

Connector X1/X2

Common terminal-female-4PIN-18/26AWG-13.7 mm in length

W1/W2 cable model

Twisted pair-0Ω-UL2464-0.64mm-22AWG-1 pair-black

Number of cores

2

Fireproof level

CM

Color

Black

Length

1800 mm

10.2.6 UPM Power Cable 1. Structure

The structure of the power cable connecting UPM to the OptiX OSN 2500/1500 is shown in Figure 10-12. A A1 A2

A

B

A3

X2

X1



10-12

B 1 2


10 Cables

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the UPM power cable is shown in Table 10-7. Table 10-7 Pin assignment of the UPM power cable

Cable connector X1

Cable

Cable connector X2

Core color

A1

W1

1

Blue (–48 V/–60 V power)

A3

W2

2



Parameter

Cable connector X1

Cable connector-D-spin-female (2 female, 1 male)

Common connector X2

Common terminal-2PIN-single row

Cable

Model

Power cable-300 V-1.31 mm2-16AWG-black (the core is blue and black)-13A

Number of cores

2

Fireproof level

CM

Color

The color of the core is blue or black

Length

2500 mm


10-13


10 Cables

10.3 Alarm Cable The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cables are listed in: Table 10-8 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cable

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 1500

Cabinet indicator cable

Cabinet indicator cable

_

Indicator/Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks

Indicator/Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks

_

Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack

Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack

_

Housekeeping alarm input/output cable



10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable The cabinet indicator cable is used to connect the AUX board on the subrack to the cabinet indicator, leading out the indicator signal from the AUX to the cabinet indicator. 1. Structure

The structure of the cabinet indicator is shown in Figure 10-13.

A-A. Sectional view in A direction

B-B. Sectional view in B direction

Figure 10-13 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable is shown in Table 10-9.


10-14


10 Cables

Table 10-9 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable

Connector X1

Connector X2,/X3/ X4/ X5

Color

Relationship

Function

Label print

X1.4

X2.2

White

Pair

Critical alarm

Green

X1.5

X2.1

Green

X1.1

X3.2

White

X1.2

X3.1

Blue

X1.3

X4.2

White

X1.6

X4.1

Brown

X1.7

X5.2

White

X1.8

X5.1

Orange

Ground Pair

Major alarm

Red

ground Pair

Power indicator

Orange

ground Pair

Minor alarm

Yellow

Ground


Description

Connector X1

Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector

Connector X2/X3/X4/X5

Common connector -2PIN-single row/2.5 mm

Cable model

Twisted pair cable-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores

8

Fireproof level

CM

Core diameter

0.5 mm

Length

2500 mm, 3000 mm, 3500 mm

10.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks The indicator/alarm concatenating cables between subracks respectively concatenates indicator and alarm signals of the OSN subracks in one cabinet or different cabinet. Both ends of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, with one end connected to LAMP1 or ALMO2 interface of one subrack and the other end to LAMP2 or ALMO1 interface of another subrack.


10-15


10 Cables

1. Structure

The structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks is shown in Figure 10-14.

1. Network port connector – RJ-45

2. Tag 1

3. Main tag


Figure 10-14 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks is shown in Table 10-10. Table 10-10 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks

Connector X1

Connector X2

Relationship

Alarm output

Indicator function

X1.1

X2.1

Pair

EMERGENCY ALARM +

YALMP

X1.2

X2.2

EMERGENCY ALARM -

YALMN

X1.3

X2.3

MAIN ALARM +

GRUNP

X1.6

X2.6

MAIN ALARM -

GRUNN

X1.4

X2.4

AUXILIARY ALARM 1+

RALMP

X1.5

X2.5

AUXILIARY ALARM 1-

RALMN

X1.7

X2.7

AUXILIARY ALARM 2+

WALMP

X1.8

X2.8

AUXILIARY ALARM 2-

WALMN

Pair

Pair

Pair


Description

Connector X1/X2


Cable model

Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores

8


10-16


10 Cables

Item

Description

Fireproof level

CM

Core diameter

0.5 mm

Length

3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m

10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack The alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack is used to concatenate the signals output/input from/to the OptiX OSN equipment and non OSN series transmission equipment (such as OptiX 2500+, OptiX OSN 9500) of Huawei. One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to ALMO1 or ALMO2 interface of the subrack and the other end to the alarm output or alarm concatenating interface of other equipment. 1. Structure

The structure of the alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack is shown in Figure 10-15.

1. Network port connector - RJ45 L: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m

2. Main tag

3. Tag 1

4. Cable connector-D type 9 PINs-female

Figure 10-15 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack is shown in Table 10-11.


10-17


10 Cables

Table 10-11 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack

Connector X1

Connector X2

Relationship

Relationship

X1.1

X2.7

Pair

EMERGENCY ALARM +

X1.2

X2.3

X1.3

X2.6

X1.6

X2.1

X1.4

X2.8

X1.5

X2.4

X1.7

X2.9

X1.8

X2.5

EMERGENCY ALARM Pair

MAIN ALARM + MAIN ALARM -

Pair

AUXILIARY ALARM 1+ AUXILIARY ALARM 1-

Pair

AUXILIARY ALARM 2+ AUXILIARY ALARM 2-


Description

Connector X1


ConnectorX2


Cable model


Number of cores

8

Fireproof level

CM

Core diameter

0.5 mm

Length

5 m, 10 m, 20 m

10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Cable The housekeeping alarm input cable inputs the alarm signal of the external equipment into the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 and the output cable outputs the alarm signal of the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 to the centralized alarm monitoring equipment. One end of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable connects to the housekeeping alarm input/output interface through an RJ-45 connector and the other end connects to the external equipment or the centralized alarm monitoring equipment. Make the connector following the on-site requirements. Each cable can provide 4 channels transmission for housekeeping alarm.


10-18


10 Cables

1. Structure

The structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable is shown in Figure 10-16.


2. Main tag


Figure 10-16 Structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable

2. Pin Assignment

OptiX OSN 3500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for 16 inputs and 4 outputs.

OptiX OSN 2500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for 8 inputs and 4 outputs.

OptiX OSN 1500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for three inputs and one output.

So the pin assignment of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500 is shown in Table 10-12 and that for OptiX OSN 1500 is shown in Table 10-13. Table 10-12 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500

Connector X1

Color

Relationship

Alarm output

Alarm input

X1.1

Blue

Pair

EMERGENCY ALARM +

SW_INPUT 1+

X1.2

White

EMERGENCY ALARM -

SW_INPUT 1-

X1.3

Orange

MAIN ALARM +

SW_INPUT 2+

X1.6

White

MAIN ALARM -

SW_INPUT 2-

X1.4

Green

AUXILIARY ALARM 1+

SW_INPUT 3+

X1.5

White

AUXILIARY ALARM 1-

SW_INPUT 3-

Pair

Pair


10-19


10 Cables

Connector X1

Color

Relationship

Alarm output

Alarm input

X1.7

Brown

Pair

AUXILIARY ALARM 2+

SW_INPUT 4+

X1.8

White

AUXILIARY ALARM 2-

SW_INPUT 4-

Table 10-13 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 1500

Connector X1

Color

Relationship

Alarm output

Alarm input

X1.1

Blue

Pair

-

SW_INPUT 1+

X1.2

White

-

SW_INPUT 1-

X1.3

Orange

-

SW_INPUT 2+

X1.6

White

-

SW_INPUT 2-

X1.4

Green

-

SW_INPUT 3+

X1.5

White

-

SW_INPUT 3-

X1.7

Brown

SW_OUT1+

-

X1.8

White

SW_OUT1-

-

Pair

Pair

Pair


Description

ConnectorX1


Cable model

OptiX OSN 3500/2500: Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U OptiX OSN 1500: Twisted pair-100±15 Ω-shielded CAT5E SFTP-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE445U

Number of cores

8

Fireproof level

CM

Core diameter

OptiX OSN 3500/2500: 0.5 mm OptiX OSN 1500: 0mm

Length

10 m, 20 m, 30 m


10-20


10 Cables

10.4 Management Cable The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables are listed in Table 10-14. Table 10-14 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 1500

OAM serial port cable



Serial1–4/F&f serial port cable



RS-232/422 serial port cable



Ordinary telephone wire



COA concatenating cable



Straight through cable



Crossover cable

Crossover cable

Crossover cable

10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable The OAM serial port cable is used for management and remote maintenance of the OptiX OSN 3500. One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to the OAM interface. The other end uses DB25 connector, connected to the laptop computer, serial NM or modem. 1. Structure

The structure of the OAM serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-17

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 A-A. Sectional view in A direction B-B. Sectional view in B direction

2. Main tag

3. Cable connector-DB25 male

Figure 10-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable


10-21


10 Cables

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable is shown in Table 10-15. Table 10-15 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable

Connector X1

Connector X2

Relationship

Function

X1.2

X2.20

Single

DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

X1.3

X2.2

Single

TD (Transmit Data)

X1.6

X2.3

Single

RD (Receive Data)

X1.4

X2.7

Pair

SG (Signaling Ground)

X1.5


Description

Connector X1


ConnectorX2

Cable connector-D type-25PIN-male

Cable model


Number of cores

8

Fireproof level

CM

Length

5000 mm

10.4.2 Serial 1–4/F&f Cable The serial 1~4/F&f cable is used for:

transparent transmission of environment detection data signal

management of external devices like COA

management of the UPM

One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to serial 1–4 interfaces or F&f serial interface, and the other end uses DB9 connector, connected to external detection equipment or external equipment. 1. Structure

The structure of the Serial 1–S4/F&f cable is shown in Figure 10-18.


10-22


10 Cables

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 A-A. Sectional view in A direction B-B. Sectional view in B direction

2. Main tag


Figure 10-18 Structure of the serial 1–4/F&f cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the Serial 1–4/F&f cable is shown in Table 10-16. Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the serial 1–4/F&f cable

Connector X1

Connector X2

X1.1

X2.8

X1.2

X2.9

X1.3

X2.6

X1.6

X2.7

X1.4

X2.3

X1.8

X2.2

X1.5

X2.5

Relationship Pair

Pair

Pair Single

Function RS-422TX + RS-422TX RS-422RX + RS-422RX RS-232RX RS-232TX SG


Description

Connector X1


ConnectorX2


Cable model

(1) Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U (2) Twisted pair-100 Ω-SEYVP-0.48 mm-26AWG-8 cores-black


10-23


10 Cables

Item

Description

Number of cores

8

Fireproof level

CM

Length

Cable (2) is 3 m and cable (1) is 15 m

10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable The RS-232/422 serial port cable is used to transmission management signaling between different subnets. Both ends use RJ45 connector. One end is connected to the RS-232/422 serial port, and the other end to the RS-232/422 serial port of other NE. 1. Structure

The structure of the RS232/422 serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-19.

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 A-A. Sectional view in A direction

2. Main tag

Figure 10-19 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the RS232/422 serial port cable is shown in Table 10-17.


10-24


10 Cables

Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable

Connector X1

Connector X2

Relationship

Function

X1.3

X2.1

Pair

RX +

X1.6

X2.2

X1.1

X2.3

X1.2

X2.6

X1.5

X2.5

X1.4

X2.8

X1.8

X2.4

RX Pair

TX + TX -

Pair

SG 232RX

Single

232TX


Description

Connector X1/X2


Model


Number of cores

8

Fireproof level

CM

Length

15 m

10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire The telephone wire is used to connect the orderwire phone. Both ends use RJ-11 connector. One end is connected to the PHONE interface and the other end to the interface of the orderwire phone. 1. Structure

The structure of the ordinary telephone wire is shown in Figure 10-20.

1. Phone connector-RJ-11crystal plug

2. Main tag

Figure 10-20 Structure of ordinary telephone wire


10-25


10 Cables

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the ordinary telephone wire is shown in Table 10-18. Table 10-18 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire

Connector X1

Connector X2

Function

X1.1

X2.1

No connected

X1.2

X2.2

No connected

X1.3

X2.3

TIP

X1.4

X2.4

RING

X1.5

X2.5

No connected

X1.6

X2.6

No connected


Description

Connector X1/X2

Network interface connector-6PIN-26 to 28AWG

Cable model

Power cable-150 V-UL20251-0.08 mm2-28AWG-black-1A-2-core telephone wire

Number of cores

2

Fireproof level

CM

Length

15 m

10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable When multiple COAs are installed in the cabinet, the RS-232/422 serial port is required to concatenate them. Both ends of the cable use DB9 connector, connected to the RS232-1 serial port of one COA and the RS232-2 serial port of another COA. 1. Structure

The structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-21.


10-26


10 Cables


2. Main tag

Figure 10-21 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable is shown in Table 10-19. Table 10-19 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable

Connector X1

Connector X2

Remark

3

2

A pair

2

3

5

5

Grounding


Description

Connector X1/X2


Cable model

Twisted pair-100 ohm-UL2464-0.32 mm-28AWG-2P-grey

Number of cores

2 pairs

Fireproof level

CM

Length

0.6 m, 2.5 m

10.4.6 Straight Through Cable The straight through cable is used in many ways, including:

Connect the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 and HUB.

Connect HUB and NM computer

Connect the Ethernet interface board and Ethernet equipment Huawei Technologies Proprietary

10-27


10 Cables

Both ends of the straight through cable use RJ-45 connector which connects the equipment at two ends respectively. 1. Structure

The structure of the straight through cable is shown in Figure 10-22.


2. Tag 1

3. Main tag

4. Tag 2

Figure 10-22 Structure of straight through cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the straight through cable is shown in Table 10-20. Table 10-20 Pin assignment of the straight through cable

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relationship

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

Pair

X1.1

X2.1

White/Orange

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.3

X2.3

White/Green

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.5

X2.5

White/Blue

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

X1.7

X2.7

White/Brown

Pair

Pair

Pair


Description

Connector X1/X2

Network interface connector-crystal model connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with SFTP network cable


10-28


10 Cables

Item

Description

Cable model

Communication cable-100±15 Ω-CAT5E-SFTP 24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 445U

Number of cores

8

Fireproof level

CM

Length

5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m

10.4.7 Crossover Cable The crossover cable is used to connect the NM computer to the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500. Both ends of the cable use RJ-45 connector. One end is connected to the ETH interface, and the other end to the network port of the compute. 1. Structure

The structure of the crossover cable is shown in Figure 10-23.

1. Network port connector RJ-45

2. Tag 1

3. Main tag

4. Network cable

5. Tag 2

Figure 10-23 Structure of the crossover cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the crossover cable is shown in Table 10-21. Table 10-21 Pin assignment of crossover cable

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relationship

X1.6

X2.2

Orange

Pair

X1.3

X2.1

White/Orange

X1.2

X2.6

Green

X1.1

X2.3

White/Green

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.5

X2.5

White/Blue


10-29

Pair

Pair


10 Cables

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relationship

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

Pair

X1.7

X2.7

White/Brown


Description

Connector X1/X2

Network interface connector-crystal model connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with SFTP network cable

Model

Communication cable-100±15Ω-CAT5E-SFTP-24AWG-8 cores PANTONE 646U

Number of cores

8

Fireproof level

CM

Length

5 m, 30 m


10-30


10 Cables

10.5 Signal Cable The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables are listed in Table 10-22. Table 10-22 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 1500

75 Ω E1 cable

75 Ω E1 cable

75 Ω E1 cable

120 Ω E1 cable

120 Ω E1 cable

120 Ω E1 cable

E3/DS3/STM-1 cable

E3/DS3/STM-1 cable

E3/DS3/STM-1 cable

Extended subrack service connection cable

_

_

10.5.1 75 Ω 8xE1 Cable The 75 Ω 8xE1 cable, used to input/output E1 signal, connects to the interface on the D75S interface board. One end uses DB44 connector, connected to the 75 Ω E1 interface board. The other end is connected to DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit eight E1 signals. 1. Structure

The structure of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable is shown in Figure 10-24.

1. Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male 3. Tag 3, marked: “W2 (E1:5 to 8)”

2. Tag 1, marked: ”W1 (E1:1 to 4)” 4. Main tag


2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable is shown in Table 10-23.


10-31


10 Cables


PIN of DB44

Cable W1 Core Series NO.

Remark

PIN of DB44


38

Ring

R1

34

Ring

23

Tip

19

Tip

37

Ring

33

Ring

22

Tip

18

Tip

36

Ring

32

Ring

21

Tip

17

Tip

35

Ring

31

Ring

20

Tip

16

Tip

15

Ring

11

Ring

30

Tip

26

Tip

14

Ring

10

Ring

29

Tip

25

Tip

13

Ring

9

Ring

28

Tip

24

Tip

12

Ring

8

Ring

27

Tip

7

Tip

Shell

Out braid of whole cable & ring of each coax

Shell

Out braid of whole cable & ring of each coax

1

3

5

7

2

4

6

8

R2

R3

R4

T1

T2

T3

T4

Remark

1

R5

3

R6

5

R7

7

R8

2

T5

4

T6

6

T7

8

T8


Description

Connector X


Cable model (W1/W2)

Coaxial cable-SYFVZP-75-1-1x8(A)-75 ohm-9.65 mm-1.2 mm-0.252 mm-white

Fireproof level

CM

Number of cores

8 x E1

Diameter

cover diameter 9.65mm-insulation diameter 1.2mm-conductor diameter 0.252mm

Length

3 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m


10-32


10 Cables

Caution: The pin assignment table of the E1 cable is put in one packing case with the cable. Be sure not to discard it before installation

10.5.2 75 Ω 16xE1 Cable The 75 Ω 16xE1 cable, used to input/output E1 signal, connects to the interface on the L75S interface board. One end uses 2 mm HM connector, connected to the 75 Ω E1 interface board L75S. The other end is connected to DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. 1. Structure


1. Cable connector

2. Terminal


2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable is shown in Table 10-24. Table 10-24 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω 16xE1 cable

Plug X

Cable W Core

a1

Tip

a2

Ring

Series No.

Remark

1

R1

Plug X

Core

a10

Tip

a11

Ring


10-33

Cable W Series No.

Remark

17

R9


Plug X

10 Cables Cable W Core

a3

Tip

a4

Ring

a6

Tip

a7

Ring

a8

Tip

a9

Ring

b1

Tip

b2

Ring

b3

Tip

b4

Ring

b6

Tip

b7

Ring

b8

Tip

b9

Ring

c1

Tip

c2

Ring

c3

Tip

c4

Ring

c6

Tip

c7

Ring

c8

Tip

a9

Ring

d1

Tip

d2

Ring

d3

Tip

d4

Ring

d6

Tip

d7

Ring

Series No.

Remark

2

T1

3

R2

4

T2

5

R3

6

T3

7

R4

8

T4

9

R5

10

T5

11

R6

12

T6

13

R7

14

T7

15

R8

Plug X

Core

a12

Tip

a13

Ring

a15

Tip

a16

Ring

a17

Tip

a18

Ring

b10

Tip

b11

Ring

b12

Tip

b13

Ring

b15

Tip

b16

Ring

b17

Tip

b18

Ring

c10

Tip

c11

Ring

c12

Tip

c13

Ring

c15

Tip

c16

Ring

c17

Tip

c18

Ring

d10

Tip

d11

Ring

d12

Tip

d13

Ring

d15

Tip

d16

Ring


10-34

Cable W Series No.

Remark

18

T9

19

R10

20

T10

21

R11

22

T11

23

R12

24

T12

25

R13

26

T13

27

R14

28

T14

29

R15

30

T15

31

R16


Plug X

10 Cables Cable W Core

d8

Tip

d9

Ring

Series No.

Remark

16

T8

Plug X

Cable W Core

d17

Tip

d18

Ring

Series No.

Remark

32

T16


Description

Connector X

2 mm HM cable connector-4x18PIN-28-30AWG-press-fit

Cable model (W1/W2)

Coaxial cable-SYFVZP-75-1-1x32(A)-75 ohm-18 mm-1.2 mm-0.254 mm-Huawei gray

Fireproof level

CM

Number of cores

16 x E1

Cover diameter-insulation diameter-conductor diameter

18 mm-1.2 mm-0.254 mm

Length

10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m

Caution: The pin assignment table of the E1 cable is put in one packing case with the cable. Be sure not to discard it before installation

10.5.3 120 Ω 8xE1 Cable The 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable is used to input/output E1 signals. One end uses DB44 connector, connected to 120 Ω E1 electrical interface board D12S. The other end is connected to the DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit eight E1 signals. 1. Structure



10-35


10 Cables

1. Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male 3. Tag 3, marked"W2 (RX1–8)"

2. Tag 1, marked:"W1 (TX1–8)" 4. Main tag

Figure 10-26 Structure of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 120 Ω 8xE1 cable is shown in Table 10-25. Table 10-25 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable

PIN of DB44


15

Blue

30

White

14

Orange

29

White

13

Green

28

White

12

Brown

27

White

11

Grey

26

White

10

Blue

25

Red

9

Orange

24

Red

Pair

Pair

Pair

Pair

Pair

Pair

Pair

Remark

Tx1

Tx2

Tx3

Tx4

Tx5

Tx6

Tx7

PIN of DB44

Cable W2 Core

38

Blue

23

White

37

Orange

22

White

36

Green

21

White

35

Brown

20

White

34

Grey

19

White

33

Blue

18

Red

32

Orange

17

Red


10-36

Remark Series NO. Pair

Rx1

Pair

Rx2

Pair

Rx3

Pair

Rx4

Pair

Rx5

Pair

Rx6

Pair

Rx7


10 Cables

PIN of DB44


8

Green

7 Shell

Remark

PIN of DB44

Cable W2 Core

31

Green

Red

16

Red

Out braid of whole cable

Shell

Out braid of whole cable

Pair

Tx8

Remark Series NO. Pair

Rx8


Description

Connector X


Cable model

Communication cable-120 Ω-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-16 cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores

16

Inner conductor diameter

0.5 mm

Fireproof level

CM

Length

10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m

10.5.4 120 Ω 16xE1 Cable The 120 Ω 16 x E1 cable is used to input/output E1 signals. One end uses 2 mm HM connector, connected to the 120 Ω E1 electrical interface board L12S or PL1B. The other end is connected to the DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. 1. Structure

The structure of the 120 Ω 16xE1 cable is shown in Figure 10-27. 3 W2

X

W1

2

1

1. Cable connector

2. Terminal



10-37

3. Main tag


10 Cables

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 120 Ω 8xE1 cable is shown in Table 10-26. Table 10-26 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω 16xE1 cable

Plug X

Cable W1 Core

a1

Blue

a2

White

a6

Orange

a7

White

b1

Green

b2

White

b6

Brown

b7

White

c1

Grey

c2

White

c6

Blue

c7

Red

d1

Orange

d2

Red

d6

Green

d7

Red

a10

Brown

a11

Red

a15

Grey

a16

Red

b10

Blue

b11

Black

b15

Orange

b16

Black

c10

Green

c11

Black

Series NO.

Remark

Pair

R1

Pair

R2

Pair

R3

Pair

R4

Pair

R5

Pair

R6

Pair

R7

Pair

R8

Pair

R9

Pair

R10

Pair

R11

Pair

R12

Pair

R13

Plug X

Core

a3

Blue

a4

White

a8

Orange

a9

White

b3

Green

b4

White

b8

Brown

b9

White

c3

Grey

c4

White

c8

Blue

c9

Red

d3

Orange

d4

Red

d8

Green

d9

Red

a12

Brown

a13

Red

a17

Grey

a18

Red

b12

Blue

b13

Black

b17

Orange

b18

Black

c12

Green

c13

Black


10-38

Cable W2 Series NO.

Remark

Pair

T1

Pair

T2

Pair

T3

Pair

T4

Pair

T5

Pair

T6

Pair

T7

Pair

T8

Pair

T9

Pair

T10

Pair

T11

Pair

T12

Pair

T13


Plug X

10 Cables Cable W1 Core

c15

Brown

c16

Black

d10

Grey

d11

Black

d15

Blue

d16

Yellow

a5

shield

Series NO.

Remark

Pair

R14

Pair

R15

Pair

R16

PGND

Plug X

Cable W2 Core

c17

Brown

c18

Black

d12

Grey

d13

Black

d17

Blue

d18

Yellow

a14

shield

Series NO.

Remark

Pair

T14

Pair

T15

Pair

T16

PGND


Description

Connector X

2 mm HM cable connector-4x18PIN—24-26AWG-press-fit

Cable model W1/W2

Symmetrical twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-32 cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores

32

Inner conductor diameter

0.5 mm

Fireproof level

CM

Length

10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m

10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable The E3/DS3/STM-1 cable is used to input/output E3/DS3/STM-1 signal. One end uses SMB connector, connected to the E3/DS3/STM-1 interface board. The other end is connected to the DDF, and the connector needs to be made as required. 1. Structure

The structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable is shown in Figure 10-28.


10-39


10 Cables

1. Coaxial connector-SMB

2. Main tag

3. Coaxial cable

Figure 10-28 Structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable

2. Pin Assignment

None 3. Technical Parameters Item

Description

Connector

Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight and female

Cable I

Cable II

Cable III

Cable IV

Model

Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34 mm-shielded

Diameter

cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1 mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm

Length

10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m

Model

Coaxial cable-75 ohm-4.4 mm-2.4 mm-0.4 mm-shielded-grey

Diameter


Length

15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m

Model

Coaxial cable-75ohm-6.7mm-3.8mm-0.61mm-shielded-grey

Diameter


Length

15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 130 m

Model

Coaxial cable-75 ohm-5.80 mm-3.71 mm-0.643 mm-black

Diameter


Length

30 m

Fireproof level

CM


10-40


10 Cables

10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable The OptiX OSN 3500 supports extended subrack, adding/dropping up to 504 x E1 services. The extended subrack service connection cable is used to connect the service between main subrack and extended subrack in one cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to the EXA/EXB interface of the UXCSB board of the main subrack and the other end to the EXA/EXB interface of the XCE board. 1. Structure

The structure of the extended subrack service connection cable is shown in Figure 10-29. 2

1

1

2

X1

1. PIN#1

X2

2. PIN#26

Figure 10-29 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable is shown in Table 10-27.


10-41


10 Cables

Table 10-27 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable

Pin

Core and serial number

1

Core

1

14 2

Ground

15

Core

2

3 16

Ground

4

Core

3

17 5

Ground

18

Core

4

6 19

Ground

9

Core

5

21 8

Ground

23

Core

6

10 22

Ground

12

Core

7

24 11

Ground

26

Core

8

13 25

Ground

7

Core

20 X1/X2 enclosure

Ground


10-42

9


10 Cables


Description

Connector X1/X2

Cable Connector-1.27mm mini D type-26PIN male-LVDS,28AWG or 30AWG

Cable model

Communication Cable-100Ω-UL20379-30AWG-8P+1P-grey

Number of cores

8P+1P

Fireproof level

CM

Length

5m

10.6 Clock Cable The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables are listed in Table 10-28. Table 10-28 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 1500

75 Ω clock cable

75 Ω clock cable

75 Ω clock cable

120 Ω clock cable

120 Ω clock cable

120 Ω clock cable

1/2-channel clock transfer cable



10.6.1 Clock Cable The clock cable includes 75 Ω clock cable and 120 Ω clock cable, used for inputting/outputting external clock signal. For the 75 Ω clock cable, one end uses SMB connector, connected to the external clock interface of the AUX board. The other end is connected to external clock equipment and the connector needs to be made as required For the 120 Ω clock cable, one end uses RJ-45 connector, connected to the external clock interface of the AUX board. The other end is connected to external clock equipment and the connector needs to be made as required. The 120 Ω clock cable can input/output two clock signals. 1. Structure

The structure of the 75 Ω and 120 Ω clock cables is respectively shown in Figure 10-30 and Figure 10-31.


10-43


10 Cables

1. Coaxial connector -SMB

2. Tag


1. Tag 1 (R) and Tag2 (T) 2. Communication cable 4. Network port connector-RJ-45

3. Main tag


2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable is shown in Table 10-29. Table 10-29 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable

X1

W

Remark

X1.1

Blue

W1

X1.2

White

X1.4

Orange

X1.5

White


10-44

W2


10 Cables

3. Technical Parameters Item 75 Ω clock cable

120 Ω clock cable

Description Connector


Cable

Model

Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1mm-0.34 mm-shielded

Diameter


Length

10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m

Connector X1

Network interface cable-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector

Cable

Model

Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.4 mm-26AWG-2 pairs-Pantone 430U

Conductor diameter

0.4 mm/26AWG

Length

5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m, 50 m, 70 m, 100 m

10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable The clock transfer cable includes 1-channel and 2-channel 75 Ω/120 Ω clock cables. 1. Structure

The structure of 1-channel and 2-channel 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cables is shown in Figure 10-32 and Figure 10-33 respectively.

1. Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight/plug-female 3. 75 Ω/120 Ω transfer PCB

2. Main tag



10-45


10 Cables

1. Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight/plug-female 5. 75 Ω/120 Ω transfer PCB

2. Tag 1:“1#” 6. Tag 3:“1#”

3. Tag 2:“2#” 7. Tag 4:“2#”

4. Main tag


2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 2-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable is shown in Table 10-30. Table 10-30 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cable

Connector

75 Ω cable

Color

120 Ω cable

X1

Core

Blue

W3

Shielding layer

White

Core

Blue

Shielding layer

White

X2

W4

3. Technical Parameters Item 1-channel

Description Connector


75 Ω cable

Model


Diameter

Cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1 mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm

Model


Conductor diameter

0.4 mm/26AWG

120 Ω cable

Length

30 m


10-46


10 Cables

Item 2-channel

Description X1/X2 connector


75 Ω cable

Model


Diameter

Cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1 mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm

Model


Conductor diameter

0.4 mm/26AWG

120 Ω cable

Length

30 m


10-47



A

Indicator Description for Equipment and Board

A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description Indicator

Status

Description

Power indicator – Green

On

The cabinet is powered on.

Off

The cabinet is not powered on.

On

There is a critical alarm.

Off

There is no critical alarm.

On

There is a major alarm.

Off

There is no major alarm.

On

There is a minor alarm.

Off

There is no minor alarm.

Critical alarm indicator – Red

Major alarm indicator – Orange

Minor alarm indicator – Yellow

Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-1



A.2 Board Indicator Description 1. Board Hardware Indicator - STAT Status

Description

On, green


On, red


Off


2. Service Activation Indicator - ACT Status

Description

On, green

The service is activated, and the board is in service.

Off

The board is not activated.

3. Board Software Indicator - PROG Status

Description

On, green






On, red


Off

No power supply.

4. Service Alarm Indicator - SRV Status

Description

On, green

Service is normal, no service alarm occurs.

On, red

Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow

Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off

No service is configured or no power is fed.




5. Power Monitoring Indicators and Alarm Cut Indicator of the SCC Indicator name

Status

Description

Indicator for –48 V power supply A (PWRA)

On, green

The –48 V power supply A is normal.

On, red, or off

The –48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed).

Indicator for –48 V power supply B (PWRB)

On, green

The –48 V power supply B is normal.

On, red, or off

The –48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed).

Indicator for +3.3 V power supply C (PWRC)

On, green

The +3.3 V protection power is normal.

On, red

The +3.3 V protection power is lost.

Alarm cut indicator (ALMC)

On, yellow

Currently in permanent alarm cut-off status.

Off

Give sound warning upon alarm.

6. Ethernet Indicators of the SCC and AUX Indicator name

Status

Description

LINK indicator (Green)

On

Link between network cable and equipment is established.

Off

Link between network cable and equipment is not established.

On

There is data transmitted/received.

Off

There is no data transmitted/received.

ACT indicator (Orange)

7. Ethernet Port Indicator of Interface Board Status

Description

Remark

The green and yellow indicator is off.

The Ethernet cable is not connected.

-

The green indicator is on, and the yellow indicator does not flash.

The Ethernet cable is connected, but no data is transmitted.

-

The green indicator is on, and the yellow indicator flashes.

The Ethernet cable is connected, and data is transmitted.

The flashing frequency of yellow indicator depends on the transmission of Ethernet data.




B

Board Version Description

B.1 Board Version List The board versions provided by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 are listed Equipment

OSN3500 (40Gbit/s)

OSN3500 (80Gbit/s)

OSN2500 REG

OSN2500

OSN1500A

OSN1500B

N2SL64

√

√

N1SL16(A)

√

√

√

√

√

√

N2SL16(A)

√

√

√

√

√

√

N1SF16

√

√

√

√

√

√

N1SLQ4

√

√

√

√

√

N2SLQ4

√

√

√

√

√

N1SLD4

√

√

√

√

√

N2SLD4

√

√

√

√

√

N1SL4

√

√

√

√

√

N2SL4

√

√

√

√

√

N1SLT1

√

√

√

√

√

N1SLQ1

√

√

√

√

√

N2SLQ1

√

√

√

√

√

N1SL1

√

√

√

√

√

N2SL1

√

√

√

√

√

Board

Huawei Technologies Proprietary B-1

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Equipment

OSN3500 (40Gbit/s)

B Board Version Description OSN3500 (80Gbit/s)

OSN2500 REG

OSN2500

OSN1500A

OSN1500B

R1SLD4

√

√

√

R1SL4

√

√

√

R1SLQ1

√

√

√

R1SL1

√

√

√

Board

N1SEP1

√

√

√

√

√

N1SEP

√

√

√

√

√

N1PQ1

√

√

√

R1PD1 A/B

√

√ √

√

R1PL1 A/B

√

√

R1L75S

√

R1L12S

√

N1PQM

√

√

√

√

N1PD3

√

√

√

√

N1PL3

√

√

√

√

N1PL3A

√

√

√

N1SPQ4

√

√

√

√

N2SPQ4

√

√

√

√

N1D75S

√

√

√

√

N1D12S

√

√

√

√

N1D12B

√

√

√

√

N1D34S

√

√

√

√

N1C34S

√

√

√

√

N1MU04

√

√

√

√

N1EU08

√

√

√

N1OU08

√

√

√

N2OU08

√

√

√ √

N1TSB8

√

√

√

N1EFS4

√

√

√

N1EFS0

√

√

√


√

√

√

√ √



OSN3500 (40Gbit/s)

OSN3500 (80Gbit/s)

N2EFS0

√

√

√

N1EGS2

√

√

√

√

√

N2EGS2

√

√

√

√

√

N1EGT2

√

√

√

√

√

N1EFT8

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Board

OSN2500 REG

R1EFT4

OSN2500

OSN1500A

OSN1500B √

N1EMR0

√

√

√

√

√

N2EMR0

√

√

√

√

√

N1EGR2

√

√

√

√

√

N2EGR2

√

√

√

√

√

N1EFF8

√

√

√

√

N1ETF8

√

√

√

√

N1ETS8

√

√

√

√

N1ADL4

√

√

√

√

√

N1ADQ1

√

√

√

√

√

N1IDL4

√

√

√

√

√

N1IDQ1

√

√

√

√

√

N1MST4

√

√

√

√

√

N1MR2A

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

N1MR2B N1MR2C

√

√

√

N1LWX

√

√

√

√

√

N1BPA

√

√

√

√

√

N1BA2

√

√

√

√

√

N1DCU

√

√

N1GXCSA

√

N2GXCSA

√

N1EXCSA

√

N1UXCSA

√


√


OSN3500 (40Gbit/s)

B Board Version Description OSN3500 (80Gbit/s)

OSN2500 REG

OSN2500

OSN1500A

OSN1500B

Q1CXL1/4/16

√

√

√

Q2CXL1/4/16

√

√

√

Board N1UXCSB

√

N1XCE

√

N1SCC

√

√

N1GSCC

√

√

N2GSCC

√

√

Q1CRG

√

N1PIU

√

√

Q1PIU

√

√

R1PIU

√

R1PIUA

√

N1FAN

√

√

√

√

R1FAN

√

√

√

√

R1AUX

√

√

R2AUX

√

√

N1FANA

√

√

R1EOW Q1SAP

√

√

Q1SEI

√

√

N1AUX

√

√

61COA/62COA

√

√

√

√

√

√

TDA

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

UPM √ indicates that the product supports the board.

B.2 Version Description B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board The optical line interface boards of OptiX OSN products all have two versions: N1 and N2, as described in Table B-1 Huawei Technologies Proprietary B-4



Table B-1 N1 and N2 optical line interface boards

Item

Description

Similarity

The boards of two versions implement the same functions.

Difference

The N2 version supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM), but the N1 version does not.

NM support

The T2000 distinguishes N1 from N2 directly.

OptiX OSN product

Each product version (including V100R001, V100R002 and V100R003) supports N1 and N2 optical line interface boards. The optical interface board with single optical interface supports replacement between N1 and N2. After completion of hardware replacement, use the direct replacement command on the T2000 to effectuate the replacement.

Version replacement

Note: If an N2 board starts the TCM function before replacement, its replacement by an N1 board will fail.

Other optical interface boards do not support replacement between N1 and N2. Note: The optical interface boards with one optical interface refer to SL64, SL16, SF16, SL4 and SL1, which have one pair of optical interface.

B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board The Ethernet processing boards of OptiX OSN products can support N1, N2 or R1 versions. For details, refer to Table B-2. The EGT2 and EFT8 are Ethernet transparent transmission boards, supporting only N1 version currently. The EFT4, an Ethernet transparent transmission board seated in half-height slot and used on the OptiX OSN 1500 subrack, supports R1. Except EFS4, other Ethernet processing boards with Layer 2 switching function all support N1 and N2 version. Table B-2 Ethernet processing board version

Version

N1

N2

R1

EGT2/EFT8

Supported

–

–

EFT4

–

–

Supported

EFS4

Supported

–

–

EFS0/EGS2

Supported

Supported

–

EMR0/EGR2

Supported

Supported

–

Board

N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards are described Table B-3.




Table B-3 N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards

Item

Description

Similarity

The working principle and functions of N1 and N2 boards are the same.

Difference

The uplink bandwidth of the N1 board at the SDH side is half that of the N2 board. The N1 and N2 boards have the same hardware but different software.

NM support

The T2000 differentiates N1 from N2 directly. V100R001 products only support N1Ethernet processing boards. When N2 boards are inserted, they are displayed as N1 boards on the T2000 and used as N1 boards.

Product support

V100R002 products support N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards. When the T2000 uploads board configuration, all Ethernet processing boards (N1 or N2) are displayed as N1 boards by default. At this time, the boards are used as N1 boards. If you need to use N2 boards, select and configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to N2 software. V100R003 products support N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards. When the T2000 uploads board configuration, all Ethernet processing boards (N1 or N2) are displayed as N1 boards by default. At this time, the boards are used as N1 boards. If you need to use N2 boards, select and configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to N2 software. For any product version, the board software can be upgraded from N1 to N2.

Version replacement

The N1 boards are only used as N1 boards. For V100R002 and V100R003 products, N2 boards can be used as either N1 boards (displayed as N1 boards on the T2000) or N2 boards (displayed as N2 boards on the T2000). When N2 boards are used as N1 boards, the boards can be upgraded to N2 boards by deleting the original board and adding an N2 board. During the upgrade, services will be interrupted.




B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards 1. GXCSA

The OptiX OSN 3500 GXCSA has N1 and N2 versions, as described in Table B-4 Table B-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards

Item

Description

Similarity

Board functions and board software are the same.

Difference

Different FPGA program is uploaded due to different hardware

NM support

The T2000 does not differentiate N1 from N2.

Product support

Each product version (including V100R001, V100R002 and V100R003) supports N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA. The N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA can be replaced by each other.

Version replacement

Because the N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA use different FPGA program, select corresponding FPGA program in upgrading. Otherwise, the upgrading will fail.

2. SCC

The OptiX OSN 3500 SCC supports the following three versions: N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC, as described in Table B-5. Table B-5 N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC

Item

Description

Description

Implement system control and communication functions. N1SCC: does not support extended subracks or intelligent features

Difference

NM support

Product support Version replacement

N1GSCC: support extended subracks and intelligent N2GSCC: applicable to the OptiX OSN 7500 and OptiX OSN 3500, supporting intelligent features. On the T2000, N1SCC is displayed as SCC, N1GSCC as GSCC, N2GSCC as GSCC. Specific version number can be distinguished by bar code on the board front panel. V100R001 products support N1SCC only. V100R002 products support N1SCC and N1GSCC. V100R003 products support all versions. Compatible with subsequent versions.

3. CXL1/4/16

The CXL1/4/16 has Q1 and Q2 versions, as described in Table B-6.




Table B-6 Q1 and Q2 CXL1/4/16 boards

Item

Description

Similarity

Implement cross-connect, clock, system control and optical line processing functions.

Difference

NM support

Q1CXL1/4/16: support 20 Gbit/s higher order and 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect capacity. Q2CXL1/4/16: support 20 Gbit/s higher order and 20 Gbit/slower order cross-connect capacity, and support intelligent features. CXL1/4/16 is displayed as three parts on the T2000: system control, cross-connect and optical line interface. Q1CXL1/4/16 is displayed as SCC, CXL and Q1SL1/4/16. Q2CXL1/4/16 is displayed as GSCC, ECXL and Q1SL1/4/16.

Product support Version replacement

V100R001 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 only. V100R002 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 and Q2CXL1/4/16. V100R003 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 and Q2CXL1/4/16. Compatible with subsequent versions.

B.2.4 Other Boards The OptiX OSN PIU, AUX and FAN also have several versions, as described in Table B-7. Table B-7 Version description of PIU, AUX and FAN

Item

Description PIU

Similarity

Access and distribute –48 V power

N1PIU: applicable to 3500 Difference

Q1PIU: applicable to 2500

AUX

FAN

Provide auxiliary interfaces and orderwire processing functions

Dissipate heat

N1AUX: applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500

N1FAN: applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and the OptiX OSN 2500 R1FAN: applicable to OptiX OSN 1500

R1PIUA: applicable to 1500A

R1AUX and R2AUX: applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500

NM support

All displayed as PIU on the T2000.

All displayed as AUX on the T2000.

All displayed as FAN or FANA on the T2000.

Version replacement

Irreplaceable

For V100R003 products, R1AUX and R2AUX can be replaced by each other.

Irreplaceable

R1PIU: applicable to 1500B


N1FANA: used in high power consumption occasions


C


Power Consumption and Weight

Board


Weight (kg)

Board


Weight (kg)

N2SL64

32

1.12

N1EFS4

30

0.98

N1/N2SL16

20

1.10

N1/N2EFS0

35

0.98

N1SF16

26

1.09

N1/N2EGS2

40/43.2

1.04

N1/N2SLQ4

16

1.04

N1EGT2

23

0.90

N1/N2SLD4

15

1.01

N1EFT8

26

1.01

N1/N2SL4

15

1.00

N1EFT4

14

0.53

N1SLT1

15

1.22

N1/N2EMR0

50

1.20

N1/N2SLQ1

15

1.04

N1/N2EGR2

54

1.10

N1/N2SL1

14

1.00

N1ETF8

2

0.37

R1SL4

10

0.34

N1EFF8

6

0.44

R1SLD4

11

0.36

N1ETS8

2.5

0.37

R1SLQ1

12

0.40

N1ADL4

35

0.90

R1SL1

10

0.34

N1ADQ1

37

0.95

N1BA2

20

1.01

N1IDL4

36.6

1.01

N1BPA

20

1.01

N1IDQ1

36.6

1.01

N1DCU

0

0.42

N1MR2A

0

1.01

N1SEP1

17

0.95

N1MR2B

0

1.01

N1EU08

11

0.41

N1MR2C

0

1.01

Huawei Technologies Proprietary C-1



Board


Weight (kg)

Board


Weight (kg)

N2SL64

32

1.12

N1EFS4

30

0.98

N1/N2OU08

6

0.41

N1LWX

30

1.10

N1EU04

6

0.40

N1GXCSA

27

1.81

N1/N2SPQ4

24

0.91

N1EXCSA

62

2.00

N1MU04

2

0.41

N1UXCS

65

2.00

N1PD3

19

1.12

N1XCE

25

1.50

N1PL3

15

1.00

Q1CXL1/4/16

40

1.12

N1D34S

2

0.38

Q2CXL1/4/16

40

1.12

N1C34S

2

0.31

N1SCC

10

0.88

N1PQM

22

1.01

N2GSCC

10

0.88

N1PQ1

19

1.01

Q1CRG

12

0.90

N1D75S

5.5

0.35

N1PIU

8

1.15

N1D12B

1

0.31

Q1PIU

8

1.25

N1D12S

9

0.35

R1PIU

1.5

1.25

R1PD1

15

0.5

R1PIUA

3

1.25

R1PL1

7

0.45

N1FAN (Note 1)

15

1.50

R1L75S

5

0.27

R1FAN (Note 1)

20

1.01

R1L12S

3

0.24

R1EOW

10

0.40

N1PL3A

15

1.00

N1AUX

19

0.96

N1TSB8

5

0.28

N2AUX

19

0.96

61COA

10

3.50

62COA

75

8.00

Note: The value is the power consumption for each fan frame.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary C-2



D Abbreviation

Abbreviations and Acronyms Full name

A ADM

Add/Drop Multiplexer

AMI

Alternate Mark Inversion

APS

ATM Protection Switch

ATM

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

B BITS

Building Integrated Timing Supply

C CBR

Constant Bit Rate

CC

Continuity Check

CMI

Coded Mark Inversion

COA

Case-shaped Optical Amplifier

CPU

Center Processing Unit

CRC

Cyclic Redundancy Check

D DC

Direct Current

DCC

Data Communication Channel

DCE

Data Circuit-terminal Equipment

DCU

Dispersion Compensation Unit

DDF

Digital Distribution Frame

Huawei Technologies Proprietary D-1



Abbreviation

Full name

DTR

Data Terminal Ready

DVB-ASI

Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface

DWDM

Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

E ECC

Embedded Control Channel

EDFA

Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier

EMC

Electromagnetic Compatibility

EMI

ElectroMagnetic Interference

EPL

Ethernet Private Line

EPLAN

Ethernet Private LAN

ESCON

Enterprise Systems Connection

ETS

European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI

European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EVPL

Ethernet Virtual Private Line

EVPLAN

Ethernet Virtual Private LAN

F FC

Fiber Channel

FE

Fast Ethernet

FICON

Fiber Connection

FPGA

Field Programmable Gate Array

G GE

Gigabit Ethernet

GFP

Generic Framing Procedure

H HDB3

High Density Bipolar of order 3 code

HDLC

High level Data Link Control

I IEEE

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IS-IS

Intermedia System-Intermedia System

ITU-T

International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Abbreviation

D Abbreviations and Acronyms Full name

L LAPS

Link Access Procedure-SDH

LB

LoopBack

LCAS

Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCT

Local Craft Terminal

M MPLS

Multi-protocol Label Switch

MSP

Multiplex Section Protection

N NA

Not applicable

NRZ

Non Return to Zero

O OAM

Operation Administration and Maintenance

OSPF

Open Shortest Path First

P PA

nylon(polyamide); polyamide bar; Power Amplifier; Project Accounting; Project Administrator; Protocol Adapter

PDH

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

R RD

Receive Data

RIP

Routing Information Protocol

RSTP

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

S SG

Signaling Ground

SNCP

Sub-Network Connection Protection

SSM

Synchronization Status Marker

T TD

Transmit Data

TDA

Tone & Data Access Unit

TPS

Tributary Protection Switching


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Abbreviation

D Abbreviations and Acronyms Full name

U UBR

Unspecified Bit Rate

V VBR

Variable Bit Rate

VLAN

Virtual Local Area Network

VPN

Virtual Private Network

W WDM

Wavelength Division Multiplexing



Index

Index ADL4, 7-34 ADQ1, 7-34 ATM service processing board with IMA function IDL4, 7-40 IDQ1, 7-40 AUX communication module, 9-33 interface, 9-36 interface module, 9-33 power module, 9-33 technical parameter, 9-47 AUX board DIP switch and jumper, 9-46 front panel, 9-36 function, 9-30 principle, 9-33 slots, 9-30 version description, 9-46

Numerics 1:1 TPS protection,for EFS0, 7-17 1:N TPS protection,for E1/T1, 6-26 1:N TPS protection,for E3/DS3, 6-15 1:N TPS protection,for E4/STM-1, 6-5 1:N TPS protection,for STM-1, 5-40 120 Ω E1 cable, 10-35, 10-37 1-channel clock transfer cable, 10-45 2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-45 75 Ω E1 cable, 10-31, 10-33

A abbreviation, D-1 acronym, D-1 ACT. see service activation indicator ADL4 board front panel, 7-36 function, 7-34 indicator, 7-37, 7-42 interface, 7-37 principle, 7-35 protection configuration, 7-38 slots, 7-34 technical parameter, 7-39 version description, 7-39, 7-44 ADQ1 board front panel, 7-36 function, 7-34 indicator, 7-37, 7-42 interface, 7-37 principle, 7-35 protection configuration, 7-38 slots, 7-34 technical parameter, 7-39 version description, 7-39, 7-44 alarm concatenanting cable between OSN subrack and other subrack, 10-17 alarm concatenation, 9-44 alarm cut indicator, A-3 architecture,equipment, 1-1 ATM service processing board

B BA2 board application, 9-12 front panel, 9-14 function, 9-12 indicator, 9-14 interface, 9-14 principle, 9-13 slots, 9-12 technical parameter, 9-15 version description, 9-15 BGND power cable, 10-5 board appearance, 4-11 classification, 4-1 indicator (summary table), A-2 power consumption (summary table), C-1 weight (summary table), C-1 board classification cross-connect and SCC boards, 4-7 Data processong boards, 4-5 other boards, 4-9 PDH boards, 4-3 SDH boards, 4-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-1


Index

board hardware indicator, A-2 board software indicator, A-2 BPA board application, 9-12 front panel, 9-14 function, 9-12 indicator, 9-14 interface, 9-14 principle, 9-13 slots, 9-12 technical parameter, 9-15 version description, 9-15

COA 62COA, 9-16 application, 9-17 front panel, 9-19 function, 9-17 indicator, 9-19 installation, 9-22 interface, 9-20 MONITOR-1/MONITOR-2 interface, 9-21 power interface, 9-22 principle, 9-18 RS-232-1/RS-232-2 serial port, 9-20 technical specification, 9-23 version description, 9-23 COA concatenating cable, 10-26 connector E2000/APC, 9-20 CRG board front panel, 8-24 function, 8-22 indicator, 8-25 interface, 8-26 principle, 8-23 slots, 8-22 switch, 8-24 techincal parameter, 8-26 version description, 8-26 cross-connect & synchronous timing board CXL1, 8-9 CXL16, 8-9 CXL4, 8-9 EXCS, 8-2 GXCS, 8-2 UXCS, 8-2 XCE, 8-2 crossover cable, 10-29 CXL1 board front panel, 8-11 function, 8-9 indicator, 8-11 interface, 8-13 parameter configuration, 8-13 principle, 8-10 technical parameter, 8-14 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 board protection configuration, 8-13 slots, 8-9 version description, 8-14 CXL16 board front panel, 8-11 function, 8-9 indicator, 8-11 interface, 8-13 parameter configuration, 8-13 principle, 8-10 technical parameter, 8-14 CXL4 board front panel, 8-11 function, 8-9 indicator, 8-11 interface, 8-13 parameter configuration, 8-13

C C2. see signal label byte C34S board front panel, 6-13 cabinet configuration, 2-3 ETSI cabinet, 2-1 indicator, 2-3 indicator (summary table), A-1 power distribution unit, 2-4 size, 2-6 technical parameter, 2-6 type, 2-1 weight, 2-6 cabinet door grounding cable, 10-7 cabinet indicator cable, 10-14 cable technical parameter 1/2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-46 –48 V cabinet power cable, 10-6 75 Ω E1 cable, 10-32, 10-35 alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack, 10-18 cabinet BGND power cable, 10-6 cabinet door grounding cable, 10-8 cabinet indicator cable, 10-15 cabinet PGND power cable, 10-6 clock cable, 10-45 COA concatenating cable, 10-27 crossover cable, 10-30 E3/DS3/STM-1 cable, 10-40 extended subrack service connection cable, 10-43 housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-20 HUB/COA power cable, 10-12 indicator/alarm concatenation cable between OSN subracks, 10-16 OAM serial port cable, 10-22 RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-25 serial 1–4/f&f cable, 10-23 straight through cable, 10-28 subrack power cable, 10-9, 10-10 telephone wire, 10-26 UPM power cable, 10-13 capacity cross-connect for OptiX OSN 2500/1500, 8-9 cross-connect for OptiX OSN 3500, 8-2 case-shape optical amplifier COA, 9-16 clock cable, 10-43



Index 1:1 TPS protection, 7-17 1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 7-19 1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 7-18 1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 7-17 front panel, 7-15 indicator, 7-16 interface, 7-16 parameter configuration, 7-19 slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 7-21 EFS0/EFS4/EGS2 board version description, 7-20 EFS4 board front panel, 7-15 function, 7-12 indicator, 7-16 interface, 7-16 parameter configuration, 7-19 principle, 7-14 slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 7-21 EFS8 board function, 7-12 principle, 7-14 EFT4 board front panel, 7-5 function, 7-3 indicator, 7-6 interface, 7-7 parameter configuration, 7-8 principle, 7-4 slots, 7-2 EFT8 board front panel, 7-5 function, 7-3 indicator, 7-6 interface, 7-7 parameter configuration, 7-8 principle, 7-4 slots, 7-2 EGR2 board front panel, 7-28 function, 7-24 indicator, 7-29 interface board, 7-30 principle, 7-27 protection configuration, 7-30 slots, 7-24 technical parameter, 7-33 version description, 7-32 EGS2 board front panel, 7-15 function, 7-12 indicator, 7-16 interface, 7-16 parameter configuration, 7-19 principle, 7-14 slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 7-21 EGT2 board front panel, 7-5 function, 7-3

principle, 8-10 technical parameter, 8-14

D D12B. see also PQ1 D12S. see also PQ1 D34S. see also PD3 D34S board front panel, 6-13 slots, 6-11 version description, 6-20 D75S. see also PQ1 D75S/D12S/D12B board front panel, 6-24 function, 6-22 slots, 6-22 version description, 6-29 DCU application, 9-25 front panel, 9-26 function, 9-25 interface, 9-27 principle, 9-26 technical parameter, 9-28 version description, 9-28 DCU board slots, 9-25 dispersion compensation board DCU, 9-25

E E1 interface board D75S, 6-22 E1 processing board PQ1, 6-22 E1 processing board (half-slot) PD1 board, 6-31 PL1 board, 6-31 E1/T1 interface board D12B, 6-22 D12S, 6-22 E1/T1 processing board PQM, 6-22 E2000/APC optical interface, 10-4 E3/DS3 interface switching board D34S, 6-11 E3/DS3 processing board PD3, 6-11 PL3, 6-11 PL3A, 6-11 E3/DS3/STM-1 cable, 10-39 E4/STM-1 processing board SPQ4, 6-1 EFF8 board front panel, 7-5 interface, 7-7 EFF8/ETF8 board slots, 7-2 version description, 7-8 EFS0 board



Index

indicator, 7-6 interface, 7-7 parameter configuration, 7-8 principle, 7-4 slots, 7-2 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 board version description, 7-8 ejector lever, 4-11 EMR0 board front panel, 7-28 function, 7-24 indicator, 7-29 interface board, 7-30 principle, 7-27 protection configuration, 7-30 slots, 7-24 technical parameter, 7-33 version description, 7-32 EOW board front panel, 9-42 function, 9-30 principle, 9-33 slots, 9-30 version description, 9-46 Equipment –48 V/–60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable, 10-9 equipment architecture, 1-1 OptiX OSN 1500A, 1-5 OptiX OSN 1500B, 1-5 OptiX OSN 2500, 1-3 OptiX OSN 3500, 1-1 ETF8 board front panel, 7-5 interface, 7-7 Ethernet board with RPR function EGR2, 7-24 EMR0, 7-24 Ethernet electrical interface board ETF8, 7-2 Ethernet indicator ACT indicator, A-3 LINK indicator, A-3 Ethernet interface switching board ETS8, 7-11 Ethernet optical interface board EFF8, 7-2 Ethernet port indicator, A-3 Ethernet switching processing board EFS0, 7-11 EFS4, 7-11 EGS2, 7-11 Ethernet transparent transmission board EFT4, 7-2 EFT8, 7-2 EGT2, 7-2 ETS8 board front panel, 7-15 indicator, 7-16 interface, 7-16 slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 7-21 version description, 7-21

ETSI cabinet appearance, 2-1 EU08. see also SEP1 EU08 board front panel, 5-35 interface, 5-36 slots, 5-32 technical parameter, 5-40 EU08/OU08 board function, 5-33 version description, 5-40 EXCS board front panel, 8-4 EXCS board function, 8-2 indicator, 8-4 interface, 8-5 parameter configuration, 8-7 principle, 8-3 technical parameter, 8-7 EXCSA board version description, 8-7 extended subrack service connection cable, 10-41

F FAN function, 9-60 principle, 9-60 technical parameter, 9-62 version description, 9-62 FAN board indicator, 9-61 fan control board FAN, 9-59 fan tray assembly. see FAN FC/PC optical interface, 10-4 FE processing board RPR transmission, 7-24 switching, 7-11 transparent transmission, 7-2 fiber jumper. see tail fiber

G GE processing board RPR transmission, 7-24 switching, 7-11 transparent transmission, 7-2 GSCC board front panel, 8-18 slots, 8-16 GXCS board front panel, 8-4 function, 8-2 indicator, 8-4 interface, 8-5 parameter configuration, 8-7 principle, 8-3 technical parameter, 8-7 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE board protection configuration, 8-6



Index

slots, 8-2 GXCSA board version description, 8-7 GXCSB board version description, 8-7

front panel, 9-3 function, 9-1 indicator, 9-4 interface, 9-4 principle, 9-2 slots, 9-1 technical parameter, 9-5 version description, 9-5

H housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-18 HUB/COA power cable, 10-11

M

IDL4 board front panel, 7-41 function, 7-40 interface, 7-42 principle, 7-41 protection configuration, 7-43 slots, 7-40 technical parameter, 7-44 IDQ1 board front panel, 7-41 function, 7-40 interface, 7-42 principle, 7-41 protection configuration, 7-43 slots, 7-40 technical parameter, 7-44 indicator alarm cut indicator, A-3 board hardware indicator, A-2 board software indicator, A-2 cabinet, 2-3 cabinet (summary table), A-1 Ethernet indicator, A-3 Ethernet port indicator, A-3 power monitoring indicator, A-3 service activation indicator, A-2 service alarm indicator, A-2 indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks, 10-15 interface switching & bridging board TSB8, 5-32

mapping relation between terminals and PIUs, 2-4 MR2 board slots, 9-7 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C technical parameter, 9-11 version description, 9-11 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C board front panel, 9-9 function, 9-7 indicator, 9-10 interface, 9-10 principle, 9-8 MST4 board front panel, 7-48 function, 7-45 indicator, 7-48 interface, 7-48 parameter configuration, 7-49 principle, 7-46 slots, 7-45 technical parameter, 7-49 version description, 7-49 MU04. see also SPQ4 MU04 board front panel, 6-4 function, 6-2 interface, 6-4 principle, 6-2 slots, 6-1 technical parameter, 6-9 version description, 6-9 Multi-service transparent transmission processing board MST4, 7-45

J

N

J1. see path trace byte

N1PIU board front panel, 9-50 principle, 9-48

I

L

O

L12S board front panel, 6-32 L75S board front panel, 6-32 L75S/L12S board function, 6-31 slots, 6-31 version description, 6-35 LC/PC optical interface, 10-3 LWX board

OAM serial port cable, 10-21 optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2A/MR2B/MR2C, 9-7 optical booster & pre-amplifier BPA, 9-12 optical booster amplifier BA2, 9-12 orderwire processing board



Index UPM power cable, 10-13 PIU board function, 9-48 slots, 9-48 technical parameter, 9-54 PL1 board front panel, 6-32 function, 6-31 indicator, 6-33 interface, 6-33 parameter configuration, 6-35 principle, 6-32 slots, 6-31 technical parameter, 6-35 PL3 board front panel, 6-13 function, 6-11 indicator, 6-15 interface, 6-15 parameter configuration, 6-20 principle, 6-12 slots, 6-11 technical parameter, 6-20 PL3/PD3 board 1:N TPS protection, 6-15 version description, 6-20 PL3A board front panel, 6-13 function, 6-11 indicator, 6-15 interface, 6-15 parameter configuration, 6-20 principle, 6-12 slots, 6-11 technical parameter, 6-20 version description, 6-20 power consumption board (summary table), C-1 power distribution unit appearance, 2-4 power interface COA, 9-22 power interface board PIU, 9-48 power monitoring indicator, A-3 PQ1 board 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-29 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-28 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 6-27 front panel, 6-24 function, 6-22 indicator, 6-25 interface board, 6-25 parameter configuration, 6-29 principle, 6-23 protection configuration, 6-26 slots, 6-22 technical parameter, 6-29 PQ1/PQM board 1:N TPS protection, 6-26 version description, 6-29 PQM board

EOW, 9-30 OU08. see also SEP1 OU08 board front panel, 5-35 interface, 5-36 slots, 5-32 technical parameter, 5-40

P path trace byte, 5-5 PD1 board 1:N TPS protection, 6-33 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500A, 6-35 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-35 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-34 front panel, 6-32 function, 6-31 indicator, 6-33 interface, 6-33 parameter configuration, 6-35 principle, 6-32 protection configuration, 6-33 slots, 6-31 technical parameter, 6-35 PD1/PL1 board version description, 6-35 PD3 board front panel, 6-13 function, 6-11 indicator, 6-15 interface, 6-15 parameter configuration, 6-20 principle, 6-12 slots, 6-11 technical parameter, 6-20 PD3/PL3 board 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-19 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-18 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 6-17 PGND power cable, 10-5 pin assignment 1/2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-46 120 Ω E1 cable, 10-36, 10-38 75 Ω E1 cable, 10-31, 10-33 alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack, 10-17 cabinet indicator cable, 10-14 clock cable, 10-44 COA concatenating cable, 10-27 crossover cable, 10-29 extended subrack service connection cable, 10-41 housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-19 HUB/COA power cable, 10-12 indicator/alarm concatenation cable between OSN subracks, 10-16 OAM serial port cable, 10-22 RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-24 serial 1–4/F&f cable, 10-23 straight through cable, 10-28 subrack power cable, 10-8, 10-10 telephone wire, 10-26



Index principle, 5-29 slots, 5-27 technical parameter, 5-31 RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-24

front panel, 6-24 function, 6-22 indicator, 6-25 interface board, 6-25 parameter configuration, 6-29 principle, 6-23 protection configuration, 6-26 slots, 6-22 technical parameter, 6-29 PROG. see board software indicator PWRA/B/C. see power monitoring indicator

S SAP board front panel, 9-43 function, 9-30 principle, 9-34 slots, 9-30 version description, 9-46 SC/PC optical interface, 10-3 SCC power monitoring module, 8-18 SCC board communication module, 8-17 control module, 8-17 front panel, 8-18 function, 8-16 indicator, 8-20 interface, 8-21 principle, 8-17 slots, 8-16 switch, 8-19 technical parameter, 8-21 version description, 8-21 SEI board front panel, 9-43 function, 9-30 principle, 9-35 slots, 9-30 version description, 9-46 SEP1 board 1:N TPS protection, 5-36 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 5-39 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 5-38 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 5-38 front panel, 5-35 function, 5-33 indicator, 5-35 interface, 5-36 parameter configuration, 5-40 principle, 5-34 slots, 5-32 technical parameter, 5-40 version description, 5-40 serial 1–4/F&f cable, 10-22 service activation indicator, A-2 service alarm indicator, A-2 SF16 board front panel, 5-10 function, 5-7 indicator, 5-10 interface, 5-11 parameter configuration, 5-11 principle, 5-8 slots, 5-7 technical parameter, 5-12 version description, 5-11 signal label byte, 5-5

Q Q1PIU board front panel, 9-51

R R1PIU board front panel, 9-52 principle, 9-49 R1PIUA board front panel, 9-52 R1SL1 board front panel, 5-29 function, 5-28 indicator, 5-30 interface, 5-30 parameter configuration, 5-30 principle, 5-29 slots, 5-27 technical parameter, 5-31 R1SL1/R1SLQ1 board version description, 5-31 R1SL4 board front panel, 5-29 function, 5-28 indicator, 5-30 interface, 5-30 parameter configuration, 5-30 principle, 5-29 slots, 5-27 technical parameter, 5-31 R1SL4/R1SLD4 board version description, 5-31 R1SLD1 board function, 5-28 R1SLD4 board front panel, 5-29 indicator, 5-30 interface, 5-30 parameter configuration, 5-30 principle, 5-29 slots, 5-27 technical parameter, 5-31 R1SLQ1 board front panel, 5-29 function, 5-28 indicator, 5-30 interface, 5-30 parameter configuration, 5-30



Index

size cabinet, 2-6 OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, 3-23 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 OptiX OSN 2500 subrack, 3-17 OptiX OSN 3500 subrack, 3-9 SL1 board front panel, 5-24 function, 5-22 indicator, 5-24 interface, 5-25 parameter configuration, 5-25 principle, 5-22 slots, 5-21 technical parameter, 5-26 version description, 5-25 SL16 board front panel, 5-10 function, 5-7 indicator, 5-10 interface, 5-11 parameter configuration, 5-11 principle, 5-8 slots, 5-7 technical parameter, 5-12 version description, 5-11 SL4 board front panel, 5-17 function, 5-15 indicator, 5-18 interface, 5-18 parameter configuration, 5-18 principle, 5-16 slots, 5-15 technical parameter, 5-19 version description, 5-19 SL64 board front panel, 5-4 function, 5-1 indicator, 5-4 interface, 5-4 parameter configuration, 5-5 principle, 5-2 slots, 5-1 technical parameters, 5-5 version description, 5-5 SLD4 board front panel, 5-17 function, 5-15 interface, 5-18 parameter configuration, 5-18 principle, 5-16 slots, 5-15 technical parameter, 5-19 version description, 5-19 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500A board, 3-20 for OptiX OSN 1500B board, 3-27 for OptiX OSN 2500 board, 3-13 for OptiX OSN 2500 REG board, 3-18 for OptiX OSN 3500 board, 3-4 OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-19

OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-25 OptiX OSN 2500, 3-11 OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3 slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-26 slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-13 slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3 SLQ1 board front panel, 5-24 function, 5-22 indicator, 5-24 interface, 5-25 parameter configuration, 5-25 principle, 5-22 slots, 5-21 technical parameter, 5-26 version description, 5-25 SLQ4 board front panel, 5-17 function, 5-15 interface, 5-18 parameter configuration, 5-18 principle, 5-16 slots, 5-15 technical parameter, 5-19 version description, 5-19 SLT1 board front panel, 5-24 function, 5-22 indicator, 5-24 interface, 5-25 parameter configuration, 5-25 principle, 5-22 slots, 5-21 technical parameter, 5-26 version description, 5-25 SPQ4 board 1:N TPS protection, 6-5 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-8 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-7 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 6-6 front panel, 6-4 function, 6-2 indicator, 6-4 interface, 6-4 parameter configuration, 6-9 principle, 6-2 slots, 6-1 technical parameter, 6-9 version description, 6-9 SRV. see service alarm indicator STAT. see board hardware indicator STM-1 electrical processing board SEP1, 5-32 STM-1 interface board EU08, 5-32 MU04, 6-1 OU08, 5-32 STM-1 optical processing board SL1 board, 5-21 SLQ1 board, 5-21 SLT1 board, 5-21 STM-1 optical processing board (half-slot)



Index COA, 9-23 telephone wire, 10-25 TPS protection 1:1, 7-17 1:N, 6-5, 6-15 TSB8. see also SEP1 TSB8 board front panel, 5-35 function, 5-33 slots, 5-32 technical parameter, 5-40 version description, 5-40

R1SL1 board, 5-27 R1SLQ1 board, 5-27 STM-1/E4 processing board SPQ4, 6-1 STM-16 optical processing board SL16 board, 5-7 STM-4 optical processing board SL4 board, 5-15 SLD4 board, 5-15 SLQ4 board, 5-15 STM-4 optical processing board (half-slot) R1SL4 board, 5-27 R1SLD4 board, 5-27 STM-64 processing board SL64 board, 5-1 straight through cable, 10-27 subrack size for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-23 size for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 size for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-17 size for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-9 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-19 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-25 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-11 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 2500 REG, 3-18 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3 technical parameter for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-23 technical parameter for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 technical parameter for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-17 technical parameter for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-9 weight for OptiX OSN 1500, 3-31 weight for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-23 weight for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-17 weight for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-9 subrack power cable, 10-8 subrack structure OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-19 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-24 OptiX OSN 2500, 3-10 OptiX OSN 3500, 3-2 system auxiliary interface board AUX, 9-30 SAP, 9-30 SEI, 9-30 system control & communication board GSCC, 8-16 SCC, 8-16 system control and clock unit for REG CRG, 8-22

U uninterruptible power modules UPM, 9-55 UPM, 2-4 front panel, 9-57 function, 9-56 indicator, 9-57 interface, 9-57 precaution, 9-58 priciple, 9-56 technical parameter, 9-58 UPM power cable, 10-12 UXCS board front panel, 8-4 function, 8-2 indicator, 8-4 interface, 8-5 parameter configuration, 8-7 principle, 8-3 technical parameter, 8-7 UXCSA board version description, 8-7

W wavelength conversion board LWX, 9-1 weight board (summary table), C-1 cabinet, 2-6 OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, 3-23 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 OptiX OSN 2500subrack, 3-17 OptiX OSN 3500subrack, 3-9

X

T

XCE board front panel, 8-4 function, 8-2 indicator, 8-4 interface, 8-5 parameter configuration, 8-7 technical parameter, 8-7 version description, 8-7

tail fiber, 10-1 technical parameter 120 Ω E1 cable, 10-37, 10-39 cabinet, 2-6 OptiX OSN 1500 A, 3-23 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 OptiX OSN 2500 subrack, 3-17 OptiX OSN 3500 subrack, 3-9 technical specification


OSN 3500 2500 1500 Hardware Description Manual

Recommend Documents